Category: General

Hyperuricemia is a condition where uric acid levels are too high in the blood. This condition itself does not cause symptoms, but if not treated properly it can cause a variety of more serious problems such as gout and kidney stones.

Hyperuricemia or also widely known as high uric acid levels. Because many have been reported in Indonesia, come on, see the full review of hyperuricemia in this article.

What is Hyperuricemia?

According to Medical News Today, the human body produces uric acid as a by-product of various chemical breakdowns and purines, which are then naturally present in many foods. The kidneys themselves will filter uric acid from the bloodstream.

This hyperuricemia occurs when uric acid levels become too high, so the kidneys cannot work properly and optimally. Even if left alone, hyperuricemia can cause a variety of more serious problems, such as gout and kidney stones, so that treatment requires medical treatment.

Normal uric acid levels in the body of men and women are different. In men, normal uric acid levels are below 7 mg/dl, while in women it is below 6 mg/dl. If more than that, it is also known as hyperuricemia.

Diseases Caused Hyperuricemia Too High

Reporting from Healthline , only about a third of people with hyperuricemia then experience symptoms, otherwise known as asymptomatic hyperuricemia. Hyperuricemia itself is not a disease. However, if uric acid levels remain high, then over time it will cause various diseases, such as:

1. Gout

Gout or also known as gouty arthritis, this condition then appears in 20 percent of people who have hyperuricemia that is too high. In addition, decreased uric acid levels can also trigger gout. Gout can present as isolated attacks or sudden worsening of symptoms or flares. Some people’s chronic gout involves a number of attacks that occur over a short period of time.

Gout can affect any joint, but generally occurs first in the thumb area. In addition, other body parts, such as feet, ankles, knees, and elbows are common places where gout occurs. These gout attacks also tend to occur suddenly, often at night. Then, the attacks can be more severe in intensity around 12-14 hours. Even if left untreated, gout attacks will subside in two weeks.

Additional treatment may be needed if hyperuricemia causes gout. In gout, the doctor will then prescribe drugs to treat episodes of gout, such as non-steroidal anti-inflammatory drugs, such as ibuprofen, to reduce inflammation and pain.

In addition, inflammation drugs are also given based on the patient’s condition. Depending on the patient’s condition, if the patient is still healthy and not too severe, the doctor will give stronger drugs, such as prednisone.

Symptoms of gout include:

1. Severe pain in the joint area
2. Stiffness in the joint area
3. Joints that are then affected will be difficult to move
4. Redness and swelling
5. Defects in the joint area

2. Tophaceous Gout

Tophaceous gout as a chronic form of gout. If a person has had hyperuricemia for many years, the crystals in uric acid can then form clots which are also known as tophi. These hard lumps can be found under the skin, around joints, and in the indentations above the ears. Tophi can get worse, so joint pain will be even more uncomfortable. In fact, over time it will damage the joints or press on the nerves.

3. Kidney Stones

Uric acid crystals can also cause a buildup of stones in the kidney area. Often, the stones that form are small and can be passed in the urine. However, sometimes the size of these stones can also be enlarged to be excreted through the urine and eventually block the urinary tract.

Symptoms of kidney stones themselves include:

1. Pain in the side, back and under the ribs
2. Pain in the lower abdomen and in the groin area
3. Increased urge to urinate all the time
4. There is a burning sensation and pain when urinating Bloody urine
5. Nausea and frequent vomiting
6. Strong-smelling urine
7. Difficulty when urinating
8. Fever and feeling chills if there is a kidney infection.

In kidney stones, the treatment will depend on their size. Smaller kidney stones often pass on their own. It is important to drink lots of fluids as well as take pain medication when the stones pass.

Larger kidney stones are more likely to be removed. Doctors will use a variety of methods to remove kidney stones or help the body break down these stones.

This buildup of urine itself is an ideal breeding ground for bacteria. As a result, urinary tract infections often occur in people with kidney stones. Therefore, to prevent the occurrence of kidney stones we must adopt a healthy lifestyle.

Causes of High Hyperuricemia

Hyperuricemia occurs when there is too much uric acid in the blood. It also happens when you can’t excrete enough uric acid through your kidneys, or you have too much uric acid in your system.

This buildup often occurs as a result of a diet high in purines, chemicals in many foods and drinks. When the body breaks down purines during digestion, they produce uric acid as a by-product. Uric acid will enter the bloodstream from this metabolism. Then, the kidneys do the filtering of the blood, so the body will excrete it through the urine.

When you eat a high-purine diet, your kidneys can’t filter uric acid from your blood fast enough. This then causes high uric acid levels. So, don’t eat foods with high purine content too often.

Foods that Cause High Hyperuricemia

As previously explained that high uric acid can be caused by eating foods that contain very high purines. Examples of foods and drinks that are high in purines include:

1. Alcoholic drinks
2. Several types of fish or seafood, such as sardines
3. Shellfish
4. Some meats, such as bacon
5. Offal, such as liver and kidney
6. Other causes such as hyperuricemia include errors in purine metabolism and kidney disease.

Risk Factors

Aging and male gender are risk factors for hyperuricemia. In addition, according to a report in the journal Rheumatic Disease Clinics of North America, African descent, Maori and Filipino descent are more at risk of developing hyperuricemia than European descent. The risk factors themselves include:

1. Renal insufficiency
2. Metabolic syndrome
3. A diet high in alcohol, as well as purines, proteins and carbohydrates
4. Treatment includes thiazides, loop diuretics and low-dose aspirin
5. Necessary presence of Niacin, Acidosis, Chemotherapy
6. Diabetes
7. Hypothyroidism, Psoriasis and Lead poisoning
8. Polycythemia vera, Toxaemia associated with pregnancy
9. Tumor lysis syndrome and genetic predisposition

Diagnosis

The doctor will then recommend a urine test as well as a blood test to measure creatinine levels, which will help show kidney function as well as uric acid levels in the body. A urine test can be repeated after you have adopted a purine-restricted diet, which will then help determine if:

1. You previously consumed too many high-purine foods
2. Is the body producing too much uric acid
3. Is the body not secreting enough uric acid

If symptoms of gout are present, the doctor may want to check what fluid previously accumulated in the joint. This itself is done using a fine needle to draw fluid from the joint area, which will then be sent to a laboratory to be checked for evidence of uric acid crystals. The presence of these crystals indicates uric acid.

Treatment Steps

If you have experienced the symptoms previously mentioned, chances are that uric acid levels in your body are high. Therefore, you need to do some treatment or prevention so that uric acid levels decrease or even to avoid the disease.

Treatment of hyperuricemia itself can vary, depending on the type of symptoms to the severity of the patient. The following below are some effective ways you can do to help deal with uric acid levels in the body.

1. Reduce consumption of purine-rich foods

These purine-rich foods can be found in various types of meat, seafood, and vegetables, which will produce uric acid when you eat them. Below are some foods that you should avoid in dealing with excess uric acid levels in the body:

1. Sardine Food
2. Dried Nut Food
3. Food Fish and shellfish
4. Pork Food
5. Food Goat meat
6. Food Beef
7. Mushroom Food
8. Cauliflower Food

2. Drink More Water

By drinking lots of water, you will cleanse the kidneys of uric acid. In addition, you will also reduce all the toxins in the body. Also make sure you drink at least 8-10 glasses of water every day.

3. Maintain a Healthy Weight

Fat cells will produce more uric acid when compared to muscle cells. Therefore, excess body weight will hinder the kidneys in removing uric acid from the body. So, you should maintain a healthy weight, so that your body’s health is maintained. That way, you can avoid gout.

4. Include Fiber Rich Foods

With the help of foods rich in fiber, it will help you in getting rid of various digestive problems from the body. In addition, foods rich in fiber are also considered to balance sugar and insulin levels, so they play a very important role in maintaining uric acid in the body.

5. Avoiding drugs which then cause high uric acid

Did you know that various drugs will actually cause uric acid levels in the body to be high. Therefore, it is important for you to consult your doctor about any supplements or medical drugs.

6. Reduce stress

Increased stress and anxiety can trigger the possibility of inflammation, which in turn causes hyperuricemia. A healthy lifestyle, as well as a careful diet, adequate exercise, and adequate sleep will help you avoid various possible diseases. So, as much as possible you should be able to control stress so you don’t get gout.

Gout is indeed a disease that often occurs in Indonesia. Even so, uric acid can be prevented by eating healthy foods. Thus the discussion about hyperuricemia, from understanding to treatment steps. Hopefully all the discussion above is useful for Sinaumed’s.

Related Books

1. Prevent and Overcome Various Joint Diseases, Gout, Rheumatism

In this book, various joint diseases will be clearly explained and what is rheumatism? What is the relationship or difference between rheumatism, arthritis, gout, rheumatoid arthritis and other joint and muscle diseases and other rheumatic-like diseases such as pseudogout, bursitis, tendinitis and tenosynovitis, rheumatic fever, polymyalgia, Lyme disease, ankylosing spondylitis, acute septic arthritis, fibromyalgia, chondromalacia , osteochondritis dissecans? Readers will get complete information about rheumatic/arthritis and gout/gout/gout, starting from their introduction, treatment, and prevention. Dietary and drug information including new rheumatic drugs, herbal remedies, and supplements. Likewise the latest therapy is the use of Medical Gas Hydrogen (H2). Good physical exercise or exercise for rheumatism sufferers is also presented in this book. Now we can seek treatment for rheumatism with a higher cure rate, so that we can have a better quality of life.

2. My Food Coach: Reducing Uric Acid Disease

Gout does not get much attention, even from sufferers, even though if it is not handled properly, this disease can lead to more severe diseases. Even worse, most sufferers depend on drugs to relieve symptoms of increased uric acid levels, this is mainly due to the assumption that gout sufferers “can’t eat anything”. This assumption arises due to incomplete information about the disease itself and about foods that can trigger an increase in uric acid levels. This book reviews gout in detail, starting from its history, to what can be done to prevent increased uric acid without consuming it. drug.

3. Daily Foods of Uric Acid

Healthy people are people who always take care of themselves with the right lifestyle and consumption patterns. Each body has its own needs that must be met. Also, every body has different weaknesses so they must be met in the right way. The pattern of consumption for gout sufferers, because they are very susceptible to food ingredients that contain purines, must be careful in consuming them. The calculations must be clear; what is the amount of food that will be consumed. A food taboo for gout sufferers is not a “fixed price”, but still negotiable. Based on that also this book is compiled; a way to enjoy daily food without fear of gout attacks. This book presents 30 healthy foods for uric acid sufferers and their recipes.

4. The Right Way to Overcome Gout

This short book on Effective Ways to Overcome Gout is important to read. This book is a light and comprehensive review of everything that lay people need to know about gout, from the definition, symptoms, prevention, to medical treatment so that one can live peacefully and happily, even when exposed to gout. This book also presents various tips and tricks for maintaining overall health, so that it is hoped that everyone can start taking care of their health in a directed manner and no longer have to worry about going to the doctor, if needed.

 

Understanding Human Needs – Humans as living beings, will definitely have various needs as life support. We often know this, namely that humans have needs for food, clothing, shelter, and other needs to meet the satisfaction of life’s needs with the achievement of a prosperous life. Basically life refers to how a person’s efforts to meet their needs in order to survive.

There are several forms of human needs, Sinaumed’s needs to know and understand them in order to maximize these needs properly. The following is an explanation of the various human needs, to examples:

Definition of Human Needs

According to the Big Indonesian Dictionary, need means something that is needed. So, human needs can be interpreted as something that is needed by humans, or human desires that must be fulfilled, in order to achieve spiritual and physical satisfaction for their survival. This need can be in the form of goods or services.

If humans can meet their needs, then it can be said, his life has reached prosperity. Likewise with prosperity, prosperity can occur, if most of the needs of human life are met. But prosperity here is different from wealth, right, sinaumedians.

If wealth refers to a sense of fulfilling most of the needs of human life, while wealth refers to the amount of property or material owned by a person. To better understand human needs, you can read the book Smk/Mak Kl.Xii Basic Human Needs K/13 Rev.

Various Human Needs

1. Human Needs According to Intensity

You need to know, it turns out that the need, there is intensity. So, based on the intensity, the needs are also still broken down into several groups, let’s see!

a. Absolute Necessity

Absolute implies, may not or may not, so absolute needs are needs that must be fulfilled immediately. If the needs are not met, the individual cannot survive. An example is the need to eat and drink.

b. Primary needs

Primary needs are also known as basic needs, which are human needs for a decent life. Primary needs, including the following: Food, food is the first and foremost primary need. Food can be obtained by processing from animal and vegetable sources.

Clothing, clothing has the meaning of clothing materials, so clothing is included in the primary human needs. Clothing serves to protect the human body from the outside environment, such as sunburn, cold weather, animal attacks, and also protects the body from immoral desires or thoughts.

Plank, synonymous with a house or a place to live. The house or residence serves as a place of refuge and place of activity. Boards are a primary need, even though they are owned by themselves, or rented from other parties.

As a primary need for humans, it is very important to maintain a healthy eating lifestyle because it can affect the body and also health. In the book Eat Don’t Just Be Filled with a Healthy Eating Lifestyle, you will be given information about various good foods to fulfill your daily nutrition.

c. Secondary need

Secondary needs are needs that arise after primary needs are met. Each individual has a variety of secondary needs, these needs depend on the desire and ability of each individual to fulfill. Secondary needs for individuals, such as vehicles, shoes, telephone, makeup, and many others.

d. Tertiary Needs

Tertiary needs are the next derivative of the group of human needs based on their intensity. Tertiary needs will arise if the primary and secondary needs have been met.

Usually tertiary needs are more inclined to satisfy the need for luxury goods that are part of entertainment. Included in tertiary needs are luxury homes, sports cars, branded clothes, vacations abroad and many other examples.

2. Human Needs Based on Time of Need

Needs based on time are not talking about duration here, sinaumedians. But will explain about the time. To be clearer, let’s look directly at it. This need is divided into three, namely:

a. Urgent needs

Urgent needs, may not be needs that were planned beforehand, these needs can appear at any time that are critical, urgent, or emergency, tend to force them to be fulfilled immediately. Could be related to individual lives, if this need is not met. For example, fulfilling the need for blood plasma for people infected with the Covid 19 virus.

b. Needs Now

Almost the same as an urgent need, only the result is different, the present need is a need that must be met at this time, it cannot be postponed. For example, bringing people to the doctor for treatment, providing assistance to victims of natural disasters, before they go hungry.

c. Future Needs

Based on the time of need, this type of need is the most tolerant, because this need can be met at a later date, can be postponed, and is not urgent. But it’s good, if prepared now, or start from now. For example, insurance and investment.

3. Human Needs Based on Their Nature

The next grouping of human needs is human needs based on their nature. To be clearer, follow on!

a. Physical Needs

Surely you already understand, what is called physical, is related to the body or body. Physical needs are the needs needed by the body in order to fulfill physical satisfaction. For example, exercise, rest, clothing, and many others.

b. Spiritual Needs

As a physical companion, there is also a spiritual need. Spiritual needs are needs that are needed by the mind or soul, the effect if these needs are met is that humans get happiness. Examples are worship, entertainment, gathering with friends, and others.

4. Human Needs Based on the Subject

In this group, human needs are further divided into two types, as follows below.

a. Individual Needs

From the title, the definition is clear, meaning it is a requirement that is needed by each individual. Why is it called an individual need? Because every individual is born diverse and has their own needs.

Info: the needs of an individual are different from other individuals.

b. Collective Needs

Collective needs are needs that are used for the benefit of the people. For example, bridge construction, reservoir construction, road renovation, stadium construction.

5. Needs According to Socio-Cultural

The word socio above is closely related to social, or the social environment of the community, while culture is something that comes from the traditions of the local community, of course it also includes psychological aspects. So, these needs can be further divided into several needs as below.

a. Social Needs

Social needs are needs that arise because of the position of an individual in society, so that individual must be able to carry out various efforts, so that they are seen as equal. For example social donations, motorized vehicles, and so forth.

b. Psychological Needs

Psychological needs are needs related to spirituality, or the inner condition of a person. For example, the need to be accepted by others, the need to be loved, the need for freedom and security.

Tool for Satisfying Human Needs

Come on, let’s see an explanation of the means of satisfying needs in the form of goods and services.

1. Goods

Goods are anything tangible or bodily. So, goods are various objects that have a physical form, and are used by people to meet their needs.

Characteristics of goods:
Tangible or bodily.
Has value and benefits that can be felt, when used.
When used, the value, benefits and physical form will decrease and eventually run out.

2. Services

Services do not have a physical form, services are actions that provide everything that is needed by other people, in general these services are related to one’s skills.

Service Features:

• It is intangible, so it cannot be touched.
• It can only be felt, the satisfaction is in the form of the mind.
• It will never run out

For example goods delivery services, haircut services, transportation services, and other services.

Factors Influencing Human Needs

As living beings, humans have a variety of needs, these needs are influenced by several factors, these factors cannot stand alone, but are interrelated with each other, according to the situation and conditions that are happening. Want to know what factors influence human needs? Come on, follow again.

1. Factors of Natural Conditions

Nature has a role that influences human needs. Natural conditions related to the needs that must be met by humans. Humans will make efforts and efforts to meet needs that are influenced by the natural conditions in which the individual lives.

For example, people who live in highland areas, such as Dieng, of course, need thick blankets or clothing to be able to withstand the cold. Meanwhile, for people who live in coastal areas, or beaches, which have a tropical climate, they definitely need clothes that are thin or made from cold.

2. Religious Belief Factors

A religious teaching or belief held by a person has different needs from one another. For example, Muslims do not eat any food containing pork, because Islamic teachings prohibit it, or the term is haram.

For Hindus, it is forbidden to consume all foods containing beef. From this incident, we can see the difference in needs between one and the other. Every religion requires a tool to fulfill its needs as a means of fluency in carrying out worship.

3. Factors of Customs

A custom that arises from a hereditary tradition, and applies in society will greatly affect the needs of every human being. Because, tradition will influence the behavior and life goals of a group of people who are in a certain place.

These differences in customs and traditions lead to differences in needs between one another. For example, a wedding ceremony using Javanese customs is of course different from those using Sundanese customs.

4. Occupational or Professional Factors

Each profession or job has its own characteristics. Various professions exist, have diverse needs as well. For example, a doctor needs a stethoscope to support his work.

A farmer has different needs from a doctor, a farmer needs hoes, tractors, fertilizers and seeds to support his profession.

5. Level of Civilization

The development of the times will always be followed by the development of human civilization. The higher the civilization in society, the quality of human needs will also increase. This can happen, because modernization makes the quality and quality of the needs that a person has, higher.

If in prehistoric times, human needs were still relatively few, as time goes by and the development of civilization occurs, humans will try to fulfill their life needs until they achieve prosperity.

For example, in the past humans did not need vehicles, now vehicles are the main and important need, because they can streamline the time they have so that activities become lighter or can reach their destination quickly.

In addition, the needs of modern humans certainly have increasing tastes, thus making humans have higher quality needs.

6. Income Factor

Everyone who works must have income, even though the size of the income is not the same. The type of work and one’s position determines the size of one’s income.

The factor of the size of the income that is owned by a person, is very influential on the needs of each. For example, people with a mediocre income, of course, will focus more on meeting their basic needs.

But for people who have more income, the level of needs will be greater, even though the size of each individual’s needs can be said to be relative. However, people with higher incomes are more flexible in meeting their needs other than primary needs.

7. Age factor

Human growth starts from birth, babies, children, adolescents, adults, to parents. The age factor influences the necessities of life. Needs will follow the growth of one’s age.

For example, the needs of a baby are different from adults. The needs of children, are also different from the needs of parents.

8. Satisfaction Level Factor

Humans are born with unique characteristics, one with another is never identical. Likewise with the fulfillment of the level of satisfaction. Every human being has a different level of satisfaction.

The level of satisfaction is what affects the needs of life that is owned. Someone who is not easily satisfied with what they already have, must have a greater level of need than someone who is easily satisfied with what that person has.

9. Hobby or Passion factor

The reason a person has different needs, the next is the hobby and hobby factor. Hobbies and interests vary widely, for example, a person who enjoys playing guitar music will need a guitar, not a fishing rod.

Someone who has a hobby of painting, will need a canvas, paint, and brush, not a guitar. Likewise with someone who likes climbing mountains, of course he needs a large backpack, jacket, mountain pants, shoes, tents, and other mountaineering equipment, not canvas or paint.

10. Educational Factors

Education in our country is tiered, from early childhood to tertiary education. This level of education has contributed to one’s needs. For example, PAUD children have different needs from SD children, SD children also have different needs from students, as well as students, whose needs are different from PAUD children.

11. Gender factor

By nature, humans were created to have men and women. Each has a different birth nature. In plain view, the physique of men is different from women. It can even be said, the needs of women can be more than the needs of men.

Women need equipment to make themselves up, such as make up, bags, dresses, jewelry, and more. Dominant women do not like activities that involve physical business or hard activities. Meanwhile, men themselves tend to prefer things that involve physical affairs, such as martial arts, rock climbing, automotive, and others.

Scarcity and Human Need

sinaumedian, from various types of human needs, it turns out that not all of them can be fulfilled. Why is that? Because, human needs are unlimited, while the availability of goods we want is limited. Well, this limitation is called scarcity.

For example, because production is constrained, we often don’t find fuel oil on the market, to the point that long queues arise to get this fuel. Now this is what is called scarcity. I hope you understand the need and all the supports.

Books Related to “Human Needs”

The following are some recommendations for economics books at the sinaumedia Bookstore.

1. Introduction to Micro and Macroeconomics Revised Edition

2. Introduction to Macroeconomic Theory

3. Easy to Understand and Implement Macroeconomics Accompanied

HR management  is human resource development which functions to carry out human resource planning, implementation, recruitment, training, employee or employee career development and to carry out initiatives for the organizational development of an organization or company.

Basically, there is no company that doesn’t need HR management or the cool term Human Resource (HR). It is the Human Resources section that is responsible for taking care of various company needs related to Human Resources (HR), including Human Resource Management (HRM) so that all activities or work run smoothly and more efficiently.

In carrying out activities in both organizations and companies, competent human resources are needed in their respective fields. In carrying out activities in a company or organization, Human Resources (HR) management is also needed so that the activities to be carried out run well and achieve the desired targets.

This challenge can be answered through the book Human Resource Management: Building a New Paradigm by Dickdick Sodikin, Djaka Permana, Suhenda Adia which in his presentation provides a new description and understanding of HR Management.

Definition of HR Management

Human Resource Management (HRM) is one of the areas of general management, such as financial management, marketing management, and operations management.

Human resource management is an important field of study in companies because the problems faced by companies are not only problems with raw materials, capital, work tools, and production, but also human resource problems, which incidentally are the parties that run and manage production factors at the same time. is the goal of the production activity itself.

The definition of Human Resource Management (MSDM) is “Personnel management is the planning organizing, directing, and controlling of the procurement, development, compensation, integration, and maintenance of the people for the purpose of contributing to organizational, individual and social goals” ( Flippo: 1976).

Personnel management is planning, organizing, directing, supervising the activities of procurement, development, compensation, integration, maintenance of employees or employees in order to achieve individual, organizational and community goals. The statement from Flippo equates the understanding of human resource management with personnel management.

It is also said by Rivai (2005) , the existence of human resource management is very important for companies in managing, managing, managing, and using human resources so that they can function effectively, productively, and efficiently to achieve company goals.

The opinion of Mondy and Noe, human resource management or human resource management is the utilization of human resources to achieve company goals.

Disclosed by Cascio (2003) that every manager who is responsible for human resources must pay attention to matters such as hiring staff, retaining employees, developing employees, maintaining employee obedience and order, and increasing company capabilities.

Human resource management is a strategic and related approach to managing the company’s most valuable assets, namely the people who work in the company both individually and in teams in order to contribute to achieving the company’s vision.

The explanation above shows that Human Resource Management (HRM) includes the capabilities and potential of leaders and employees in a company. Employees should not be treated as machines and it is necessary to realize that employees have potential and talents that can be continuously developed for the benefit of the company. After being developed, the leader needs to create a conducive atmosphere to be able to apply his abilities in the company.

However, the application of HRM itself is not only done in companies, in an organization HRM is also an important asset so that the organizational goals to be achieved can be achieved. In the book Human Resource Management for Students and the Public, an explanation of HRM in an organization in an effort to increase the effectiveness of existing human resources will be explained in detail.

HR Management Function

The task of Human Resource Management (HRM) is to manage people as effectively as possible in order to obtain a human resource unit that is mutually beneficial. Human Resource Management (HRM) is part of general management that focuses on human resources.

HRM itself is a field of study that studies how the role and human relations exist in helping to achieve the goals of organizations and companies. In this book entitled Human Resource Management by Malayu SP Hasibuan, the HRM concept will be explained in an easy and structured way for Sinaumed’s.

In principle, this human resource management function includes several activities that significantly affect the entire work area of ​​a company which consists of planning, hiring and dismissing employees, remuneration of benefits, performance appraisal, awards and career development, training and development, occupational safety and health. , leadership, and productivity. The functions of human resource management are as follows.

a. Human Resource Planning

Mondy, Noe, and Premeaux stated that human resource planning is a process of assessing and reviewing human resource needs systematically to ensure that the number of employees needed and according to the skill requirements that have been determined and available when needed. The Human Resources (HR) planning function includes several activities, including:

Analysis of positions within the company to determine the tasks, objectives, skills, knowledge and abilities needed.
Planning and forecasting the company’s workforce demand both in the short and long term.
Develop and implement plans to meet the two needs above.

Planning activities for the quality and quantity of Human Resources (HR) is the work of human resource management that contains the most uncertainty due to the forecasting factor of the tendency for the business environment to continue to move very dynamically. Related to this, companies must be able to see trends in technological developments, such as those that can affect the quality and quantity of the company’s human resources in the future. Planning human resources (employees) effectively to suit the needs of the company for the realization of company goals.

b. Appointment and Termination of Employees

In this process, the activities of filling out formations include recruiting employees, screening, and selecting applicants as well as placing formations. The function of human resource management is increasingly complicated because various regulations provide equal opportunities for all levels of society to get a job and the formation of positions to be filled is increasingly complex. The process of appointment and dismissal (staffing according to company requirements) includes:
1) Recruitment of prospective job applicants.
2) Selection of prospective workers or employees according to the requirements needed by the company.
3) Hold a good termination process for employees.

Human resources managers need to be careful when screening potential employees. Recruitment and job evaluation processes include application forms, interviews, psychological tests, and checking references.

When the term of office or term of office has ended, the company has the responsibility to terminate the employment relationship with employees as well as possible.

c. Allowance Wages

Wages for employees are said to be successful if they are based on justice and fairness.

1) The balance between wages paid for different jobs in one company.
2) Payment of fair and reasonable wages to employees or employees who are in the exact same position in one company.

Wages basically include all the awards received by employees or employees as a result of their work. Mondy, Noe, and Premeaux stated that awards can be in the form of one or a combination of wages, benefits, or non-financial awards.

Wages can be in the form of money received by an employee or employees for their performance. Allowances are in the form of additional financial awards in addition to basic salary (gapok), including leave allowances, sick expenses, holiday allowances (THR) and health insurance.

d. Performance Appraisal, Career Development

This function is carried out after employees or employees work in a company. Not only positive assessments, the company also analyzes if the performance of employees or employees is negative. The function of this work assessment includes:
1) Appraisal and evaluation of the performance of employees or employees.
2) Analysis and encouragement of employee or employee performance.
3) Provision of assistance to employees or employees in the context of career development.

Performance appraisal of these employees or employees is to determine how appropriate the awards are given to employees for their performance so that they can be used as a reference for career development.

If the company helps its employees or employees in career development, then the desire of employees to change workplaces will be minimal. This can retain employees who have high loyalty and commitment to the company.

e. Training and development

Companies can train their employees and develop them through formal or informal procedures. Formal procedures may be carried out with the introduction of new positions or as a means of keeping up with technological change. Meanwhile, informal procedures can take place in the workplace and are administered by senior employees.

In this process, it means that the field of human resources can provide training, courses, workshops and coordinate opportunities in companies with employee or employee career planning. This training and development includes activities such as designing and implementing training programs and their evaluation programs.

f. Occupational Health and Safety

In this process, human resource management focuses on:

1) Design and implementation of occupational safety and health management.
2) Implementation of employee motivation programs or employees.
3) Compilation of strategies to overcome company conflicts
4) Calculation of the level of company productivity.

To increase company productivity, of course, it must carry out an integration process that results in adequate reconciliation between several interests. So as to create an increase and improvement of physical and non-physical quality in the work environment.

g. Implementation of the Effectiveness of Work Relations

In this function, companies must be able to establish standards for how effective and efficient working relationships can be implemented. Activities that can be done include:

1) Mutual respect for the rights of employees or employees.
2) Establish procedures for how worker complaints are submitted.
3) Conduct research activities on human resource management (MSDM).

If the company is not careful in dealing with any problems regarding the rights of employees or employees, protest actions may arise, such as what happened in several companies in Indonesia.

HR Management Objectives

The objectives of human resource management in each company are varied. According to Ulrich and Lake (1990) a human resource management system can be a source of corporate capability that allows companies to continuously learn to demonstrate new opportunities.

Cushway gave the opinion that the purpose of human resource management is to give management consideration in making human resource policies to ensure that the company has employees or employees who have high performance, are always ready to deal with change, and fulfill their obligations as workers legally.

Not only that, the next goal is to implement and maintain all human resource policies and procedures that enable the company to achieve its goals.

The role of HRM itself in outline is to achieve company goals, which involves the human workforce in it, who are not only capable, skilled, but also must have the will and sincerity to work effectively and efficiently. This is discussed in the book entitled Company Human Resource Management by Taufiq Rachman.

However, specifically human resource management has the following objectives:

• Develop a work system with high performance which includes the process of recruiting, selecting, incentive systems, as well as management development and training activities related to the needs of the company.
• Develop management practices with high commitment that recognize that employees or employees are valuable stakeholders in the company and help develop a climate of cooperation and mutual trust.
• Ensuring that equal opportunities are available to all, meaning that there is a mutually beneficial relationship between the company and employees.
• Ensuring that employees or employees are valued and valued for what has been done and achieved.
• Maintain and improve the physical and mental well-being of employees or employees.
• Creating a humane, harmonious and productive climate that can be maintained between management and employees or employees.

Benefits of HR Management

Human Resources (HR) is an important asset in a company so this needs to be designed effectively. Some of the benefits that can be obtained from human resource management (P. Siagian: 1994) include:

a. Companies can make good use of existing Human Resources (HR).

Human resource managers in a company need to pay attention to the strengths and weaknesses of the company, such as the number of available employees, their respective years of service, knowledge and skills possessed, talents that need to be developed, and the interests of the employees concerned.

b. The productivity of existing employees is increasing

Good Human Resource Management (HRM) will certainly be proportional in the placement of employee formations. Too many employees are also not good for the company and can reduce employee morale. Lack of employees is also not good for the company will result in hampered work. So it has to be right.

c. Determination of the need for labor or employees

The need for manpower in the future both in terms of quantity and qualifications to fill certain formations and carry out new activities

Large companies need to have strategic planning. The utilization and needs of human resources in the future may include the number of employees promoted to higher positions, how many vacancies are vacant, the number of employees needed at that time, to the number of qualified employees needed.

d. Handling of employment information

Handling information on human resources owned can include the length of service of each employee, marital status, benefits, amount of income, education and training that has been completed, special skills possessed by employees, and positions that have been occupied.

e. Study

Before planning, research is needed. Including research on Human Resource Management. This is done in order to obtain an accurate description and information to form the basis for human resource management activities.

Definition of HR Development – You can be sure that all companies want to have superior employees. When a company accepts employees, it is hoped that the employees who apply will be of high quality.

With superior employees, they hope that everything their employees do is perfect. Can do tasks in a short time, complete a lot and efficiently.

But of course expectations will not always be perfect, what is planned sometimes misses. Or there are times when employee performance decreases.

Not all employees can meet the desired criteria, not always what they do is as expected. Sometimes problems come and hinder performance. Therefore it is necessary to hold the development of Human Resources or HR on a regular basis.

Maybe we’ve never heard of HR, but have you ever heard of HR development?

A. Definition of HR Development

Surely we often hear Human Resources or HR. What exactly is HR? Human resources are productive individuals who work as a driving force for an organization, both in an institution and a company that has the function of being an asset so that their abilities must be trained and developed. Macro human resources are the number of people of productive age in a country.

HR includes the power of thought and physical power possessed by each individual or human being. Therefore HR is an important element in company activities. Included with HR are:

• labor . Labor are individuals who produce goods and services in a company or organization. The workforce is in the range of ages 15 to 64 years. Product age ranges from 20 to 40 years.
• Experts . Experts are individuals who have a special expertise. Experts are needed by the company.
• leader . Leaders function to lead the course of the company. Good or bad the way the company is in the hands of the leader.
• Businessman . Entrepreneurs are individuals who are able to develop their business. Entrepreneurs can also create jobs.
• Manufacturer . Producers are individuals who can produce goods.
• Consumers . Consumers are individual users of the goods produced

 

B. Definition of HR According to Experts

1. Malayu Hasibuan (2005)
   Human resource development is an effort to improve the theoretical, conceptual and moral technical skills of employees in accordance with the needs of the job or position through education and training.
2. Mathis (2002)
   Development is efforts to improve the ability of employees in the work environment to deal with various assignments.
3. Ranupandojo and Hasan (2004)
   Employee development is an effort to improve skills and general knowledge for employees, so that the implementation of achieving goals is more efficient.
4. Andrew F. Sikula
   said that development which refers to staff and personnel issues is a long-term educational process using a systematic and organized procedure where managers learn conceptual and theoretical knowledge for general purposes. While training is a short-term educational process that uses systematic and organized procedures so that employees in the operational field learn technical knowledge of workmanship for a specific purpose.
5. Armstrong (1997:508)
   HR development is related to providing learning opportunities, creating training programs and evaluating programs that have been carried out to develop the abilities of employees or employees in an organization
6. Stewart and McGoldrick
   stated that Human Resources are various activities or activities directed at learning for individuals or groups.
7. Jan Bella
   stated that education and training are the same as development, which is a process of increasing work skills, both technical and managerial. Besides that, it is also said that education is oriented to theory, is carried out in class, lasts a long time, and usually answers the question ” why” alias why. Through this process a process will be answered. While practice-oriented training is carried out in the field, it is short and usually answers ” how” or how. Through this training it is expected to find efficient formulas in doing work.

So if human resources are employees who work in a company, it is hoped that they can increase the company’s income with their performance so that they can make them a resource.

HR development is an effort to improve HR capabilities in order to increase company productivity. With the ability of human resources in the company, it will greatly affect the increase in work productivity in the organizational environment, as is discussed in the book Human Resources + Work Productivity

Where there is a process that is passed covering various problems that occur within the company including workers, managers, employees, employees, and other workers or employees. After HR development is carried out, the company goals that have been set can be implemented

C. HR Development Goals 

HR development has a definite purpose. In general, the goal is actually to improve the quality of workers or individuals through education and training programs, but in detail, the objectives of HR development are:

1. Can increase productivity at work

The hope is that every day the productivity of all employees is high. To get it, there must be an injection of performance from the company through human resource development. Learn how to be more productive through the book 6 Secrets of Being a Productive Person Without Feeling Lazy.

 

2. Reducing Product Damage

Therefore, this needs to be kept to a minimum. HR development ensures that product errors can be minimized. The employees who will be accepted will be given training in advance to explore the extent of their ability to carry out tasks and achieve the targets requested.

Before going into the field, the level of mastery of employees has been tested and the results of their work are good. Just like if you are in an online market, it is very important to have the ability to take good product photos. Learn how through the book Photographing Product Photos for Online Stores with Smartphones.

 

4. Make sure everything runs efficiently

In order to ensure that training goes according to plan and efficiently, Sinaumed’s must first know how to manage human resources properly and correctly. Everything is discussed in full in the book Human Resource Management for Companies.

 

5. Improving Leadership Attitudes

Well, HR development aims to improve leadership attitudes. There are a series of activities that will make employees able to have a leadership spirit. The soul of leadership or leadership makes employees know how big the portion is in their work.

Employees must also be able to make the right decisions. Employees must be independent and not depend on others. It is this soul that is trying to grow through human resource development.

6. Creating Employee or Human Morale

If employee morale is good, then a comfortable and conducive working atmosphere can be created. Every employee respects and supports one another, the work atmosphere feels good.

The pleasant atmosphere will impact on the work ethic. Always feeling happy every time you complete a task will have an impact on good work results.

7. Raise Remuneration

D. HR Development Methods

HR development needs to be done through the right methods, so that companies can have reliable employees to help the company. HR development methods include:

1. Training or Training

Training can be carried out internally or externally. Internal training includes training conducted within the company environment. Through this method, trainers can be taken from within the company itself or it can be taken from companies that usually cooperate with other companies to conduct training.

The selected company is a company that does provide the required training services. While external training is carried out by way of employees to training institutions or agencies to conduct training there. Training is something that must be passed by a new employee. Before being assigned, they are required to attend training first.

2. Apprenticeship

3. Education

For example, a company wants to raise the position of an employee with a D3 degree due to their achievements or potential. Then the company will adopt a policy to provide opportunities to take advanced courses. This policy is certainly far more effective than having to recruit new employees whose performance has not been tested.

4. Job Rotation

The rotation method provides an opportunity for employees to experience a variety of jobs as well as to find out which division the employee is suitable for placement.

When in one division the employee is not suitable, but in another division the results are optimal, then a transfer can be considered. Apart from knowing the right place for the employee, rotation also functions to fill in the vacancies of other employees who are on leave, have sudden leave or resign.

The company will not panic when these things happen. With the rotation method, employees will find a passion for work that might be more suitable for them. And the impact will be good of course on performance.

5. Comparative Study

For example, if a company wants to improve its marketing system, the company will conduct comparative studies with other companies that have different marketing systems. After getting an overview of the method in other companies, then we will try to apply it in the company. Is it better, the same or even lower the results of work.

6. Competency Test

Sometimes because they feel they have been working for a long time, employees are lazy to study. Even though it could be that the company has a new method or policy in terms of production. However, old employees, aka seniors, are usually lazy to learn and prefer to use the methods they have mastered. With the competency test, there is an effort from employees to return to learning.

7.Coaching

The purpose of this method is not only to improve the quality of work, but also as a means to transfer the ability of employees or people who have much experience in a job.

8. Outbound

During Outbound there are several games that require quick thinking, leadership and teamwork. Doing the same thing over and over and over for years can lead to boredom for company employees.

One indication of boredom is reduced employee productivity. Before this happens, companies need to hold joint activities outside the company to revive work enthusiasm and get to know each other.

Find various ways and methods of developing human resource methods needed in other companies through the book Human Resource Management, Creating HR Competency-Based Competitive Advantage.

 

D. HR Development Function

HR development functions according to Sudrajat Cahyono (2015) are as follows:

1. Labor Procurement Function

The function of manpower procurement, among others, first includes activities to determine the need for manpower both in terms of quality and quantity. Companies need to record what abilities are needed from the employees they accept, as well as how many are needed.

Second, human resource development functions to obtain labor sources effectively and efficiently. Workers who are in accordance with these qualifications will benefit the company.

The three functions of labor procurement aim to select applicants, then place the workforce according to the right position,

Fourth, hold the education and training needed to carry out tasks for new workers.

2. Labor maintenance function

The function of manpower maintenance includes the implementation of economic and non-economic programs that are expected to be able to provide work peace for workers, so that workers can work in peace and concentrate. This condition is expected to produce work performance that is in line with expectations.

3. Termination function

Human resource development also functions to terminate or end work relationships, known as Termination of Employment (PHK) for employees who apparently cannot follow what the company wants.

HR development is clearly needed by companies or organizations. Hopefully from the reading above you can understand what HR development looks like. So that you can get to know more about HR, sinaumedia will always be #Friends Without Borders for you to improve employee performance through the best books below.

Book Recommendations & Related Articles

Most people probably don’t know about how to write the word in the right way, for example in everyday use, such as connecting or separating. Even though it is only one of the many types of words that we often use, there are errors that arise because many people also don’t know how to write the correct word in.

Most people admit that they cannot write the word di properly and correctly for two reasons, namely not understanding how to write the word di correctly from the start and forgetting how to write the word di because they are not used to using it correctly in everyday life.

Wrong writing of the word di will eventually result in the meaning of a sentence also changing. Therefore, as someone who cares about the rules of good and correct language, we need to correct various everyday language habits that are not quite right. The purpose of writing words in a sentence is so that the information to be conveyed can be understood clearly and easily.

So, in this article, we will learn about how to write good and correct words in a complete and in-depth manner. One of the most important things so that someone can easily understand how to write the word di is also learning the meaning and function of the Indonesian vocabulary. Immediately, see the following reviews.

A. How to write the correct word di

In the PUEBI Book: General Guidelines for Indonesian Spelling written by Eko Sugiarto which was published in 2017, there are two kinds of ways to write the correct word di, namely as a preposition and as a prefix.

1. The word in as a preposition

Each word that has a function as a preposition must be written separately from the word that follows it. The word in as a preposition can be written separately when it is used in front of nouns denoting place, name, time and location.

In addition, in some usages, the preposition can usually also be replaced by the word from. For example, writing the word “here” can be changed to “from here”. However, writing the word in as a preposition cannot be converted into an active verb by adding the affix me-. For example, writing the word “there” cannot be changed to “me there”.

Example:

• Mother has returned from grandmother’s house in Bandung.
• The farewell event will be held at the Cianjur Camping Ground
• Where did Nabila stay during Lebaran?
• The singer canceled his concert in Jakarta.
• Tiara regularly exercises with her best friend in the morning.

2. The word in as a prefix

In contrast to the word in as a preposition which is written separately, the word in as a prefix must be written in connection with the word that follows it. Writing the word di as a prefix can be used if it is followed by a passive verb.

The following are two things that need to be considered when writing the word in the spliced, namely:

1. Demonstrate its role as an affix.

2. Writing in which is equipped with a passive verb. Passive verbs themselves can usually be changed to active verbs by adding the affix ‘me’.

in + passive verb = combined

As words that get added prefixes, passive verbs can be changed to active verbs by adding the affix me-. For example, the word “opened” can be changed to “opened”.

Example:

• Indonesian Independence Day speech read by President Joko Widodo.
• Every time Rani comes home from school, her father picks her up.
• Diana was often praised because she always won first place in her class.
• It is forbidden to throw garbage in this area.
• The body will be buried soon.

One simple example of using passive sentences to become active sentences, namely the word written can be changed to write.

B. Example of How to Write the Word Di

After understanding how to write the word in a good and correct way, from which it is separated and also connected. In this section, several examples of the use of the word di will be presented so that you can better understand how to write words according to Indonesian language rules.

 

1. Example of Writing the Word In Separate

Well, an example of writing the word in which is separated, among others, is as follows:

Example 1:

Incorrect: There are lots of vegetable gardens outside the house ready to be planted

That’s right: Outdoors there are lots of vegetable gardens ready to be planted

Example 2:

Incorrect: Ayuk keeps her favorite stuffed toy in her bedroom cupboard

Correct: Ayuk keeps her favorite stuffed toy in her bedroom cupboard

Example 3:

Incorrect: Andi arranged an appointment in the afternoon to meet with potential buyers

Correct: Andi set up an appointment in the afternoon to meet with potential buyers

Based on some examples of writing the words above, there are some mistakes that are common and are made by many people. The following are some examples of the use of the word in as a preposition that should be separated, but is instead written as a conjunction.

In the market; not on the market

In the building; not in the building

In terminals; not terminal

At the crossroad; not quartered

In the office; not at the office

At the health center; not the health center

On the sidewalk; not on the sidewalk

In the village; not in the village

In library; not in the library

In the evening; not at night

On the table; not at the table

In a drawer; not a drawer

etc

2. Example of How to Write a Word in Spliced

If in the previous example the word di was written separately, in this section the word di can be written in conjunction.

Example 1:

Incorrect: Because the public transportation bus broke down, the passengers were transferred to another bus

Correct: Because the angkot buses broke down, passengers were transferred to other buses

Example 2:

Incorrect: Due to a landslide the road to the house was diverted

Correct: Due to the landslide the road leading to the house was diverted

Example 3:

Incorrect: As a result of disturbing the chicks, Riko is chased to the ground in fear

Correct: As a result of disturbing the chicks, Riko is chased and runs away in fear

In writing the word in the merge, there are still some mistakes that are usually made by many people. So, here are some examples of using the word in as a prefix that must be combined with the next word, including:

written; not written
purchased; not bought
occupied; not occupied
; not visited
loved; not loved
plus; not added
transferred; not diverted
where; not where

taught; not taught to be
beaten; not being beaten
and chased; not chased
made; not made
aside; not side by side
aside; not aside
requested; not asked to be
given; not in love

ruled out; not being cast aside
as a scapegoat; not blackmailed

worn; not for
rent; not on rent
bribed; not being spied on in
bribes; not peeked
passed; not in the opera
connected; not connected

C. How to Write Words in Everyday Life

Basically, linguistic errors in the form of written language are more numerous when compared to spoken language. This is because writing language in written form can be seen visually, while spoken language can only be listened to. For example, such as the use of words in written form.

In the context of writing, words in a related sentence are connected or separated, it can only be considered in the form of written language. In spoken language, the use of the word in either as a prefix or as a preposition cannot be distinguished.

So, do not be surprised if the language in written form is more of a concern than the use of language in spoken form. Even though it looks trivial because of the matter of connecting and separating the words in. However, if you don’t understand the context of a sentence correctly, it may lead to a different meaning or not be easy to understand.

We can do this in using language to compile scientific works such as theses, theses, or for the benefit of other writing competitions. In this activity, errors in writing were not only in the use of the word di, but also the use of conjunctions, endings and even the use of scientific terms.

The benefits of writing good and correct words will be very helpful if you have a profession as a writer, researcher, student and lecturer. This is because the profession is in direct contact with the use of written language in everyday life. However, this can also apply to those who have a focus on story telling, speakers or anything that is non-written in nature.

In addition, there are several questions that are quite frequently asked regarding the way words are written in a sentence, including:

1. where or where

Correct answer: where.
The words in “where” are prepositions (not affixes) written separately. The word di is not a prefix of a passive verb, where is the word “where”.

2. above or above

Correct answer: above.
Like writing the word where, the use of the word above is also a preposition. As a result, the writing of these words must be written separately.

3. among or between

Correct answer: in between

4. under or under

Correct answer: below

D. Tips for Reducing Indonesian Writing Errors

After knowing various things about writing and using words in a sentence. There are some tips you can do to avoid using the wrong word in writing sentences. The following are some tips that you can do at home, including:

1. Read more reading texts

A person’s ability to understand reading and writing Indonesian can be further developed by increasing reading intensity. By starting to diligently read various reading sources, such as books, newspapers, magazines, and blogs. Then you can have an attitude of automation in using words according to the rules of the Indonesian language.

2. Take note of the vocabulary you don’t know

When you read a reading text, one way to improve your ability to use words according to the correct language rules is to mark or record vocabulary that you don’t know. This will really help you to increase your vocabulary in Indonesian. After writing it down, you can check the correct writing in KBBI or PUEBI.

3. Frequently open KBBI or PUEBI

The last tip you can do to avoid mistakes in writing Indonesian is to get used to opening KBBI or PUEBI. With KBBI and PUEBI, you can always check your language writing. In addition, the two services can further improve Indonesian writing. Starting from writing words, punctuation, spelling, capital letters, to writing foreign letters. These tips can make you more motivated to always improve words or writing according to Indonesian language rules.

How to Write a Footnote – Writing can be said to have become a culture until now because writing has been around for a long time, so it is very close to people’s lives. The writing activity itself is very diverse, one of which is writing scientific papers. In making scientific work, it is usually done through research first. Therefore, generally these scientific works are written by academics.

In writing scientific papers, originality is needed or does not follow scientific papers that have been written before. Currently, scientific works that are generally made by academics are generally in the form of scientific articles, journals, books, and so on. The existence of scientific work indicates that science will continue to experience development every time.

There are certainly many sources obtained in writing scientific papers, not even just from one medium, sometimes sources of scientific work data can be taken from several media, such as surveys, interviews, literature, and so on. Every data source used in writing scientific papers must be included in scientific papers.

Things like that must be done because it is a form of appreciation to the author for scientific work that has been made before. In addition, writing these data sources can also be useful for readers in finding relevant data sources when they want to make scientific work on the same topic of discussion.

The writing of this data source is usually done or made in the bibliography which is located at the end of the scientific work. However, writing this data source can also be written on the scientific paper page (not the last page) which is located at the bottom of the page. Writing data sources on the same page and located at the bottom is better known as a footnote or what many Indonesians call it, a footnote.

With footnotes, it becomes easier for readers to understand a term in a scientific work paragraph. Therefore, it can be said that footnotes are a source of reference used in writing scientific work. To understand more about footnotes or footnotes, you can see this review until it’s finished, OK?

Definition of Footnote (Footnote)

Before discussing more about footnotes, we need to know the meaning of the footnote itself. Footnote is a term taken from English with the name footnote . Therefore, until now there are those who prefer to call it a footnote or also a footnote . Even so, the two terms have something in common, namely providing a reference or reference to support the sharpness of scientific work.

Same with the location of the feet at the bottom of the body, the term footnote or footnote is located at the bottom of the page of a scientific work or book. Meanwhile, writing footnotes or footnotes is not the same as the text in the core of the page. In this case, what distinguishes it is the size of the footnotes with the text or content of scientific work. The size of the letters (font) in footnotes is smaller than the contents of scientific papers.

This is in line with the meaning of footnotes in the Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI), footnotes are information that is listed on the bottom margin of the book page (usually printed in smaller letters than the letters in the text to add references in the main text).

There is usually more than one footnote or footnote in a scientific work or book, so when writing footnotes you usually use information in the form of numbers. With this number, the reader will know the author’s intent for a term or sentence used as a support for scientific work. Sentences that are explained in footnotes, can be in the form of direct sentences and indirect sentences. The numbers in footnotes are better known as subscripts. 

With footnotes or footnotes, the authenticity of a scientific work is increasingly proven, so that it can avoid plagiarism. That way, the content or material in scientific work can be accounted for. Therefore, not a few people use footnotes when writing scientific papers or books. So, are you one of those people who uses footnotes when writing scientific papers?

Sometimes making scientific work is very difficult for beginners, so they really need guidelines or guides. Don’t worry, the  Guide to Writing Scientific Papers is perfect for those of you beginners who want to write scientific papers. What’s more, the language used in this book is very easy to understand, so it will be easier to apply the steps for writing scientific papers.

Footnote Elements

In how to write footnotes , makers of scientific papers need to know the elements of footnotes first. By knowing the elements of footnotes, it becomes easier to write footnotes. Following are the elements of footnotes.

Author or Author Name

When writing footnotes , there must be an element of the author’s name or authors from the quotations in scientific works. Even though the author has a title, the title does not need to be written. In other words, the creator of the footnote only writes the author’s name.

Post Title

The second element, namely the title of the text of the quotation used. The title of this article must be clear and pay attention to PUEBI rules. Therefore, on this element, footnote makers, must be careful.

Publication Year

After the title of the article, the next footnote element is the year of publication. In this case, the year of publication in question is the year the quotation or reference source used in the scientific work was published. The year of publication can also be interpreted as the year the reference source was published (generally in a journal or scientific article).

Citation Page Number

The last element in making footnotes is the page number of the quotation used. In addition, writing this page, can also be shortened to “things” which is then followed by the number of the page. With this page number, it becomes easier for the reader to find the reference source used.

If seen at a glance, the elements of these footnotes are almost the same as the elements in the bibliography. In addition, all the elements of footnotes that have been mentioned must be present when writing footnotes.

Purpose of Making Footnotes

The purpose of writing footnotes or footnotes as follows:

1. To Submit Additional Information

Footnotes are made for the purpose of providing additional information. In this case, it can be said that with footnotes, it can clarify the intent or answer to the topic of the problem in scientific work.

2. To Strengthen Scientific Work Data

Each scientific work is expected to be sharper, more detailed, and more complex. To do that, it needs to be supported by a valid data source followed by writing a footnote . With footnotes or footnotes , the description of the material in scientific work becomes stronger and sharper.

3. As Proof of Data 

The third purpose of writing footnotes is to prove data. In making scientific work certainly cannot be separated from the use of data sources. Therefore, in order for the data used to have validity, it is necessary to write footnotes. In addition, with footnotes, it further strengthens scientific work that can be accounted for.

4. As Reference Material 

Quotations in scientific papers come from predetermined references. In addition, these references make scientific work stronger. Therefore, to make it easier for readers to find out the reference sources used by scientific work authors, footnotes are made.

5. Appreciate the Author or Author 

The fifth function of writing a footnote is to appreciate the author or authors whose work is used as a reference source. In addition, by making footnotes, we (as authors of scientific papers) can respect one another.

Those are some of the purposes of writing footnotes or footnotes. After knowing the purpose, you should not forget to use footnotes in writing scientific papers.

Writing scientific papers is an activity that is often carried out by students or lecturers. In writing scientific papers, you should not write carelessly or follow the guidelines for writing scientific papers. The Practical Guidebook  for Writing Scientific Papers is very suitable to be used as a reference for writing scientific papers. So, what are you waiting for, buy this book immediately by clicking the “Buy Now” button.

Footnote Type

There are two types of footnotes, namely complete footnotes and short footnotes.

Complete Footnotes

Complete footnotes are footnotes written in full. A complete footnote consists of several elements, such as the author’s name, book title, serial number (if any), print number, publisher name, year of publication, and page number.

Short Footnotes

Short footnotes are footnotes that only consist of a few elements, short footnotes are still divided into 3 forms, namely Ibid, Op.cit, and Loc.cit. Ibid stands for Ibdium or means the same as above. Op.cit is an abbreviation of opere citato which means works that have been cited. Loc.cit is an abbreviation of loco citato which means a place that has been cited.

Footnote Function

Besides having a purpose, footnotes also have several functions, including:

1. To add information to scientific work

As previously explained, footnotes are a description of the quotations in scientific work. Therefore, by making footnotes, it serves to add information to scientific work. With this additional information, a discussion in a scientific work becomes sharper and more complex.

2. To provide information on a discussion

Besides functioning to add information to scientific work, footnotes also function to provide information on a discussion. In this case, the information referred to is usually in the form of a direct quote or an indirect quote. The existence of these footnotes makes it easier for readers to find sources of reference on a particular topic.

3. For Evidence of Data Sources

The final function of writing footnotes is to prove data sources. Without evidence of data sources in scientific work, the data sources used are invalid. Footnotes that function as proof of data sources can explain where the data source comes from (author, year of publication, page number, and title of the data source). That way, readers find it easier to find data sources in a scientific work.

From several footnote functions , it can be said that this footnote can make it easy for readers to find data sources that they want to use on a particular scientific work topic.

Abbreviations in Footnotes

Some of the abbreviations that are often used when writing footnotes or footnotes, namely:

1. Op. Cit

The abbreviation Op.Cit comes from the Latin, namely Opere Citato which means is on works that have been cited.

2. Loc. Cit

Loc.Cit comes from the Latin, namely Loco Citato which means at the place that has been quoted.

3. Ibid

Ibid is an abbreviated footnote which comes from the Latin word ibdiem which means the same place.

4. Supras

Supra is the term footnote that is generally used because it comes first in the same text.

5. Infra

Infra is a footnote term that is commonly used by looking at the same article or writing (quotation) at the bottom.

6. Et. seq

Et.seq is a footnote term derived from the abbreviation et sequences which means next pages.

7. Cf or conf

Cf or conf footnote terms with meaning compared to.

8. Passim

Passim is a footnote term meaning compilation.

9. c. or ca.

c. or ca. is a footnote term derived from the abbreviation circa which means around the year.

How to Write Footnotes

Basically, how to write footnotes is divided based on the source of the quote, including:

How to Write a Footnote from a Journal

Footnotes from journals are written beginning with the author’s citation number Author’s name, Article title (italics), volume, journal name, year of publication, page number.

¹⁰ Muhammad, Islamic Bank Analysis of Strengths, Weaknesses, and Threats, Student Library

³ Adnan Buyung Nasution, Some Legal Aspects in Defense and Settlement Issues in Big Cities , in “Eko Budiharjo, A Number of Urban Settlement Problems,” (Bandung: Alumni, 1992).

How to Write a Footnote of a Book

How to write a footnote for a book starting with the author’s first name, last name, book title (italics), book edition (publishing city, publisher name, year), page cited.

^¹ Sri Utami et al, English Level 5 (Yogyakarta: PT. sinaumedia: 2003), p. 5.

How to Write a Footnote from the Internet

How to write a footnote from the internet starting from the author’s name, “Title of work cited” (italics, url, access date, year, and page.

UNESCO, Indonesia Batik , http://www.unesco.org/culture/ich/en.RL/00170/ accessed on 27 January 2021.

How to Write a Footnote of a Thesis

Footnotes from the thesis begin with the author’s citation number Author’s name, “Title of thesis work (italicized)” (City of Publication: Publisher, Year of Publication), Page Source of Citation

Muryid Rahman, Thesis: The Development of Middle and Lower Economic Structures After Studying Information Technology Skills,  (Yogyakarta: UGM, 2005), Hal. 85.

Conclusion 

A footnote is a description that is located at the bottom of a scientific work or book which has the main function of providing information on the quotations that have been used. Therefore, with these footnotes, reference sources can be found easily, especially for readers of scientific papers. In fact, the reference source can also be used by readers with certain topics.

In addition to easy-to-find reference sources, footnotes also make scientific work more accountable because each data source is valid and avoids plagiarism. Writing footnotes can be said to be tricky because you have to pay attention to several elements. However, if you get used to writing them, it will be easier to make footnotes.

After knowing more about footnotes, when will you use footnotes in writing scientific papers?

How to Write Direct and Indirect Quotations – Indonesian is one of the subjects that is often underestimated by students at school. As the mother tongue, many students think that they have mastered the language they have often used since they could speak it.

However, in reality, there are still many of them who experience mistakes when writing or speaking Indonesian. This could be caused because they do not take Indonesian lessons seriously, causing unnecessary mistakes.

Get to know Direct Quotations and Indirect Quotations

One of the mistakes that can be found, this time in writing scientific report texts, is when they write direct quotations and indirect quotations. In fact, how to write direct quotations and indirect quotations is not that difficult to understand, you know.

Before learning how to write direct quotations and indirect quotations for scientific texts, it is better for Sinaumed’s to know and understand the two types of writing in advance. Here’s an explanation.

Live Quotes

Direct quotation is a form of quotation that copies directly from the original text source, without making any changes in the writing. When writing a direct quote, Sinaumed’s also needs to include the source of the quote, which is usually listed at the beginning or end of the sentence.

In addition, direct quotations also have 2 types, namely long direct quotations and short direct quotations. Long direct quotes are 40 words or more , and can take up to 3 lines of a paragraph . While short direct quotations have a word count below 40, and the number of lines does not reach 3 lines.

Indirect Quotes

Contrary to a direct quote, an indirect quote is a type of quote in which Sinaumed’s is allowed to change the content of the quote, without losing the essence and intent of the related quote. Of course, Sinaumed’s is also required to include the source of the quote.

There are 2 options when writing indirect quotes. The first is to paraphrase the quote, which is to replace a number of words and sentences without changing the meaning of the quote. The second way is to summarize, summarize, and conclude the contents of the quote .

How to Write Direct and Indirect Quotations

If Sinaumed’s already understands what direct quotations and indirect quotations are, we can enter into a discussion of the steps and how to write direct and indirect quotations.

How to write direct and indirect quotes is not difficult, really. However, there are still a number of things that must be considered, starting from the format of writing and how to cite. Here are the basics that must be considered for writing direct quotations and indirect quotations.

Source Retrieval

In general, sources of quotations are taken from scientific journals, books or other scientific works. Even so, Sinaumed’s can also adapt from websites on the internet, provided that the website presents facts that can be validated as proof of their truth.

The Basics of Citation Writing

Apart from that, there are also things that need to be considered by Sinaumed’s, especially regarding the correct format for writing citations. This writing format applies both to writing direct quotations and writing indirect quotations. Here’s the presentation.

• Write the author’s name from the source quote

If you cannot find the original author of the citation, you can write down the name of the publisher or the name of the organization that wrote the citation. The following is an example of writing the author’s name for the source of the quote:

• • Sumadiria (2005)
  • Oxford Paperback Dictionary (1979)
• Procedure for writing citation sources

There are at least 4 ways that you can apply in writing citation sources. The writing of this quote depends on whether Sinaumed’s wants to include the page where the quote was taken or not. Here’s an example of 4 sources of quotation writing:

• • Duraid (2007)
  • Djuraid (2007:19)
  • (Djuraid, 2007)
  • (Djuraid, 2007:19)

• Put the source at the end of the sentence

This way of writing is a way that is generally used in writing quotations. Sinaumed’s can also combine sources with writing sentences. Here are two examples of both writing quotes:

“Learning media are all forms of physical tools that can present messages for learning either through books, films, tapes, and other educational media” (Briggs, 1970) , or;

Briggs (1970), expressed the opinion that “learning media are all forms of physical tools that can present messages for learning either through books, films, tapes, and other educational media.”

• Citing 2 authors citation sources

There are times when Sinaumed’s finds 2 authors who make up the quoted sources. If you find this case, Sinaumed’s simply adds an “and” (&) between the two authors. The rest, can follow the rules previously explained. Here’s an example of writing:

Doug Newson & James A. Wollert (1985:11), said “news is anything that people want and need to know or more broadly the public.”

• Quoting what has been previously quoted

Sometimes, writers quote the writings of other writers in their writings. In this situation, Sinaumed’s could claim that this quote has been quoted by another author. Here’s how to write it:

“News is a report about events that occur that the public wants to know, with actual characteristics, occurring in the reader’s environment, regarding prominent figures, as a result of these events affecting the reader.” (Nasution, quoted in Aliet, 2008).

• Citing many different sources

Sinaumed’s can also cite 2 different sources, and put them in the same sentence. The trick is to separate the two sources with a semicolon (;), and sort them alphabetically. Here’s an example of writing:

“Money is something that is commonly used in transactions or a medium of exchange, and has the ability to transform and change the social world towards the arithmetic world and is used as the purest means of reification.” (AC Pigou, 1949; Georg Simmel, 1900).

How to Write a Direct Quote

As already discussed, direct quotations have 2 types in writing, namely long direct quotations and short direct quotations. Both also have their own way of writing, and can be adjusted according to Sinaumed’s’ needs in writing these 2 types of citations. Here’s the presentation.

1. Writing Long Direct Quotations

What needs to be considered in writing long direct quotations is the writing format. The following are things that need to be applied in writing long direct quotes:

• Spaces are single spaces.
• Quotations are not incorporated into the text, but are written separately.
• Writing quotes do not use quotation marks.
• Writing sources of quotations only needs to state the name of the author, year of publication, and pages if necessary.
• Text writing is made indented.

To clarify the format for writing long direct quotations, here’s an example of text from a related writing style:

There is not as much information about the marine environment as information on land, because of how wide the sea surface is. This is in accordance with the statements of a number of experts (Austin, 1988; Prager and Earle, 2000). they say:

The ocean is the world’s largest habitat in which there are still many secrets that have not been revealed. The sea covers more than two-thirds or seventy percent of the earth’s surface. The total area of ​​the sea that covers the earth is 3.61 x 108 km 2 , with an average depth of 3,800 m and provides about 97 percent of the total space for life on earth. 

2. Writing Short Direct Quotations

Short direct quotations also have their own writing format, which is different from writing long direct quotations. The following explains the procedure for writing short direct quotations that Sinaumed’s can apply:

• Quotations are unified or aligned with the text.
• Quotations must be written using quotation marks.
• Writing sources of quotations can be placed at the beginning or end of writing. If writing sources at the beginning of the sentence, the author’s name is placed outside the parentheses. If writing sources at the end of the sentence, the author’s name is placed in parentheses along with the year and page number.

Below is an example of writing a short direct quote to clarify how to write this type of quote:

The word technology can lead to the topic of art, as explained by Capra (2004), namely “technology is one of the systematic discussions of applied art or carpentry. This refers more to Greek literature mentions of Technologia which comes from the word techne, which means art discourse.”

How to Write an Indirect Quote

As is the case with how to write direct quotations, indirect quotations also have a number of rules that need to be considered so that they are not mistaken in writing. As already mentioned, Sinaumed’s has 2 options for writing indirect quotations, namely by paraphrasing or summarizing the contents of the quoted source.

1. How to Paraphrase an Indirect Quote

Paraphrasing is a method for rewriting a sentence or paragraph, without losing the content or meaning contained in the text, in this case, the source of the quote. Sinaumed’s changes the word structure and the diction in it, without changing the meaning the author wants to convey.

Here’s an example if you want to try paraphrasing an indirect quote:

Original text:

“An adult is someone who has completed his growth and is ready to accept his position in society along with other adults.” (Elizabeth Hurlock, 1991).

Text after paraphrasing:

Based on the thoughts of Elizabeth Hurlock (1991), it can be concluded that adults are people who have ended the process of development and growth, and are able to live side by side with other adults in the social life of society.

2. How to Summarize for an Indirect Quote

As Sinaumed’s knows, summarizing is the process of taking the essence of a text or conversation, and eliminating explanations that are considered less important and do not have any effect on the essence of the related information.

Below, you can see an example of the process of summarizing the sources of a quote, to write an indirect quote.

Original text:

“Communication is a form of human interaction that influences one another, intentionally or unintentionally. Not limited to forms of communication using verbal language, but also in terms of facial expressions, painting, art and technology.” (Shannon & Weaver, 1949)

Text after summarizing:

Shannon & Weaver (1949), argued that communication is human interaction to influence one another, using various mediums in the process. 

How to Write Quotes from the Internet

Basically, it is not recommended to take quotations from the internet, especially for scientific writing purposes. Sinaumed’s probably already knows that not all writing on the internet comes from valid and verifiable sources.

Even so, there are still a number of websites that can be verified, so that they can be used as a source for quoting writings. If Sinaumed’s manages to find a related website, here’s how to write a quote that comes from the internet.

• Re-ensure that the website has valid information for scientific work. This must still be done so that scientific work does not have errors in conveying information.
• Look for the author’s name and the year the article was published on the website . This author’s name will later become the source of the author who is included when quoting writing from the website .
• The rest, the process of citing sources from the internet is the same as citing writings from other scientific works. Here’s one example of writing a quote whose source comes from the internet:

Russia’s attack on Ukraine had an impact on world oil prices. This is in line with Siladitya Ray’s statement (2022), which revealed that global stock markets continued to be rocked by the deepening conflict in Ukraine, while global crude oil prices had reached a 14-year high.

Purpose and Reasons for Quoting

So far, we’ve learned how to write direct and indirect quotes correctly. But, Sinaumed’s might think, why quote other writings? Can’t we write scientific papers with only our own thoughts?

Believe it or not, quoting has several reasons and purposes, all of which will be useful to help simplify the process of writing scientific papers. If you narrow it down, the purpose or reason for quoting other writings is divided into 2. The following is a brief explanation regarding the reasons and reasons for quoting.

• Citing writing with the aim of supporting facts, concepts, and ideas contained in scientific work, by using other facts according to the topic of the writing.
• Quoting writing with reasons adds to the explanation in scientific papers. This of course adjusts to the topic being discussed. Additional explanations can be placed directly in the text, or in footnotes.

Making Bibliography

When we quote from a scientific work, we must write down the complete source from where we quoted the statement in the bibliography. This is something that should not be missed at the end of the scientific paper writing process. If Sinaumed’s does not write down a complete bibliography regarding the results of the quotations taken, it is possible to be considered as falsifying facts, because the source of the writing is not very clear and cannot be proven true or not.

 

Enough articles discussing how to write direct and indirect quotations. Hopefully with this article, Sinaumed’s can minimize or even eliminate mistakes in quoting an article for scientific work purposes.

Of course, there is much more knowledge from us, sinaumedia, #SahabatUnlimits, that we want to share with Sinaumed’s . If you are interested in deepening your knowledge in any field, Sinaumed’s can visit the www.sinaumedia.com website to find books according to your interests and interests.

Author: Adrianto Sukarso

Book Recommendations & Related Articles

IF formula in Excel – Microsoft Excel is a type of Microsoft that is widely used by people in this world. Apart from Microsoft Word and Microsoft Power Point, Microsoft Excel is also very helpful for someone in completing their work.

There are many formulas that can help you in Microsoft Excel, one of which is the IF formula. Maybe ordinary people will be confused with this term. However, for people who have been in Microsoft Excel for a long time, they must be familiar with the formulas in it. There are still many people who don’t know about the use and types of this one formula.

See the following explanation about the type and use of this formula.

Definition of Microsoft Excel

Microsoft Excel or Microsoft Office Excel is a worksheet application program created and distributed by Microsoft Corporation that can run on Microsoft Windows and Mac OS. This application is part of Microsoft Office.

This application features calculations and graphing using Microsoft’s aggressive marketing strategy, making Microsoft Excel one of the most popular computer programs used on microcomputers to date. This program is the most widely used spreadsheet program by many parties, both on Windows-based PC platforms and Macintosh-based Mac OS platforms, since version 5.0 was published in 1993.

Excel offers many interface advantages compared to the spreadsheet programs that preceded it, but its essence is still the same as VisiCalc ( the first popular spreadsheet software ): Cells are arranged in rows and columns, and contain data or formulas with absolute or relative references. other cells.

Excel was the first spreadsheet program that allowed users to define how the spreadsheet they edited would look like: font, character attributes, and the appearance of each cell. Excel also offers intelligent cell recalculation, where only cells related to the cell will be updated (where other spreadsheet programs will recalculate the entire data or wait for a special command from the user). In addition, Excel also offers excellent graph processing features.

When it was first bundled into Microsoft Office in 1993, Microsoft also redesigned the interface used by Microsoft Word and Microsoft PowerPoint to match the appearance of Microsoft Excel, which at that time was the most popular spreadsheet application .

Following are some of the Microsoft Excel extensions:

• *.xls, is the default Microsoft Excel format prior to Excel 12. It is still based on the BIFF format and can store VBA macros .
• *.xlt, is a format for Microsoft Excel worksheet templates prior to Excel 12. Still based on the BIFF format and can store VBA macros .
• *.XML, or what is known as an XML Spreadsheet . Not capable of hosting VBA macros .
• *.xla, is the format for Excel Add-in prior to Excel 12. It is still based on the BIFF format and can store VBA macros, given that the goal is to add Microsoft Excel capabilities.
• *.xlsx, is the default worksheet format for Microsoft Excel 12, which is based on XML. Unable to save VBA macros , due to security reasons. It is actually a compressed archive in ZIP format with a document structure consisting of XML text documents. Is a replacement for the .xlsold format.
• *.xlsm, is a Microsoft Excel 12 worksheet format , which is based on XML, but can store VBA macros .
• *.xlsb, is a Microsoft Excel 12 worksheet format , which is based on XML, but is encoded in binary form. This format has the advantage of being faster to open and more efficient, considering that the purpose of this format is to handle very large worksheets consisting of tens of thousands of rows or hundreds of columns.
• *.xltm, is a format for Microsoft Excel 12 worksheet templates , which are based on XML but are capable of storing VBA macros . It is a replacement for the format .*.xlt
• *.xlam, is a format for Excel Add-in to increase the capabilities of Excel 12. By default it is able to handle VBA macros , considering the goal is to add Excel capabilities.

Benefits of Excel Formulas in the World of Work

Excel formulas in the world of work basically often use these two formulas. For simple data using formulas, while the function formula for large-scale data.

The benefits of function formulas make it easier for users in terms of:

• Gets accurate calculation results from lots of data.
• Help presentation needs on data visualization.
• Tidying up large amounts of data so that it is neatly arranged.
• Save time when processing data.
• Processing big data becomes easier and more practical.

Understanding the IF Function in Excel

What is the meaning of the Excel IF function or IF formula?

The IF function or IF formula is one of the Excel functions that fall into a category or logical group that is often used to perform certain logical tests on Microsoft Excel formulas. The Excel IF formula will produce a certain value if the condition we specify to be evaluated is met (TRUE) and will produce another value if the logic test or condition is not met (FALSE).

In other words, this excel IF function will evaluate certain logical tests and then produce TRUE or FALSE values. The TRUE value is the value where the condition is met and the FALSE value is the value for the condition that is not met.

To do this logic test, the if function in Excel usually uses the Excel comparison operator that we discussed earlier. namely using the operators =, >, >= , < or <= and so on. Therefore, before further studying this logical function, it’s a good idea for you to first understand Excel operators. If you understand enough about comparison operators in Excel, then we will learn about how to use the if formula in Excel.

IF Formula Format and Function in Excel

Before discussing the types and uses of this formula, you should first know the function of this formula. This formula in Microsoft Excel is used to determine true or false values. It is said to be true if the value in a condition is met and said to be false if the value in the condition is not met.

There are two common formats for this formula in Microsoft Excel. First is the format of this formula using a comma separator (,). The general formula can be written as follows:

IF(condition, if_condition_true, if_condition_false)

Then the second format is a formula using a semicolon separator which is written as follows:

IF(condition; if_condition_true; if_condition_false)

Then what is the difference between the IF formula using a comma separator and a semicolon? Actually, the two formulas have the same function and results, it’s just that the difference is the region that is set on the computer.

If the regional setting on the computer is Indonesian, then you use this formula with a semicolon separator, whereas if the regional setting on the computer is English, then you use this formula with a comma separator.

Single IF Types and How to Use Them

One of the most familiar types of these formulas is probably a single IF. Single IF formula means using 1 formula without combining other formulas.

Generally, used to determine a graduation from a particular subject.

For example:

• A score of 70 to 100 is PASS
• Any value less than 70 is FAIL

The steps for using the Single IF formula are as follows:

1. The First Way

The first way you can do is as follows.

• Click the cell that will use the IF function. For example, Cell C2.
• Type the IF function in the Formula Bar, type =IF(to start the IF function).
• Create arguments to test the desired criteria.
• In this example, there are 2 test criteria, namely if >= 70, then PASS and if <70, then FAIL.
• Then, enter the first criterion for logical_test.
• To do this, click the cell to be tested (B2), type >=70,. Make sure the formula written becomes =IF(B2>=70,.
• Enter the value_if_true argument, meaning that B2 contains a value >=70, then Excel will give this result.
• Please type “PASS” or the formula becomes =IF(B2>=70,”PASS”,.

That’s the first way to use a single IF that you can use.

2. The Second Way

Furthermore, the second way that you can do is as follows.

• After that, enter the value_If_false values ​​argument if logical_test is not true.
• So, if the value in cell B2 does not contain >=70, then Excel will return the result according to value_if_false.
• Please type “FAILED” then type a closing parenthesis and press Enter so that the IF formula becomes something like =IF(B2>=70,”PASS”,”FAILED”).
• Perform AutoFill for calculations automatically.
• Use the AutoFill feature to calculate the values ​​in cells B3 to B6 without repeating the formula.

The method of using the single formula above can be used for numeric or text data.

Multilevel IF Formulas, Functions, and How to Use Them in Excel

Apart from single IF, there are also nested IFs which are often used in Microsoft Excel. The method that can be used for multilevel IF is by combining two or more IF functions in one cell.

This technique is suitable for use if it has more than one test criterion. Generally, the two types of multilevel formulas that are often used are IF “And” and IF “Or”.

1. IF “And”

The first formula in this nested IF is IF And. In this criterion, the combination of the IF and “And” functions for testing 2 or more criteria that are related or similar.

The nested IF formula “And” can be written as follows:

=IF(logical_test1,IF(logical_test2,[value_if_true2],[value_if_false2]),[value_if_false1]

Problems example:

Students are only declared PASS if they meet the Minimum Passing Standards for both Grades (MID and UAS).

Conversely, if it does not meet the criteria it will be declared FAILED.

Following are the Minimum Passing Value Standards:

• MID value = 75
• UAS score = 80

The steps for using the Multilevel IF “And” formula are as follows:

• Enter the IF Function along with the logical_test and the formula separator operator ( , or ; ).
• The written formula will be =IF(B2>=75,
• Enter logical_test along with the formula separator operator ( , or ; ) for the second IF Function.
• The second formula written will be =IF(B2>=75,IF(C2>=80,
• Enter value_if_true or the formula becomes =IF(B2>=75,IF(C2>=80,“PASS”,
• Enter value_if_false written in the formula to =IF(B2>=75,IF(C2>=80,“PASS”,“FAILED”),
• Enter value_if_false and a closing parenthesis for the first IF Function or the formula becomes =IF(B2>=75,IF(C2>=80,“PASS”,”FAILED”),“FAILED”).
• Press Enter to see the results.

This means that from the word problem, if B2>=75 “and” If C2>=80 then PASS.

However, if one is not fulfilled then it FAILS, likewise if all are not fulfilled then it FAILS.

2. IF “Or”

Apart from IF And, there is also an IF Or formula which can be written like this:

=IF(B7>=70,“PASS”,“FAILED”)

Example question:

• A score of 70 to 100 is PASS
• Any value less than 70 is FAIL

It can be seen that there are 2 criteria above that are not related to each other.

In unrelated calculations, the data tested needs to be the same, namely based on numbers.

The steps for calculating IF Excel “Or”, namely:

• Do a test Logical_test =IF(B7<70,
• If (true) the value in Cell B7 is less than 70, then Excel returns value_if_true.
• If the value in Cell B7 is not less than 70, then Excel will return the result of value_if_false.
• Enter this formula second with =IF(B7<70,”FAILED”,IF(B7<=100,”PASS”,”FAILED DATA”.
• If logical_test is true, then the result is value_if_true =IF(B7<70,”FAILED”,IF(B7<=100,”PASS”.
• If logical_test is false, then the result is value_if_false =IF(B7<70,”FAILED”,IF(B7<=100,”PASS”,”DATA WRONG”.

For some Indonesian students, getting a Masters scholarship abroad is one of their biggest dreams. Apart from being able to add experience, the benefits that will be obtained after studying abroad can be felt, namely the ease in achieving a dream career. Because, of course, there are many companies that are more interested in recruiting graduates from abroad. Opportunities to study abroad are always wide open. However, the opportunity to obtain the scholarship is still considered difficult. Even though in reality, the opportunity to continue Masters abroad is quite easy, if you know the trick. For those of you who are curious about the trick, see the full explanation below. We will discuss how to get Masters abroad easily.

A. Destination Countries for Overseas Masters Scholarships Worth Trying

For those of you who are still confused, which countries open opportunities for students from abroad to study there? Until now, Germany is still the most popular destination for continuing Masters studies. Even though in reality, there are still many other countries in the world that open scholarship opportunities for foreign students, including:

1.Australia

You can make Australia a destination country when you want to continue your Masters higher education. The Australian government itself even dares to invest $200 million annually in educational activities. There are many of the best universities in Australia that you can try. Starting from the University of Sydney, The University of Melbourne, to the Australian National University (ANU). These three universities have been proven to provide partial scholarships for students from various countries in the world. Not to mention, there is additional health protection aimed at students who have high academic achievements.

2. England

Next is England. There are several universities in the UK that are known for equipping foreign students with a variety of specific skills. So, this will certainly be a differentiator between competitors who come from their home countries later. Not only that, for outstanding students, the UK will also provide various facilities, one of which is the best university that has been registered in the QAA.

In addition, these outstanding students will also be given the opportunity to be able to travel around Europe. It can be used as a place to gain experience. Therefore, the UK is one of the countries of choice for scholarship destinations to pursue a Master’s degree abroad which is very worthy of consideration.

3. Canada

Canada is also one of the countries that offers scholarship opportunities for meritorious foreign students. Basically, most of the scholarships given are partial. That means, the costs are only partially borne. Not only that, if you are interested in continuing your Masters in Canada, then all the files and data needed must be sent directly to the destination university.

4. New Zealand

Who would have thought that New Zealand would also open up great opportunities for scholarships for foreign students from Southeast Asia. Indonesia is no exception. Lots of universities in New Zealand offer partial scholarship services for each level of higher education. Starting from S1 to S2 and S3.

5. United States

You can also choose the United States as a destination country for students who are interested in finding scholarships to study Masters degrees abroad. Most of the universities there will offer scholarships based on student achievement. The main requirement is good academic achievement as well as other supporting factors, for example organizational to extracurricular experience.

B. How to S2 Abroad with Scholarships

After discussing various countries that can be used as foreign scholarship destinations. Now is the time for us to discuss how to study masters abroad in order to obtain a master’s degree abroad. Basically, there are several steps that you have to go through. The following are several ways to study masters abroad that you can try.

1. Preparation for the TOEFL and IELTS Tests

To be able to study abroad, of course the main requirement that must be met is proficient in English. Therefore, this ability can be seen from the TOEFL or IELTS tests. Generally, the score for the TOEFL test is at least 550, while for IELTS it usually has to be at least 6.0. Even so, it is likely that each university abroad will apply different requirements.

However, if you want to study abroad without having to use English as your main language, then try to learn the language of your destination country. So you will get added value. For example, when you want to continue your education at a Chinese university, you need to deepen your Mandarin language. So your chances of being accepted will be even greater.

2. Do Research About Universities and Interested Fields of Study

Before deciding to apply for a Masters scholarship abroad, it would be better if you first learn about the university and the field of study you are interested in. At least, think about why you want to choose that campus? Why do you want to choose this study program? That’s the question you have to find the answer to.

3. Strive to have work experience according to the field of interest

After graduating from a bachelor’s degree, it never hurts to gain experience by working in a company or any field. While waiting for the scholarship application to take Masters abroad in the process. However, try to work in a field that is in accordance with the field of specialization that you will take to study abroad. This will obviously make it easier for you to get the scholarship.

4. Write more scientific papers

You need to know, that not only work experience can support success in obtaining Masters scholarships abroad. Experience in writing scientific papers can also help you in obtaining the scholarship. Therefore, it would be better, you need to write more scientific papers or journals related to the field of study you want to take.

You can try to write several essays or books related to your chosen field of study. There’s nothing wrong with starting to think about plans to do research when you’re studying for a master’s degree later. Maybe, this will be asked during the interview session. That way, you can give an idea of ​​the purpose of choosing the study.

5. There is a Letter of Recommendation

Having a letter of recommendation will also greatly support success in obtaining a Masters scholarship abroad. This recommendation letter will give confidence to the appraisers if indeed the applicant really has. ability. Basically, recommendation letters made especially for the benefit of foreign scholarships must be written by at least 2 people.

Therefore, it would be better to choose two people to write the recommendation letter. Make sure that both are still related in the chosen field of study. Maybe it could be from the lecturer or it could also be from the office where they work. Generally, parties like that will help to accentuate the positive abilities they have.

6. Consult Experienced People

If you are already feeling confused when you want to try to apply for a Masters scholarship abroad, there is an easy way to do it. One of them is by asking directly to people who have tried the scholarship and succeeded. The way to get acquainted with these people is by joining forums or educational institutions that do facilitate scholarship activities.

In that community, there will be a lot of information about how to apply for Masters scholarships abroad. Starting from the requirements that must be met, the process flow, and so on. Not only that, professional fellow scholarship recipients will generally not hesitate to use various tricks that can be applied. So that the preparation for applying for scholarships becomes more mature.

C. Recommended Fully Funded Overseas Masters Scholarships

Have you ever imagined studying abroad and away from your family? Meet new friends from other countries and of course get used to using foreign languages? Must be cool, right? Well, you can make this dream come true through the scholarship program. No need to worry, there are lots of institutions that not only cover educational costs, but also cover all living necessities to accommodation while abroad. If you are interested in applying for a scholarship, here’s how you can do a master’s degree abroad.

1. MEXT Scholarship

The MEXT Scholarship is provided by the Japanese government and is intended for those of you who wish to continue their undergraduate or postgraduate studies in Japan. You do not have to be proficient in Japanese to apply for this scholarship, however it is recommended that you are proficient in Japanese, at least at the basic level. There are three types of MEXT scholarships, namely Undergraduate or Gakubu, Specialized Training College or Senshu, and College of Technology or Kosen. Each of these programs has a different focus and study period.

MEXT Scholarship Terms:

– Graduated from a formal high school/vocational school/equivalent level.
– Maximum age of 24 years when registering
– You can see specific requirements for each program on the page www.id.emb-japan.go.jp/sch_kosen2022.html.

MEXT Scholarship Coverage:

– Tuition fees are fully borne (including school fees and preparation).
– Get a living allowance of ¥117,000 (Rp. 15,652,560) per month.
– Provided return flight tickets Indonesia-Japan.
– Free of charge for student visa processing.
– No service ties.

2. Mitsui Bussan Scholarship

Next is the Bussan Scholarship, where this scholarship is intended for those of you who intend to continue their education in Japan. Generally, this scholarship will last for 5 years and 5 months, consisting of 1.5 years of Japanese language courses, and 4 years of lectures. The scholarship participants will later receive language training at the Tokyo Japanese Language Education Center of Independent Administrative Institution, Japan Student Services Organization, Tokyo, Japan.

Requirements for the Mitsui Bussan Scholarship:

– Indonesian citizens.
– Age less than 20 years
– Not married and willing not to get married during the period of receiving the scholarship.
– Open to high school/MAN graduates majoring in Science or Social Sciences
– Willing to study Japanese and obtain education at universities that use Japanese.
– Physically and mentally healthy and have no history of infectious diseases.

Mitsui Bussan Scholarship Coverage:

– FREE scholarship application fee,
– Get a living expenses allowance of 145,000 yen (± Rp. 18 million) every month,
– Get an economy class airplane ticket PP Indonesia – Japan at the beginning and end of the scholarship grant period,
– Get an arrival allowance of 50,000 yen (± Rp. 6) million) which will be given upon arrival in Japan,
– FREE tuition fees including registration fees and Japanese language course fees.

3. Orange Tulip Scholarship

Orange Tulip Scholarship is a scholarship provided by the Dutch government through Nuffic Neso Indonesia. This scholarship is intended for students who intend to continue their undergraduate or postgraduate studies in the Netherlands. Where this scholarship has collaborated with 25 of the best universities in the country. Before registering, make sure the campus you choose is registered as a partner of this scholarship program.

Orange Tulip Scholarship Requirements:

– Indonesian citizens.
– The status when applying for this scholarship is not currently working or studying in the Netherlands.
– Currently in the registration process, or have been accepted at one of the partner universities of the Orange Tulip Scholarship Program.
– Meet the special requirements set by each Orange Tulip Scholarship scheme.

Orange Tulip Scholarship Coverage:

– Free education fees of 30 – 100% until graduation

4. IFA Paris Scholarships

Do you aspire to become a world-class designer? If so, then you need to know about this one scholarship. International Fashion Academy Paris opens scholarships for undergraduate and postgraduate programs. Specifically for the undergraduate program, you can choose 4 study programs, namely Bachelor Visual Merchandising, Bachelor Fashion Design and Technology, Bachelor Fashion Sustainability, and Bachelor Fashion Marketing.

IFA Paris Scholarship Coverage:

– Full Scholarship (100 percent free of tuition fees), deadline: March 15, 2022.
– Excellence Scholarship (reduced tuition fees of 40 percent), there is no submission deadline.
– Distinction Scholarship (20 percent reduction in tuition fees), there is no submission deadline.

IFA Paris Scholarship Requirements:

– Have completed SMA/SMK/equivalent.
– Minimum age of 16 years
– Have a minimum IELTS score of 5.5 or TOEFL 65
– Have an interest in fashion design or business as well as fashion marketing.
– Applicants for the Bachelor in Fashion Design & Technology and Bachelor Fashion Sustainability with Design Major programs must attach a portfolio.
– Pay the registration fee of 150 Euros.
– Willing to conduct interview selection via Skype or directly at the university.
– Fill out the registration form and upload document files that have been translated into English using sworn translator services.

5. KAIST Scholarships

This scholarship is perfect for those of you who are interested in studying technology in South Korea. KAIST (Korea Advanced Institute of Science and Technology) is one of the best technology campuses that has produced the best alumni. Starting from Rim Ji Hoon, the founder of the Kakao Talk application, and Hae Jin Lee, the founder of the LINE application.

KAIST Scholarship Coverage:

– Free tuition for 8 semesters,
– Support for living costs of $ 300 or IDR 4.3 million per month,
– Health insurance costs.

KAIST Scholarship Requirements:

– International students (including Indonesia),
– Have/will graduate from high school before 31 August 2022, and are ready to attend college in the fall season/fall 2022,
– Meet the English language requirements with the recommended score for the TOEFL iBT min. score 83 / TOEFL PBT min. score 63 / TOEFL CBT min. score 220 / IELTS min. score 6.5 / TOEIC Listening & Reading min. score 720 / TEPS min. score 326,
– Especially for students who graduate from schools with English as the language of instruction, English language requirements documents are not required.

Did you know that it turns out that reviewing books abroad is actually a trend there. Even though the awareness of reviewing books abroad has become ingrained and has become commonplace. However, it seems that in Indonesia is also not much different. In the past, newspapers and print media were destinations for someone who wanted to review books.

Because the competition is intense and it takes quite a long time, stretching to do a review is not as interesting as it is today. Since social media emerged, book review activities have also increased. Many people do book reviews more freely and as attractively as possible.

At least, there is no more competition or selection of editors to review books in newspapers or print media. Because, currently book reviews can be uploaded on their respective social media. So, how do you review a book? Before knowing how to review a book, let’s first know the definition or meaning of a book review.

Definition of Book Review

Based on the origin of the word, the word “review” comes from English which means “review”. Meanwhile, based on the Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI) states that the word “review” means “responses, comments and interpretations”.

So that the word “review” can be interpreted as a response, interpretation, or comment on something, for example books, films, and so on. In general, in conducting a review, it is necessary to include an assessment and comparison between one product and similar products.

So, the notion of a book review is a response, interpretation, assessment of the quality or content of a book by emphasizing scientific judgment and arguments. Another understanding, from a book review, is an activity to peel, evaluate, consider, criticize, dissect the substance to provide comments on a book.

How to Review Books

How to review a book is not too difficult, because the important key in doing this book review lies in your ability to understand the contents of what you read then summarize, and put it in written form. So, what happens if you’ve never done it at all?

Take it easy, here are some book review ways that you can do. Of course, how to review this one book will make it easier for you to do a book review. Well, then how? Let’s pay attention to the explanation below about how to review books.

1. Write Book Identity

The first way to review a book and become the main point is to start by writing the identity of the book. His name is also reviewing books, so identifying a book is very important.

Identity can be interpreted as certain characteristics or circumstances attached to something. So that when interpreted, the notion of book identity is certain characteristics or conditions that are inherent in a book.

The goal is clear, so that readers know the book, then explain and convey the theme. Even though that’s an outline, it’s the most powerful way to answer all readers’ questions.

There are several identity books that you need to write. Well, what are they? The following is the identity of the book that needs to be written when you want to review a book, including:

– Author name
– Year published
– Publisher name
– Number of pages
– Book price
– ISBN number
– Author profile

The mistake that often occurs when someone reviews a book is often writing plot twist spoilers. Even so, it is something that must be avoided. Why? Because it can reduce the reader’s interest in the reviews and contents of a book.

One thing you need to underline is that the secret to success in reviewing an interesting book is to make the reader curious about the contents of the book. So avoiding writing plot twists is very important.

2. Read Table of Contents & Synopsis

Another way to review a book is to write a little synopsis or give a brief description of the contents of the book. Of course, this requires skill for you to write and express as attractively as possible.

Before reading the whole, you can start by reading the table of contents and synopsis. The goal is that you have a broad picture related to the contents of the book.

3. Read Books

How to review other books, namely by reading the book as a whole. If you are required to be fast, then you can read books quickly and mark which parts are important parts of the book.

4. Reveal What Things You Like From the Contents of the Book

How to review the fourth book, namely by expressing what you like about the contents of the book. Although this method seems trivial, it is actually very important. The trick, you just need to say what things you like about the contents of the book, then you can write it down.

By pouring out something that you feel when reading a book, you can give the reader a different spirit and feeling. At least this book review is really written from the heart. Not based on science.

So when reviewing a book, make sure you have read the entire contents of the book. Because many people review books only to read the synopsis.

When you get here, maybe you are still having trouble how to review a book? Take it easy, because there are tricks so you don’t find it difficult to review books. One way is by asking questions. There are several questions you can answer to make the review easier.

For example, which part or chapter do you like the most? And what’s the reason? You can write it down and tell it, then you’ve made up a small part of the book review. There are other questions that might help you master how to review books.

Like, giving reasons for the character you like the most, the moral message the author wants to convey and what things you catch. So, then you can determine what title you can write to review the book.

5. Convey the Author’s Techniques in Writing a Book (Language and Plot)

You can easily do a book review by writing or alluding to writing techniques in writing a book. Actually, not only that, you can also explain and reveal about the settings used by the author.

If what you are reviewing is a novel, then there is nothing wrong if you also mention the character of the character. But keep in mind that the principle of the review is to make the reader feel curious about the contents of the book.

However, if the book being reviewed is a motivational book or a reading book, then you can explain the appeal that you can get and the new knowledge that you can get from the book. It’s a little different between reviewing novels and non-novels. Even so, the principle of reviewing books is to highlight the interesting things from each book being reviewed.

6. Give Rating

The way to properly review a book, both fiction and non-fiction, is to show the segmentation of the readers. This means that the book you are reviewing is intended for students only, students only, or for the public.

This reader segmentation is to be mentioned, because this will determine and help the reader know the classification and designation. In addition, you can provide an assessment. You can give an assessment using a range of 1 to 5 or 1 to 10.

What if there is no segmentation recommendation? Segmentation recommendations may not be written down. However, actually here it also depends on your capture in reading the book. In general, there is a categorization intended for the front of the book and the back of the book. So you can choose this method if you find it difficult to determine reader segmentation.

7. Making Conclusions

The easiest way to review a book is by pouring your personal conclusions. So you can draw the final conclusion after reading the book by writing it down. Because your subjective conclusions will help you determine the end of the review.

The question is, should the review be honest or should it be fabricated? Of course, the review must be honest. So what did you feel at that time, if you felt sad, tense, happy, and so on, then that’s what you must write down. Because, your dafu’s subjective conclusions will determine the readers out there.

If necessary, you can also follow the current application style by giving an assessment using stars. The goal of this star rating can be a picture of readers out there.

Example of a book review

Once you know, how to review books. The following are two examples of book reviews, including:

Book Review Example 1

Healthy Living by Knowing Communicable & Non-Communicable Diseases
Book Title : Integrated Non-Communicable Disease Development Post
Author : Yandrizal, et al
Category : Reference Books
in Science : Health
ISBN : 978-602-401-900-6
Size : 14×20 cm
Pages : viii, 51 pages
Price : Rp. 56,000
Year of Publication : 2017

The integrated development post for non-communicable diseases (Posbindu PTM) by Yandrizal and friends is a book that is expected to be able to realize community participation in early detection activities. So this book educates the public about how to respond and monitor risk factors for infectious diseases independently and continuously.

Lately, many people live fast-paced lives. Thus, many people also do not care about the risk factors for non-communicable diseases. What’s more, this non-communicable disease is one of the diseases that don’t show symptoms.

This 51-page book is highly recommended for reading. In this book, the author provides an explanation of the objectives and roles of stakeholders in the process of forming, preparing for implementation, monitoring evaluation in order to increase knowledge.

In fact, it is not only capable of improving and shaping in preparation and implementation. But it also shapes attitudes and behavior of the community to carry out early detection. However, the risk factors and possibilities that occur in the body can lurk you.

The advantages of this book explain the objectives of the integrated non-communicable disease development post, namely to mobilize the role of stakeholders in an effort to increase awareness for the community. So that people have self-awareness to carry out early examinations and start living in a healthy way.

In addition, there are also efforts to prevent and control disease risk factors. Then, on page 9 you will be invited to identify what non-communicable diseases are like and how. One of them is by always implementing a healthy life.
Based on WHO (2011) states that the category of non-communicable diseases is cardiovascular disease which includes heart disease and stroke. There are also other diseases, such as cancer, diabetes, and chronic respiratory disease.

Even so, a number of non-communicable diseases are still the forerunners of these diseases due to several factors. With one of them namely unhealthy diet, smoking habits, consuming food and drinks from alcohol to lack of physical activity.

Non-communicable diseases can be interpreted as chronic conditions that do not result from an infectious process, and therefore are not contagious. It could also be because this disease has a long journey that cannot heal spontaneously. Still referring to WHO that the characteristics of non-communicable diseases can be influenced by several causes, risk factors, non-infectious origin, prolonged illness, occurrence of functional disorders or disabilities, and others.

This book was published in 2017. In it, the contents of the book learn about how to form an integrated non-communicable disease development post. However, unfortunately this book in terms of delivery still seems stiff and too formal. However, in terms of the tips and knowledge that is shared, it really gives insight to the readers.

Book Review Example 2

Want to Live Healthy? Master Food and Nutrition Economics Here
Book Title : Food and Nutrition Economics
Author : Nanik Rustanti
ISBN : 978-602-401-144-4
Size : 15.5×23 cm
Page : xviii, 194 pp.
Price : Rp. 106,500
Year of Publication : 2015

Want to become a nutritionist? It turns out that being a nutritionist is not an easy thing. Because, there is a science of its own. To the extent that there are special departments that study this one science. With one of them through a book by Ninik Rustanti, STP, M.Sc.

The 194-thick book does not only discuss developments in the food and nutrition economy. However, also reviewing the system. So, for those of you who are interested in getting this book, of course you are curious to see a more complete review.

The Concept of Economic Demand and Supply. When studying the economics of food and nutrition, the concept of demand and supply is of course familiar. In the concept of demand, there are two interrelated variables, namely the quantity demanded and the price level. Prices affect the quantity of goods demanded, while time is considered constant.

There are also those who call it the law of supply. The law of supply can be interpreted, when the higher the price of goods, the greater the quantity of these goods will be offered by sellers. Later there will be a supply curve that can shift due to technological factors, input prices, number of sellers and expectations.

In this chapter, later you will learn about a number of things. Starting from the type of demand, the law of demand, factors that affect the level of supply, and so forth.

The concept of price elasticity in food and nutrition economics actually has a basic foundation that you must know. Especially for those of you who really want to focus on this major. In the chapter on the concept of price elasticity will affect a number of variable changes from price to demand. Where this is often not so noticed by students.

At least in this chapter you will be invited to study the concepts of demand elasticity, cross elasticity, supply elasticity and others. So even though this science studies nutrition, students are always required to understand the foundation and be able to plan food and nutrition programs. The goal is that students can at least analyze food and nutrition programs.

The advantages of this published book, namely learning how to concept and how to calculate elasticity. Because there are formulas that you need to understand. Another advantage of this book is that it is packaged using language that is easy to understand and certainly not boring.

This is information about how to review books. Hopefully this information can provide benefits to readers.

How to Respect and Appreciate Teachers – Respect and respect for fellow human beings is something that must be done. The fellow humans in question are all humans around us regardless of gender, age, status, to the position they hold. Even if it’s a beggar or a busker, we also have to respect and appreciate it.

Manners of respecting and appreciating fellow human beings have actually been taught by families and schools. If at school, usually this is taught by the teacher. Then, if the teacher teaches these good manners, how will our behavior towards them be? Do you also have to respect and appreciate it?

The answer is of course yes, even have to! Teachers as our second parents at school are obliged to be respected and valued, no matter how small their actions are. So, here’s a way to honor and respect teachers that must be taught to the younger generation so that the culture of politeness in the Indonesian nation doesn’t just fade away.

How to Respect and Appreciate Teachers in Schools

According to KBBI (Big Indonesian Dictionary), respect means paying respect to someone. The form of respect is to acknowledge and obey the rules put forward by that person. Usually, this respectful behavior is given by someone who is younger to someone who is older.

Meanwhile, appreciating is also almost the same as respecting, that is, both don’t look down on other people.

When at school, we as students are obliged to respect teachers who have taught science. Even if the teacher is not in charge of our class, it is still mandatory to be respected.

So, here’s a way to respect teachers at school, which of course you can practice.

1. Greet when you meet

When schools meet face to face, we will often meet teachers, be it in the corridors or even in the cafeteria. So, when we meet them, we as students are obliged to greet them, for example saying good morning or good afternoon. Even when the teacher has finished teaching, we should also say thank you. When meeting outside the school is also required to greet.

The behavior of greeting has actually become part of the polite culture of the Indonesian people, but over time, this culture has slowly faded away. Therefore, as the future generation of the Indonesian nation, we must maintain this culture.

2. Listening when the teacher explains the subject matter

The second way to respect and appreciate the teacher is to listen carefully when the teacher explains the subject matter. Even if we don’t like the subject, we still have to listen to His explanation. Who knows, that way, slowly we can actually understand the material.

When listening to this, we also don’t chat with our seatmates, or even fall asleep. This clearly shows that we do not appreciate the efforts of teachers who have explained many things.

3. Obey the Teacher’s Command

Next is obeying the teacher’s orders, including orders to do practice questions on the class blackboard. It’s a bit annoying if the teacher tells us to come to the front of the class to do practice questions, because we don’t understand how to do it.

However, do you know the reason why the teacher gave the order? Namely indirectly want to teach his students to be a brave figure. If you find that you can’t do the problem, that’s okay, it’s better to try even if it’s wrong. The teacher, of course, will not be angry if you are wrong in answering the practice questions.

4. Do the Tasks Given

Did you know that simple things like doing assignments, be it schoolwork or homework, have become a form of respect and respect for teachers. If you and your friends are diligent in doing the assignments that have been given, then of course your teacher will be happy because he will feel respected as a teaching staff.

5. Say Thank You

The true teacher is a person who is credited with teaching us knowledge. Therefore, we must always say thank you for all the knowledge, attention, and affection that has been given.

Usually, thanks are delivered together when the lesson is over and led by the class leader.

6. Not Interrupting the Teacher’s Talk

When the teacher is explaining the subject matter in class, don’t ever interrupt or interrupt the conversation …

If you want to ask or say something, wait until He finishes explaining. After that, raise your hand and after being asked to speak, state what you want to say.

7. Be Gentle

A good teacher is one who provides education and teaching to his students. The teaching in question is in the form of attention and affection as if you were his child.

Then, how to be gentle to the teacher? Namely by not speaking harshly, not yelling at the teacher, and speaking in a gentle voice and intonation.

In Islam, it turns out that this behavior has been stated in the Al-Quran surah Al-Isra’ verse 23, which reads:

۞ وَقَضٰى رَبُّكَ اَلَّا تَعْبُدُوْٓا اِلَّآ اِيَّاهُ وَبِالْوَالِدَيْنِ اِحْسٰنًاۗ اِمَّا يَبْلُغَنَّ عِنْدَكَ الْكِبَرَ اَحَدُهُمَآ اَوْ كِلٰهُمَا فَلَا تَقُلْ لَّهُمَآ اُفٍّ وَّلَا تَنْهَرْهُمَا وَقُلْ لَّهُمَا قَوْلًا كَرِيْمًا

Which mean:

“ And your Lord has commanded you not to worship other than Him and to do good to your parents. If one of the two or both reaches an advanced age under your care, then in no case do you say to both of them the word ” ah ” and do not yell at both of them, and say good words to both of them.” (QS Al-Isra’, verse 23)

8. Listening to Teacher’s Advice

Teachers are like our second parents at school, so it’s only natural that they always give advice and directions so that our path in life is always straight. When He gives advice, listen carefully and consider it carefully.

Do not occasionally argue with his advice because it is a behavior that is not commendable. As long as the advice does not violate social norms and religious norms, then obey and respect the advice that has been given.

9. Always Ask for Prayers, Suggestions, and Directions

For example, we are in grade 12 high school and want to continue our further education with college, but are confused about what major is right for us. Well, you can ask your teacher for advice and directions, usually a Counseling Guidance teacher. Listen to the suggestions and directions, then reconsider.

For Counseling Guidance teachers, if there are students who want to consult on majors issues at the continuing education level, it’s best to give good advice. Don’t underestimate their efforts to go to college, in any major.

10. Always Ask For Permission When You Have Urgent Needs

During the learning process, it is common for students to have an urgent need, for example, to go to the bathroom. So, before going out and heading to the toilet, it’s best to ask permission first from your teacher.

It’s impolite if you just walk out, it’s the same as not respecting and appreciating your teacher’s existence.

Reading Bilal Eid al-Adha – Is Sinaumed’s familiar with the term “bilal” in prayer services? Yep, the origin of the term “bilal” is related to the history of the companion of the Prophet Muhammad SAW who was a slave named Bilal bin Rabah. Indeed, the figure of Bilal bin Rabah was originally a black slave from the Quraysh, who was later freed by Abu Bakr. At that time, Bilal was constantly tortured by his employer just because he was caught embracing Islam. Bilal’s name was later enshrined as the first person to call the call to prayer.

Along with the development of Islam, the name “Bilal” is considered to be someone whose job is to call the call to prayer before the fardhu prayer begins. Bilal is also commonly referred to as the muezzin, so his job is not only to call the call to prayer, but also to give out signs of prayer, alias iqomah. The existence of this bilal is not only in fardhu prayers, but also in muakkad sunnah prayers, one of which is the Eid al-Adha prayer. If during this Eid al-Adha prayer, a Bilal will be tasked with reciting certain prayer readings when “delivering” the preacher to the pulpit. So, how about reading Bilal during the Eid al-Adha prayer? So, so that Sinaumed’s understands it, let’s look at the following review!

What is the reading of Bilal Eid al-Adha?

Basically, the reading of the Eid al-Adha bilal is an introductory reading that is done by a bilal or muezzin before a khatib rises to the pulpit to deliver his sermon during the Eid al-Adha prayer. However, not everyone can be a bilal , yes , they have to have a clear, loud, and pleasant voice so that the congregation will also be happy when listening to it. Not only that, when a Bilal recites a special prayer during prayer, it must be firm and enthusiastic. This is so that the congregation will also be excited to worship. If the implementation of the Eid al-Adha prayer is likened to an event, then the figure of Bilal is the MC or host of the event. So that Bilal must be excited to convey his reading before the khatib ascends to the pulpit.

Both in Friday prayers, Eid al-Fitr prayers, and Eid al-Adha prayers, the figure of Bilal is required for those who understand tarqiyyah readings. According to the language, the term “tarqiyyah” has a definition as ‘to raise’, which can be interpreted as ‘a prefix as a marker to raise the khatib to go up to the pulpit to deliver his sermon’. The tradition of reciting tarqiyyah is actually heresy hasanah (positive) and there is already a law that regulates it …

Yep, during the time of the Prophet and the three caliphs after him, there was no implementation of this Bilal reading. However, as the Islamic religion developed, this tradition of reading Bilal was carried out because the contents of the readings of tarqiyyah also lead to positive things. In this tarqiyyah reading, it always includes the arguments for general recommendations which have been confirmed by the scholars. There are several scholars who emphasize that the existence of this Bilal reading can be applied to the implementation of congregational prayers where there are sermon activities.

According to Sheikh Syihabuddin al-Qalyubi

Sheikh Syihabuddin al-Qalyubi has said that:

“(A branch of the problem). Adopting muraqqi as a well-established tradition is a good bid’ah because it contains positive things in the form of advising to read blessings on the Prophet by reciting verses from the Qur’an, advising silence during sermons by mentioning authentic hadith arguments that the Prophet read in several of his sermons. There is no argument that states that the Prophet and the three caliphs after him appointed a muraqqi.” (Syekh Syihabuddin al-Qalyubi, Hasyiyah al-Qalyubi ‘ala al-Mahalli, Beirut, Dar al-Kutub al-Ilmiyyah, 2009, juz 1, page 419).

According to Sheikh Muhammad bin Ahmad al-Ramli

Then, there is also Sheikh Muhammad bin Ahmad al-Ramli who emphasized the tradition of doing muraqqi, alias people who recite tarqiyyah readings. Apart from being a muezzin, a Bilal can also be called a muraqqi, right? At that time, Sheikh Muhammad bin Ahmad al-Ramli said that,

“So it can be seen that tarqiyyah is bid’ah but good bid’ah. In reading the holy verses of the Qur’an (which relates to the recommendation to read blessings) is a warning and motivation to read blessings on the Prophet this Friday which is recommended to increase the reading of blessings. The recitation of the hadith after the call to prayer and before the sermon reminds the mulatto to stay away from sayings that are forbidden or disallowed at this time (during the sermon) in accordance with the scholar’s attitude in this matter. And in fact the Messenger of Allah read the hadith while delivering his sermon on the pulpit “. (Shaykh Muhammad bin Ahmad al-Ramli, Fatawa al-Ramli Hamisy al-Fatawa al-Kubra, juz. 1, p. 276, Beirut-Dar al-Fikr, printed in 1983, without printed information).

According to Sheikh Sulaiman al-Jamal

Reporting from islam.nu , revealed that Sheikh Ibn Hajar was of the view that the tradition of the existence of a bilal or muraqqi could not be called heresy, even the existence of tarqiyyah readings was legally sunnah. This is because this tradition turns out to have evidence in the hadith, namely when he was carrying out the haj wada’ sermon. At that time, the Prophet Muhammad SAW had ordered one of his companions to give instructions to the congregation to listen carefully to the Prophet’s sermon. This view was quoted by Sheikh Sulaiman al-Jamal who emphasized that:

“Sykh Ibn Hajar said, I said, the argument for raising muraqqi from the sunnah of the Prophet is that the Messenger of Allah ordered someone to instruct people to be silent when he the Prophet was about to deliver the Mina sermon at Hajj wada’, this is the hallmark of a muraqqi, so the tarqiyyah tradition absolutely does not fall into the category of bid’ah.” (Syekh Sulaiman al-Jamal, Hasyiyah al-Jamal ‘ala Fath al-Wahhab, Beirut, Dar al-Fikr, undated, juz 2, page 35).

From some of the views of these experts, it was concluded that the tradition of reading tarqiyyah carried out by a Bilal must be preserved, because it is not something that is reprehensible. Therefore, there is no strong basis for prohibiting the implementation of this Bilal reading during the Eid al-Adha prayer.

How is Bilal’s reading in the implementation of the Eid al-Adha prayer?

In general, there are special procedures for the implementation of the Eid al-Adha prayer which are also accompanied by the reading of the Bilal, which are as follows:

1. When the imam arrives at the mosque, Bilal will immediately stand up to give a signal to the congregation that the Eid al-Adha prayer will begin soon, namely by reading:

2. The priest immediately goes to the priest’s place (mihrab), then immediately intends to pray Eid al-Adha accompanied by the reading of the takbiratul ihram. For an imam, the reading of the intention for the Eid al-Adha prayer is:

3. After reading the takbiratul ihram, immediately proceed with the iftitah prayer. Then, recite the takbir 7 times in the first cycle, then 5 times in the second cycle. After that, recite tasbih in between takbir, namely:

4. After finishing reciting the takbir 7 times, it is continued with the recitation of ta’awudz (reading to ask Him for protection from the devil’s disturbance). Then, the surah Al-Fatihah and the surahs that have been sunnah, usually the surah Qaf or Al A’la in the first rak’ah. While surah Al-Qamar or Al-Ghasyiyah in the second cycle.
5. After carrying out this Eid al-Adha prayer, Bilal must immediately stand up to give the signal for the start of the sermon. Followed by reading blessings while handing over the staff to the priest. The reading is as follows:

6. After that, the preacher headed to the pulpit to preach to the congregation.
7. Then, Bilal read the prayer first. The prayer reading is as follows:

8. After reading the prayer, the preacher greeted him and then sat down. Greetings are read as follows:

9. Then, Bilal has to say the takbir 3 times. The takbir reading is as follows:

10. Then, the preacher will carry out his first sermon. Then, when finished, the preacher will sit for a while. Followed by Bilal reading shalawat,

11. After reading the blessings, the preacher will continue his second sermon until it is finished.

The Wisdom of Performing Eid Al-Adha Prayers

Indirectly, the major events experienced by Prophet Ibrahim and Prophet Ismail are interpreted as religious symbolic messages, which certainly contain three things to learn, namely:

1. Piety

The meaning of “taqwa” is related to the obedience of a Servant to the Creator in an effort to carry out His commands and stay away from His prohibitions. In this case, Prophet Ibrahim had a high level of piety, because he still carried out His commands, even though it was to slaughter his own child. For the piety of Prophet Ibrahim, then Allah SWT replaced his son to be slaughtered with a lamb.

2. Social Aspect (Relations Between Humans)

In this case, it can be seen through the process of distributing sacrificial meat to the poor. Islam teaches us to continue to prioritize a sense of solidarity with fellow human beings. When fasting, we indirectly feel how difficult it is for a poor person to fill his stomach.

Then, when we give sacrificial animals to be slaughtered, the animal meat will later be distributed to the poor as a form of a Muslim’s social concern for others. This also shows that the hallmark of Islam is teaching to help one another.

3. Self Quality Improvement

In this case it relates to empathy, self-awareness, and self-control as the commendable morals of a Muslim.

Matters Concerning the Slaughter of Sacrificial Animals

1. It is prescribed for every family

In this case it refers to a hadith. Imam Ahmad, Abu Dawud and An-Nasa’i from the hadith of Mikhna bin Salim, that he heard the Prophet Muhammad SAW say: “O all people for all families in every year there must be a sacrifice (udhiyah).”

2. The Least Sacrifice Is a Goat

This is based on Al-Mahally’s hadith, namely “a camel and a cow are enough for seven people. Meanwhile, a goat is sufficient for one person.”

3. The time for slaughtering the sacrifice is after carrying out the Eid al-Adha prayer

This is based on the hadith of the Prophet Muhammad SAW which said: “Whoever slaughters before prayer, let him slaughter one more time instead, and whoever has not slaughtered until we finish praying, then slaughter with Bismillah.”

4. The Best Slaughter Is The Fattest

This is based on the hadith of Abu Rafi’ who said: “That the Prophet Muhammad, when making a sacrifice, he bought two fat gibas (goats).

5. Goat Age Must Be Less Than One Year

This is based on the hadith of Jabir in Muslim narrations, which says, The Prophet said: “Do not slaughter but a musinnah (a two-year-old goat) unless you are in trouble, then slaughter Jadzu (a one-year-old goat.)

6. Not Sufficient Apart from Ma’zun

Ma’zun is a type of goat that is less than two years old. This is based on the hadith of Abu Burdah in sahihain and others, who said: “O Messenger of Allah, I actually have ma’zun jadz’u cattle. Then he said: Slaughter it, and it is not permissible for anyone other than you…”

7. Sacrificial animals cannot be sick or disabled

In this case, the sacrificial animal cannot be blind in one direction, sick, lame, thin, so that half of its horns or ears are missing. Based on the hadith of Al-Barra who said, Rasulullah SAW said: “Four things that are not allowed in the sacrifice, (the sacrificial animal) is blind in one side that is clearly blind, sick that is clearly sick, lame that is clearly crooked and unable to walk, and that has no fat (thin)”.

8. Giving charity from Udhiyah, Eating and Storing the Meat

Based on the hadith of Aisyah RA “That the Prophet saw said Eat, save and give alms”

9. Slaughtering in the Mushalla

Precisely in the field used for Eid prayers, is the main thing. To show religious symbols, based on the hadith of Ibn Umar from the Prophet: That he slaughtered and sacrificed in the mosque. 

10. Owners of sacrificial animals are not allowed to cut their hair and nails

This prohibition was carried out precisely after the entry of 10 Dzulhijjah until the time he sacrificed. Based on the hadith of Umm Salamah, that RA said , “When you see the month of Dzul Hijjah and one of you wants to make a sacrifice, then he should refrain from his hair and nails.”

Source:

https://islam.nu.or.id/

Ta’mir Baitus Salam Mosque (http://tmbsalamjunwangi.wordpress.com/)

Also Read!

• Get to know the Implementation of Aqiqah Law and its Conditions
• What is Tahallul in Hajj and Umrah?
• Understanding and Procedures for Idain Prayer
• Difference Between Hajj and Umrah
• The History of Eid al-Adha and the Wisdom Behind the Sacrifice
• Intentions of Fasting Qadha and Procedures
• 7 recommended worship in the month of Ramadan

Ways to Preserve Nation’s Culture – The era of globalization can lead to changes in the lifestyle of a more modern society. As a result, people tend to choose a new culture that is considered more practical than the local culture. One of the factors causing local culture to be forgotten today is the lack of the next generation who have an interest in learning and inheriting their own culture.

According to Maliowski, a higher and active culture will influence a lower and passive culture through cultural contact. Malinowski’s theory is very visible in the shift in our cultural values ​​that lean toward the West. The era of information globalization has become a very powerful force in influencing the human mindset. To overcome this, awareness of the importance of local culture is needed as national identity.

It is an obligation for every layer of society to maintain it, that is, it is hoped that the younger generation will continue to try to inherit the local culture and will become a force for the existence of the local culture itself, even though it is being buffeted by globalization. How to preserve the culture of the Indonesian nation can be done in two ways. namely culture experience and culture knowledge .

Definition of Culture

Etymologically, the word culture or culture comes from the Latin, namely Colere which means to process or work on. The word culture in English can also be interpreted as culture in Indonesian and means culture.

Apart from etymology, several experts also expressed their opinions regarding the notion of culture. The following are the opinions of experts regarding the notion of culture.

1. E.B. Taylor

According to Taylor, culture is a complex thing that includes several things in it such as belief, art, law, morals, customs and abilities that can be acquired by humans as part of the community group.

Whatever is acquired by humans as members of society, in this case it is called abilities and habits, that is culture. Likewise knowledge, belief, art, morality, law, and custom, all of these enter into the notion of culture.

2. Selo Seomardjan and Sulaeman Sumardi

According to Selo and Soelaeman, culture is all the works, feelings and creations of society.

3. Ki Hadjar Dewantara

According to Ki Hajar Dewantara, culture is the fruit of the human mind that arises because of natural products and the nature of society. Culture, according to Ki Hajar Dewantara, is also a form of glory for a society that is able to overcome difficulties and become the beginning of the emergence of order in society.

4. Koentjaraningrat

Culture is the whole of the behavior of creatures like humans and the results that can be obtained by these creatures through various learning processes and systematically arranged in social life. There are three forms of culture, according to Koentjaraningrat, namely form as a complex of ideas, concepts and human thoughts; exist as a complex of activities; and exist as objects.

5. Parsudi Suparlan

Culture is defined as human knowledge as a characteristic of social beings that can be used to understand and interpret various things in the environment, thereby creating an experience. According to Parsudi Suparlan, culture is also a basis and reference for someone to behave.

6. Harjoso

Harjoso defines culture in seven important points, as follows.

• The culture that is owned by each is different from other regions.
• Culture has existed since time immemorial, and is maintained by being taught from generation to generation to the next generation.
• Culture has several components in it which consist of sociological, biological, and psychological human existence in various regions.
• Culture can be referred to as culture through certain ways and conditions.
• Culture has several biological aspects in it.
• Culture is dynamic.
• Besides being dynamic, culture is also relative and varies from one society to another.

That is the understanding of culture from the six experts. From the understanding of culture according to the six experts, it can be concluded that culture is a behavior possessed by humans as a characteristic of being a social being that can be used as a reference in behaving.

Types of Culture

Culture is divided into several types according to its nature, form, and scope of distribution. The following is an explanation of the types of culture.

1. Types of Culture Based on Their Nature

a. Subjective Culture

Subjective culture is a factor of values, feelings, and idealism which, when summed up, can be called an inner factor that exists in that culture.

b. Objective Culture

Objective culture is an external factor that comes from a culture and takes the form of techniques, social institutions, teaching, sound arts, fine arts, literary arts to ceremonies that use language.

2. Types of Culture Based on Its Form

a. Material Culture

This material culture refers to all human creations that are real and concrete, including findings produced by archaeological excavations such as weapons, jewelery to bowls made of clay. Material culture also includes other items apart from archaeological finds, such as airplanes, clothes, televisions, skyscrapers, sports stadiums to washing machines.

b. Immaterial Culture

This type of immaterial culture is an abstract creation and is passed down by its predecessors to the next generation. Examples include songs, traditional dances, fairy tales, and folklore.

3. Types of Culture Based on the Scope of Distribution

a. Regional Culture

Culture can be in the form of ways of behaving, patterns of thought to ways of acting from members of community groups who have that culture. Regional culture can be limited by the area’s administrative area or demographics. The demographic area becomes a local cultural boundary, but along with the development of the cultural area boundaries this area becomes unlimited as a result of the uneven distribution of the population.

b. Local Culture

Local culture depends on spatial aspects. This can be seen through the spaces in urban areas that are present as the local urban culture, or certain areas in urban areas that are influenced by the culture brought by migrants.

In local culture, there is also a dominant culture that develops, namely the original local culture in the city or area. Koentjaraningrat argues that local culture is related to groups of people who are bound by their awareness and identity of the original cultural unity in their place. In this case what is referred to as local culture is language as its trademark.

c. National Culture

National culture is the culture of the accumulation of cultures present in the regions. There are various forms of national culture and it can be seen in general if you pay close attention, that is, it can be seen that there is a large distribution that occurs between cultures in one area and another. However, it is this cultural diversity that makes a nation have its own identity.

In national culture, there are several distributions. Here’s an explanation.

• Traditional house, is a house that has its own characteristics and is generally found in each region. Each region has a traditional house with different characteristics and different meanings.
• The traditional ceremony is a tradition that is carried out from generation to generation in an orderly and orderly manner according to the customs of the local community. In the form of a series of activities as a form of expression of gratitude for something, in accordance with the public belief system. Traditional ceremonies have universal values, are sacred, have sacred religious values ​​and are carried out from generation to generation.
• Dances, each region has different traditional dances and will only be danced in special ceremonies or commemorations. An example of dance as the spread of national culture is the Ranup Lampuan dance in Aceh.
• Songs, Indonesia has many regional songs in their respective regional languages. Each regional song has its own meaning and message. Apart from that, every nation also has a national anthem which serves to increase the unity of the country.
• Music, traditional music is generally in the form of instruments using special musical instruments in the area. Examples include angklung in West Java or gamelan in Central Java.
• Traditional clothing, as well as the spread of other national cultures. Traditional clothing also has characteristics in areas that have traditional clothing and is only worn in special ceremonies. Traditional clothing is also influenced by religious factors in each area. Examples include kebaya in Java, ulos in North Sumatra, ulee balang in Aceh, cual cloth in Bangka Belitung.

Efforts in Preserving Indonesian Culture

Preservation as an activity or that is carried out continuously, directed and integrated in order to realize certain goals that reflect the existence of something that is permanent and eternal, dynamic, flexible and selective. Cultural preservation is an effort to maintain the values ​​of cultural arts, traditional values ​​by developing manifestations that are dynamic, flexible and selective, as well as adapting to situations and conditions that are always changing and developing.

Widjaja (1986) defines preservation as an activity or activity that is carried out continuously, directed and integrated in order to achieve certain goals that reflect the existence of something that is fixed and eternal, dynamic, flexible and selective.

How to preserve the culture of the Indonesian nation can be done in various ways. There are two ways that the community, especially as the younger generation, can do to support cultural preservation and help protect local culture, namely:

1. Culture Experience

Culture experience is cultural preservation that is carried out by going directly into cultural experience. For example, if the culture is in the form of a dance, people are encouraged to learn and practice in mastering the dance and it can be performed every year at certain events or held festivals. Thus, local culture can always be preserved.

2. Culture Knowledge

Culture knowledge is cultural preservation which is carried out by creating an information center about culture that can be functionalized in many forms. The aim is for education or for the benefit of developing the culture itself and regional tourism potential.

Thus, the younger generation can enrich their knowledge of their own culture. Apart from being preserved in these two forms, local culture can also be preserved by getting to know the culture itself. Thus, at least it can be anticipated cultural piracy carried out by other countries.

The problem that often occurs in society is that sometimes they don’t feel proud of their own product or culture. We are more proud of imported cultures that are not in accordance with the identity of the nation as Easterners. Local culture is starting to disappear with time because people, especially the younger generation, lack the awareness to preserve it.

As a result, we can only speak up when other countries are successful and famous for their culture that they take secretly. Therefore, the government’s role in preserving national culture is very important. However, the government has a very big role in efforts to preserve local culture in the country.

The government must implement policies that lead to efforts to preserve national culture. One government policy that deserves support is the appearance of regional cultures in every national activity, for example dances, folk songs, sarong performances, and so on.

More concretely, recently President Joko Widodo has required all of his staff to wear nationally important activities, such as the Indonesian Independence Day on August 17, every year wearing their respective traditional clothes based on their region of origin. This needs to be appreciated because it is one way to preserve the culture of the Indonesian nation.

All of this is done as an effort to introduce local culture to the younger generation that what is displayed is a legacy from their ancestors, not from a neighboring country. Likewise efforts through formal education channels.

Communities must understand and know the various kinds of culture they have. The government can also focus more attention on local cultural content education. Apart from the things mentioned above, there are still ways to preserve other local national cultures, namely:

• Improving the quality of human resources in advancing local culture.
• Encouraging the community to maximize the potential of local culture along with its empowerment and preservation.
• Trying to revive the spirit of tolerance, kinship, hospitality and high solidarity.
• Always maintain Indonesian culture so that it does not become extinct.
• Ensuring that the community is able to manage local cultural diversity.

Indonesian culture is a culture that only exists and is owned by the Indonesian nation itself. Each regional culture has its own characteristics. The Indonesian nation also has a very rich and diverse local culture. Therefore, as the next generation, we are obliged to protect it because the existence and resilience of local culture is in the younger generation, and not to be lulled or swayed by foreign cultures. This is because not all foreign cultures conform to the personality of the Indonesian nation, and many foreign cultures even have a negative impact.

As an archipelagic country, it must be difficult to maintain unity among the people. However, this can be minimized if we have the care and awareness to protect, study and preserve, so that the local culture which is very rich in Indonesia remains intact and does not become extinct, let alone being hijacked or stolen by other countries because culture is the identity of a nation and country.

So, that’s a brief explanation of how to preserve Indonesian culture. Local culture is an asset of the Indonesian nation that must get the main attention in the current era of globalization. National culture is an important part of the Indonesian state which can be developed and managed as well as possible. This is important so that it can function more broadly, not just the heritage or customs of the Indonesian people which are celebrated or carried out at the commemoration of the Youth Pledge or Heroes’ Day.

The following are recommendations for books from sinaumedia that Sinaumed’s can read to learn about Indonesian culture so they can fully understand it. Happy reading.

Find other interesting things at www.sinaumedia.com. sinaumedia as #FriendsWithoutLimits will always present interesting articles and recommendations for the best books for Sinaumed’s.

• Why are Norms Necessary in Society? Here’s the Explanation
• Understanding National Commitment and National Spirit
• Definition of Culture: Characteristics, Functions, Types, and Elements
• Definition of Consensus Deliberation, Accompanied by the Values ​​Contained in it
• Definition of Ethnicity: Formation, Concept, and Characteristics

How to Make Your Own Magnets with Simple Tools and Materials – Magnets are objects that have the ability to attract other objects around them. Magnets have magnetic properties that can attract other objects around them. A magnet is an object in which there is a magnetic field.

Magnet itself comes from the Greek, namely magnítis líthos which means Magnesian stone. The area contains magnetic stones, and Magnesia itself is an area in Greece in the past at this time called Manisa. The material on a magnet has a form in which there is a permanent magnet or a non-permanent magnet.

The magnets that we often encounter today are artificial magnets. Objects that can be attracted more strongly by a magnet, namely metal materials. Examples of objects that have high attractiveness are iron and steel, while materials that have low attractiveness are liquid oxygen.

Magnetic Properties

The appearance of a magnetic phenomenon in a nail or piece of iron that is attracted by an iron rod is one example of the nature of magnetism. The magnetic properties of this bar magnet are known as permanent magnets.

The nation that first used magnets was China by using magnets as a compass. The magnetic field is a vector quantity that has units of Tesla. The properties of the magnetic field around a magnet are that the direction of the magnetic field is the same as the direction of the lines of magnetic force and the magnitude of the magnetic field is proportional to the density of the lines of magnetic force.

Magnetic flux is the number of invisible lines of magnetic force surrounding a magnet. The strength of a magnetic field is determined by the flux field density or the number of lines per cm². If there are many lines of magnetic force, this can determine the strength of a magnetic field.

In a magnet, there are two opposite poles, namely the north pole and the south pole. If a magnet is cut into small pieces, the north pole and south pole will remain. There is compatibility with the geographic north pole of the earth, so that the name is given to the pole where the south pole leads to the geographic south pole of the earth while the north pole leads to the geographic north pole of the earth.

The properties of magnets include:

• Not all objects can be attracted by magnets, so magnets can only attract certain objects around them.
• Magnets have a magnetic force that is able to penetrate objects, which if the magnetic force is large then the magnetic force can penetrate thick objects.
• If there are two magnets that have different poles, and are brought closer to each other, they will attract each other.
• When poles of the same kind are brought closer to each other, they will repel each other.
• The magnetic field will form a magnetic force, which if an object is brought closer to the magnet, the magnetic force generated by the magnet will be greater and vice versa.
• If a magnet continues to fall and burn, then the magnetic properties can be reduced and even lost.

The following are the properties of the magnetic field based on the atoms, namely:

1. Ferromagnetic Material

Ferromagnetic materials can cause great induction, and these ferromagnetic materials are very easily affected by magnetic fields. Because ferromagnetic materials have a large atomic magnetic field resultant. The electrons present in a ferromagnetic material will generate an atomic magnetic field if given an external magnetic field. This material is easy to make permanent magnets.

Ferromagnetism can occur in materials with atoms having atomic magnetic moments in random directions about one another. The magnetic moments become regular and align in the presence of an external magnetic field. After the external magnetic field is removed, the magnetic moments on the atoms of the material will cancel each other to form a magnetic moment with a small amount.

Ferromagnetism is utilized in the material for making hard disks which contain magnetic discs. The ferromagnetic materials used are iron, cobalt, and nickel. The combination of cobalt and nickel results in a strong magnetic arrangement and a large anisotropic magnetic value. Cobalt Nickel produces a magnetic value of 6.69 x 10-24 J/atom with a Curie temperature value of 1388 Kelvin and a coercivity of 512 Oe at a material diameter of 550 nm. Meanwhile, nickel has a strong structure, a coercivity of 426 Oe at a material diameter of 750 nm, and is corrosion resistant. High anisotropy values ​​can be produced by alloying nickel with other metals.

2. Paramagnetic Materials

Paramagnetic materials cannot be made permanent magnets because they are affected by an external magnetic field. A small part of the material will resist if given an external magnetic field. Parametric materials can cause a large induction in a magnetic field, but the induction is smaller than ferromagnetic materials.

Paramagnetic materials are attracted by magnetic fields, and therefore have a relative magnetic permeability greater than unity (or, in other words, positive magnetic susceptibility). However, unlike ferromagnets which are also attracted by magnetic fields, paramagnets do not retain their magnetism when an external magnetic field is no longer applied.

3. Diamagnetic Material

Diamagnetic materials resist magnetism from the outside so they are difficult to be affected by an external magnetic field. A diamagnetic material will cause a small magnetic induction if a diamagnetic material is put into a magnetic field by a magnetic field.

Materials that are called diamagnetic are generally objects that are called non-magnetic, including water, wood, organic compounds such as petroleum and some types of plastics, and some metals such as copper, mercury, gold, and bismuth. Superconductors are an example of a perfect diamagnetic.

Types of Magnets

1. Fixed Magnets

A permanent magnet is a magnet whose magnetic properties remain unless it is subjected to significant external disturbances, for example heating to a high temperature or beating hard enough. Permanent magnets do not require external force or assistance to produce magnetic power (electromagnetic).

The types of permanent magnets known so far are found in:

• Neodymium magnets are the strongest permanent magnets. Neodymium magnets (also known as NdFeB, NIB, or Neo magnets), are a type of rare earth magnet, made of an alloy of neodymium metals.
• Samarium-cobalt magnets are one of two types of rare earth magnets. These magnets are strong permanent magnets made of an alloy of samarium and cobalt.
• Ceramic magnets are magnets whose manufacturing materials are composed of non-metallic inorganic compounds whose processing uses high temperatures. Its use is to make various technical design needs, especially in the fields of electricity, electronics, and mechanics by utilizing ceramic magnets as permanent magnets. This material can produce a magnetic field without having to be given an electric current flowing in a coil or selonoida to maintain its magnetic field.
• Plastic magnets are non-metallic magnets made from organic polymers. One example is PANiCNQ, which is a combination of emeraldine- and tetracyanoquinodimethane- based polyaniline .
• AlNiCo magnet is the earliest developed permanent magnet material, which is an alloy of aluminum, nickel, cobalt, iron and other trace metals. The Alnico permanent magnet material was developed in the 1930s. At that time, the best magnetic properties, temperature coefficient and small, so it is most widely used in permanent magnet motors. Since the 1960s, with the advent of ferrite magnets and rare earth permanent magnets, the application of AlNiCo magnets in electric motors has gradually been replaced and their proportion has decreased.

2. Non-Fixed Magnets

A non-fixed magnet is a magnet that appears only when it is given external influence. If the influence is given to the magnet, then the magnetic properties will be lost. For example, a nail that is wrapped around a wire is then given an electric current, then the nail will have magnetic properties. However, if the nail is not electrified, its magnetic properties will be lost.

Permanent (remanent) magnets depend on an electric field to produce a magnetic field. Examples of non-fixed magnets are:

• electromagnet.
• Induction magnets.
• Magnets stick.

3. Artificial Magnets

Artificial magnets cover almost all magnets that exist today. Forms of artificial magnets include:

• U magnets
• Horseshoe magnet.
• Bar magnets.
• Circle magnets.
• Needle magnet (compass).

How to Make Your Own Magnets

Today, magnets have a variety of shapes. There are magnets that are in the shape of needles, cylinders, rods, horseshoes or horseshoes, and rings. Usually the name of the magnet is adjusted to its shape. So how do you make a magnet? For those who are curious, continue to pay attention to the following article because it contains an explanation of how to make magnets in a simple way.

If grouped based on how they are made, magnets are divided into two, namely natural magnets and artificial magnets. Natural magnets are usually formed due to natural processes in nature, for example, earth magnets and magnesian stones which form naturally without human intervention. The artificial magnets are magnets that are made intentionally by humans for various needs. For example for electronic devices, dynamos, measuring devices, and so forth.

Homemade magnets come in many shapes, such as rods, tubes, u-shaped needles, and horseshoes or horseshoes, and each has its own purpose. In general, the magnets that are now widely used in everyday life are artificial magnets. Materials that can be used as artificial magnets are iron, steel, and a mixture of the two.

Quoted from the book Easy to Master Physics of Class 3 Middle School published by the Editors of Kawan Pustaka, there are three ways to make magnets, namely by touch, induction, or electro-magnetic. The following describes the three ways.

1. How to Make a Magnet with a Touch

The simplest way to make a magnet is to touch iron or steel with a bar magnet. Iron is the material that will be made into a magnet. While bar magnets are permanent or fixed magnets. There are two ways of touch that can be done.

First, a single touch, in which an iron bar is rubbed or touched with a permanent magnet from end to end. This scrubbing is done repeatedly. After each rubbing, the bar magnet is lifted high above the iron bar. The goal is that the magnetic properties of both do not weaken. This method has a weakness because the resulting magnetic power is not the same.

Second, the touch of the branch, namely the iron rod rubbed synchronously from the middle to the ends with two opposite magnetic poles. With this method, the resulting pole at the end of the rod is always opposite the pole that the magnet is rubbing against it. This method is better than the single touch method.

Tools and materials:

• One piece of iron or steel.
• One fixed magnet.

Work steps:

• Hold the magnet still, then rub the end of the magnet along the surface of the iron bar.
• Rub the iron with the magnet in one direction and do it repeatedly for about five minutes.
• Next, bring the iron closer to the needle. If the needle can be pulled, it means the iron has become magnetic.

To note, an iron bar rubbed with a fixed magnet for a few minutes will turn into a magnet.

2. How to Make Magnets by Induction

Making a magnet by means of induction is quite easy, namely by bringing an object closer to or attaching it to a magnet so that the object turns into a magnet. If a magnetic object is brought closer to a magnet, it will change its properties to become a magnet, but its nature is only temporary and its magnetism can be lost.

One example that can be done is to place an iron bar near a magnet. The iron will be able to attract iron filings, nails, or small pieces of iron or steel. This shows that the iron rod is magnetic. However, after the iron is further removed from the magnetic poles, the magnetic properties of iron are almost completely lost. The magnetism of an iron bar that is temporary as long as it is brought close to the magnetic poles is called induced magnetism.

Tools and materials:

• One strong magnet.
• One static.
• One iron ingot.
• A few small needles or nails.

Work steps:

• Place the iron rod on the stative in a vertical position.
• Place some needles under the iron bar.
• Place a strong magnet on top of the iron bar and clamp it firmly to prevent it from changing position.
• Observe the needle under the iron. If the needle is attached to an iron rod, it means that the iron has magnetic or magnetic properties.

3. How to Make a Magnet with Electromagnetic

You can also make a magnet by passing an electric current to a magnetic object, this electric current will create a magnetic field. Magnets that are formed due to an electric current are called electromagnetic. The magnetic properties of objects that carry an electric current are temporary. When the electric current is cut off, the magnetic properties of the object will be lost.

Making magnets with electromagnetism can be done by wrapping enameled wire or transformer wire on a magnetic material. Then the ends of the wire are connected to a source of electric current. If the electric current in the wire is strong enough, within a few moments the material has become a magnet.

If the magnetic material is made of steel, you will get a permanent magnet. However, if the magnetic material is made of iron, the magnetic properties will only exist when the wire is electrified. Making a magnet with an electric current is better than the touch or induction method. Therefore, the magnetic power obtained will be greater.

The advantages of electromagnetic magnets are as follows:

• Magnetism can be strengthened by increasing the number of turns.
• The strength of the magnet can be varied by changing the current strength.
• Its magnetic properties are only temporary, namely when current flows. If the current is cut, the magnetic properties will be lost.
• Both poles can be exchanged, that is by changing the direction of the current.
• The way to store it is also very easy, unlike storing permanent magnets.

Tools and materials:

• One iron nail with a length of 5 cm.
• Two batteries of any size (can be AAA, AA, C, or D).
• Coil wire or iron wire.
• Several needles.
• Scissors.

Work steps:

• Wrap the coil wire or iron wire around the iron nail.
• Peel the two ends of the coil cable or iron wire using scissors.
• Connect both ends of the cable to the positive and negative terminals of the battery.
• Bring the needles close to the iron nails that have been wound.
• Next, make observations. When it becomes a magnet, the iron nail will attract needles that are nearby.

Those are three ways to make simple magnets that you can try at home. I hope this information is helpful.

Book Recommendations & Related Articles

How to Make Letter Numbers – Letter numbering is something that cannot be overlooked in making letters, especially official letters or official letters to government or private agencies. The numbering of letters has certain rules and in each agency the rules are different.

In giving numbers, official letters or official letters are mandatory and require to have a letter number. Apart from being the main requirement, this letter number will also make it easier to categorize the type of letter. Then, what is the meaning of the letter number itself and how to make a letter number? Let’s see Sinaumed’s.

Meaning of Letter Number

The letter number is the composition of the serial number of writing, letter code, date, month and year of making the letter. The code on the letter number from each agency or institution that makes the letter will be different and the code that is made also has its own category according to the type of letter being made.

Giving letter numbers will make it easier to store or archive letters carried out by a letter-making institution. In writing, the letter number is often placed at the top left of the letter.

The writing of letter numbers must also be understood by people who are involved and play a role in correspondence matters. This is because the letter number must still be given even though the letter is in electronic form. Assigning a letter number to an official letter or official letter is separated from one code to another by using a slash (/).

So, from each component of the existing letter number, a slash mark is separated. This is so that reading the code or letter components can be easily done.

Then, is it important to number the letters? Of course it is very important, this is because the numbering of official letters has the main function of knowing the type of letter and making it easier for the archives section to archive letters and making it easy to sort out the number of outgoing letters.

In addition, the code on the letter number also determines the type of letter that has been issued. This will make it easier for the recipient of the letter to know what letter was received and what to do in the letter. So, from the letter number in making official letters or official letters it is mandatory and becomes the main thing in correspondence.

Letter Numbering Rules

In making official letters, there are several numbering rules that are commonly used. Letter numbers cannot be placed in arbitrary positions. Generally, the letter number is written in the top left position, just below the letter head.

In addition to positions that cannot be arbitrary, the codes that are entered also have their own rules. Usually, in making official or official letters, the format of the letter number includes the letter type code, serial number, name of the institution, the month sequence written in Roman numerals and the year it was implemented.

Official Letter Function

Before making a letter number on an official letter or official letter, there are several functions of an official letter that you need to know, including:

1. Official letters have the main function, namely as a means of information or notification regarding special matters conveyed by one party to another party.
2. The function of an official letter can also be in the form of written evidence in the form of a document where the contents must be accounted for.
3. Official letters function as work guidelines in carrying out an activity where the official letter contains work steps for certain purposes.
4. Another function of an official letter is as a tool for reminding the recipient of the letter, be it an individual, organization or institution.
5. Official letters also function as historical evidence and chronological evidence if needed at any time.

Characteristics of Official Letters

To distinguish official letters from other public letters, you need to know the characteristics of official letters. The following are the characteristics of a formal letter:

1. Using standard language in accordance with the rules of the Indonesian language and Enhanced Spelling (EYD).
2. Made in short, concise and effective language and easy to understand the context.
3. Official letters do not use implicit language, but explicit language.
4. Attached with letterhead mentioning the party issuing the official letter.
5. In official letters, the letter number is always included regarding the date, destination address and attachments if available.
6. A special stamp or stamp is affixed for certain conditions.

Letter Number Generation Function

The functions for making letter numbers are:

1. To facilitate management, both for storage and retrieval if needed.
2. To find out the number of letters received and issued by organizations, institutions or companies and make it easier to classify letters based on their contents.
3. To make it easier for the secretary to continue numbering for the next letter to be made.
4. Become a reference in future correspondence or also in the stages of developing the next offer communication.

How to Make a Letter Number

Here are some ways to make letter numbers that need attention.

1. Understand the Components of a Letter Number

If Sinaumed’s see the letter numbers themselves are usually separated by an italic sign (/). It turns out that each number and letter separated by this sign has a different meaning. So, we need to know what are the components in writing the number of the letter itself.

In general, the letter number consists of:

• mail code,
• Issued order number,
• The name of the institution that issued the letter,
• Current month, the current month is written with roman numerals,
• Current year.

In writing the number of this official letter, the five components must be listed and separated by a slash (/).

2. Outgoing Mail Numbering Format

After knowing the components in the letter number, then what must be considered is the outgoing letter numbering format where this number becomes the code for conveying information about the type of letter issued.

Here’s how to write the outgoing letter numbering format along with the letter number code:

1. Decree (SK) : 01.
2. Letter of Invitation (SU): 02.
3. Application Letter (SPm) : 03.
4. Notification Letter (SPb) : 04.
5. Loan Letter (SPp): 05.
6. Statement Letter (SPn) : 06.
7. Mandate Letter (SM): 07.
8. Letter of Assignment (ST) : 08.
9. Certificate (Sket) : 09.
10. Letter of Recommendation (SR): 10.
11. Reply Letter (SB): 11.
12. Official Travel Order (SPPD) : 12.
13. Certificate (SRT): 13.
14. Work Agreement (PK): 14.
15. Cover Letter (SPeng) : 15.

That is, in writing Sinaumed’s numbers, you must follow the codes above for each type of letter. For example, the number 01 is the number for the decision information letter, this letter code is placed at the very beginning after “Number :… (insert letter code)”.

3. Examples of appropriate letter writing

To make it easier to understand again, for writing the official letter number and its description as follows:

For example:

Number : 01.004/ SMA-SM/V/2018

Then it will be divided into examples of letter components one by one in the form of a description as follows:

• 01: Code number of outgoing mail, 01 is the type of decision letter.
• 004 : The serial number of the letter issued, 004, then this letter is the fourth letter issued.
• SMA – SM: The profile name of the institution that issued the letter, for example SMA Suka Maju.
• V : Current month in roman numerals.
• 2018 : Current year.

Furthermore, what Sinaumed’s needs to know is how to place numbers in official letters. The letter number is written at the beginning of the letter parallel to the bottom with writing attachments and letter pages.

Example :

Number: 01.003/SMA-SM/V/2018
Attachment: –
Regarding: Decision of the OSIS Board Members for the 2018/2019 Period

The explanation above is an example of how to write a common letter number. Meanwhile, for daily purposes, writing numbers can be adjusted to the needs of the agency that makes the letter. In addition, don’t be surprised if later you find writing numbers that are different from the methods discussed above.

In writing letters from certain institutions, the recipient code is usually included, whether the recipient is internal or external to the institution. The recipient code is written in the order of the serial number of the letter, the recipient code at the internal or external part of the letter making institution, the subject code and the current year.

4. Example of Writing Order Number and Assignment Letter

Order numbering arrangement and Assignment Letter as follows:

• Manuscript number (order number in one calendar year);
• Signatory position code;
• Month, written in two digits;
• Publication Year.

Example 1 :

WARRANT
NUMBER 09/D-IV/02/2012

09 : Serial number of Order in one calendar or calendar year.
D-IV : Position code for Deputy of Administration.
02 : Month 2 (February)
2012 : Year 2012

Example 2 :

ASSIGNMENT LETTER
NUMBER 08/D-IV/11/2012

08 : Serial number of Assignment Letters in one calendar or calendar year.
D-IV : Position code for Deputy of Administration.
11 : 11th month (November).
2012 : 2012.

5. Number of Official Letters Signed by Officials under the Minister/Agency Head

Service Letters signed by officials under the leadership of the agency consist of:

• Official letter security degree code;
• Manuscript number, serial number in one calendar year;
• Agency abbreviations or acronyms;
• Abbreviation or acronym of the initiator’s organizational unit/work unit;
• Archive classification code;
• Month;
• Publication Year.

Filing of Letters Based on Classification Codes

1. Classification in a ministry or government is a classification that is arranged based on problems, reflecting the functions and activities of carrying out the tasks of all organizational units within the ministries and local governments, namely carrying out some general government and development tasks in the fields of general administration and regional autonomy, ideology, politics, development village and agrarian, coded with Arabic numerals, specified in decimal using three base levels, accompanied by sub-codes, area codes and abbreviated component names.
2. The classification pattern is arranged in stages by using the principle of development from general to specific in problem relationships, preceded by 3 basic details for each of the first, second and activity details as a basic pattern that serves as a bridge helper in finding the problem code listed in the classification pattern.
3. In accordance with the decimal nature of the archives, they are grouped into 10 main issues, coded 000 to 900. Out of these 10 main issues, substantive (main) tasks and facilitative (support) tasks are first distinguished. The numbers 100 to 600 are codes for substantive tasks, while the numbers 000, 700, 800 and 900 are codes for facilitative tasks. Code 000 accommodates facilitative issues outside of supervision, personnel and financial matters. In addition, household-related issues are also accommodated, such as internal affairs and issues that cannot be included in other groups such as official travel, equipment, state or regional symbols, honors and so on.
4. Thus, the 10 main issues have accommodated all the activities of carrying out the duties of the Ministry, including agencies within their environment.

The ten problems are as follows:

• 000 General
• 100 Government
• 200 Politics
• 300 Security and Order
• 400 Welfare
• 500 Economy
• 600 Public Works and Employment
• 700 Surveillance
• 800 Staffing
• 900 Finance

Tool code to recognize the problems contained in the mail archive and as a tool to determine where the archive is located in the order of the relationship of the problem to the composition of all archives in the deposit.

This code also indicates the existence of a systematic sequence of archive and control card issues in the file. Helper code is a form of representation of a particular problem which is an aspect that always arises in relation to other problems, plus each code requires further detailing to give the archive an extra dimension.

The auxiliary code in question is:

• 01 Planning
• 02 Research
• 03 Education
• 04 Reports
• 05 Committee
• 06 Seminars, Workshops, Workshops
• 07 Statistics
• 08 Legislation
• 09 Not used

Region code to indicate the division of the region. With due observance of the principles, the area code referred to is structured as follows:

• 11: Nanggroe Aceh Darussalam;
• 12: North Sumatra;
• 13: West Sumatra;
• 14: Riau;
• 15: Jambi;
• 16: South Sumatra;
• 17: Bengkulu;
• 18: Lampung;
• 19: Bangka Belitung Islands;
• 21: Riau Archipelago;
• 31: DKI Jakarta;
• 32: West Java;
• 33: Central Java;
• 34: Special Region of Yogyakarta;
• 35: East Java;
• 36: Banten;
• 51: Bali;
• 52: West Nusa Tenggara;
• 53: East Nusa Tenggara;
• 61: West Kalimantan;
• 62: Central Kalimantan;
• 63: South Kalimantan;
• 64: East Kalimantan;
• 71: North Sulawesi;
• 72: Central Sulawesi;
• 73: South Sulawesi;
• 74: Southeast Sulawesi;
• 75: Gorontalo;
• 76: West Sulawesi;
• 81: Moluccas;
• 82: North Maluku;
• 91: New Guinea;
• 92: West Papua.

Region codes for provinces can form their own area codes for regencies/cities in their territory, while regencies/cities can form separate area codes for their sub-districts.

To find out the component that handles the problem, an abbreviation of the component name is needed as follows:

• SJ : Secretary General;
• IJ : Inspectorate General;
• KESBANGPOL : Directorate GENERAL of National Unity and Politics;
• OTDA : Directorate General of Regional Autonomy;
• PUM : Directorate General of Public Administration;
• BANGDA: Directorate General of Regional Development;
• PMD : Directorate General of Village Community Development;
• DUKCAPIL : Directorate General of Population and Civil Registration;
• KEUDA : Directorate General of Regional Finance;
• TRAINING: Education and Training Agency;
• R&D : Research and Development Agency

In order to find out the Regional Work Unit that handles the problem, it is necessary to have the abbreviation for the name of the Regional Work Unit which can be set independently in accordance with applicable regulations.

That’s the understanding, the rules and how to make letter numbers, Sinaumed’s. Hopefully all the discussion above is useful and can add to your insight.

If Sinaumed’s is still confused, and needs references related to the meaning, rules and how to make a complete letter number, you can visit the sinaumedia book collection at sinaumedia.com .

How to Make Conclusions According to Good and Right Rules – For those who are currently working in the world of education, the word conclusion will be familiar in every paper they write. Whether it’s papers, scientific papers, scientific articles, theses, and others, their existence is important given their vital function. However, there are not a few people who do not know how to make conclusions according to existing rules. So that sometimes the results of the work we write actually raises a lot of questions in the conclusion section because we don’t know how. It is in this section that the author should state the essence of what he has produced so that it adds to the understanding of anyone who sees it.

The conclusions we write at the end of a paper explain the whole or essence of an idea or research. This section will usually attract the reader’s attention because it contains a final discussion that is useful for increasing their knowledge. A writer must pay attention to this section, not only focus on prioritizing the beginning or introduction and content. Before knowing how to make good and correct conclusions, we need to understand the meaning of conclusions?

Definition of Conclusion

In KBBI (Big Indonesian Dictionary), conclusions are decisions taken from ways of thinking both deductively and inductively from an idea or discussion. The general definition of a conclusion is a brief statement taken from an analysis, discussion of a story, or the results of a conversation. The conclusion is the most important part in a work because it contains all the discussions in a short, concise, and clear manner that creates a good impression on the reader. With this, the reader will understand more deeply than what he read which can be found at the end.

Many writers have difficulty in making a conclusion, they usually find it difficult to determine or choose something interesting to serve as a climax. Especially if the results of the writing are research, the conclusions can provide answers to questions in the early part of the research. Usually one or two paragraphs are enough to provide an overview of research results as in thesis writing. But for some results, more than two paragraphs will be needed to explain how the final result will be described. So, how to make conclusions is an inseparable part of a writer.

 

Characteristics of a Good and Right Conclusion

How to determine a conclusion is not so difficult to find because there are several characteristics that describe a section. To know how to make a conclusion, first understand the characteristics of a sentence that shows a conclusion. The characteristics of the conclusions are as follows.

1. Simple, Short, and Clear

The first characteristics are that the conclusion must be simple, brief, and clear. In it, it summarizes some of the ideas or statements that were previously presented in the contents section. It is important not to elaborate on new ideas that were not conveyed in the previous sections so as not to create the impression of multiple interpretations.

2. Messages Can Be Delivered

In a text, there must be information or messages to be conveyed in order to increase the knowledge of those who enjoy it. Likewise with the conclusion, it must contain certain information or messages addressed to the reader.

3. Contains the essence of the writing

The essence is a summary whose content is the same as what has been explained, but uses its own language that has been developed. Even though it’s concise, don’t let any part not be listed because the conclusion must contain the entire contents of the text or reading.

4. Starting from Special Things Become General Things

The meaning of the special becomes general, that is, mention things that are characteristic of a concept in a few explanatory sentences. After that, at the end of the sentence, arrange sentences that include all of these characteristics in one general sentence.

5. Using Standard Vocabulary

The conclusion must contain standard vocabulary, avoid using phrases outside the Indonesian spelling guidelines. Don’t use terms that most people don’t know because they will raise contextual questions that may not be contained in the conclusion.

6. Can join the main sentence

The conclusion can be found at the end of the sentence, but usually it will relate to the main sentence in a paragraph. To determine the core, then combine the main sentence with the final sentence of the paragraph to form a conclusion.

7. Can be a causal relationship or a causal effect

The causal relationship in a paragraph can be the key to getting a conclusion from the reading text. When one knows which causal relationships occur in it, one will have no trouble finding the core of the problem being discussed.

8. Made based on Key Words in Explanatory Sentences and Main Ideas

Conclusions must be built based on the main ideas in each paragraph. In addition, keywords in the explanatory sentence must also be included so that they can cover the contents of the entire section into a unified whole. Authors can use paraphrasing techniques or use their own sentences as long as the meaning does not change.

How to Make Conclusions

There are a number of ways that can be used as a guide in writing a conclusion at the end of the article. Guidance regarding making conclusions can be seen through the explanation below.

1. Re-read the Text

The first is to understand correctly what has been written by re-reading the contents of the text to make it easier to draw a conclusion. If you don’t understand the contents one time reading, then a writer must read it again until you really understand it.

2. Record the Main Idea in the Text

Find the main idea in the text or writing that has been compiled in the form of ideas or main ideas that are the focus of the writing. This is useful so that researchers can explain the conclusions of the writing and the message that will be conveyed to the reader.

3. Not Using Repeated Words

The conclusion essentially contains sentences that are basically the same as what was stated at the beginning. But in this section the writing is presented in a different language, not the result of a copy of what has been written. Avoid rewriting with previous discussions by using language developed or paraphrased while still conveying the main topic of the writing.

4. Use the Inference Technique

For a writer, there are many techniques that can be used as a way to make conclusions on the results of his writing. The method that can be used as a way of making conclusions is as follows.

a. Deduction Method

According to the origin of the word, the deduction method is a way of making conclusions by explaining the problem at the beginning and then making a summary of what has been described. The next step is to connect the data or facts that have been obtained with the core of the problem that will be sought to get an overview. Then explain the meaning and consequences of these conclusions both theoretically and practically so that they can attract readers to explore them as well. That way the results of our writing can contribute to being developed by others into even more interesting writing results.

b. Analogy Method

This method is carried out by providing ideas, views, or conveying the subject of research to make it simpler and easier to understand. This method is widely used in making scientific conclusions such as in writing a thesis or in certain research.

c. Correlation Method

Judging from the origin of the word, correlation means relationship which means connecting a concept with other concepts so that it becomes more cohesive in a study. The first step is to describe the topics that have been discussed in the initial section and look for causal relationships that occur between the two. This method is used with the intention of reaffirming the ideas in the earlier sections that have been described previously.

5. Write Opinions Regarding Existing Problems

In writing a conclusion, an author is allowed to write a personal opinion on the findings or facts obtained by an author. However, keep in mind that this opinion must strengthen existing data so that it does not give birth to a new concept that is different from before. In several scientific papers, this final section can be compiled based on research data or based on certain references. Avoid opinions that deviate from the content in the discussion which makes the weight of the writing decrease and cannot be used as a reference for readers.

6. Reveal Limitations

In a study, it is not uncommon for researchers to find several things that make their research not run optimally as previously expected. These things that are commonly found in research are referred to as limitations. Some limitations that cause a study to not be optimal, such as the use of inadequate theory, unsuitable research methods, and so on. The researcher should write down the limitations he found during the research in the conclusion section as a reference for future researchers who will investigate similar matters. The goal is of course one, so that it can be further developed in the future or can further expand the results of the research compared to previous findings.

7. Place yourself as a reader

The end result of a writer’s work is the reader, because they are the ones who will enjoy what has been written, not themselves. The results of the writing are not media vent like in a diary, so think about what the reader can do after reading the conclusion. Position yourself as a reader so that you can draw a point that can motivate you to read the entire text.

How to make the right conclusions for the writer is needed because there are still some mistakes in making conclusions that are experienced by many people. Some mistakes that are still made by the author are as follows.

1. Using long-winded language

The use of language that is not brief and seems long-winded will make the end of the writing unable to express a clear general picture. Precisely this will make the audience wonder what kind of essence the author wants to convey. Finally, people’s interest in reading it decreases because they cannot catch the intent that the author describes.

2. Presenting ideas that are not explained in the content

The author’s second mistake is usually to present new ideas beyond the results of the writing in the contents section. If you want to explain new ideas in writing, it’s best to make one or two paragraphs that build on the contents. Such errors will usually make the reader feel confused about determining the essence after reading the conclusion.

3. Write down the data in the form of statistical results

Some people are still stuck with the use of data, especially the results of thesis research which present statistical results at the end of their writing. The results of data processing should not be presented in the conclusion section, because they are located in the contents section. It would be better if the conclusion at the end contains a summary of the entire content as stated in the previous paragraphs.

Related Book Recommendations

 

Example Conclusion

The following is an example of how to draw conclusions based on the rules described in this article to provide a clearer picture. Examples can be seen in the following cases.

“Based on the results of research by several researchers, it was concluded that the corona virus is a new epidemic that is categorized as very dangerous because it can cause severe illness. Even people who have congenital diseases (comorbid) and are exposed to this virus, will further exacerbate their condition and become the cause of mass deaths. It is believed that this virus first appeared in China at the end of 2019 because so many people in Wuhan City suddenly became sick. The cause of the emergence of this virus still needs to be studied in more depth, but it is believed that it originated from the seafood market and the consumption of certain animals. Governments around the world are moving quickly to anticipate the further spread of this virus by making various policies and strict health protocols.

From the reading text above, the conclusion is at the beginning of the paragraph indicated by the concluded sentence. If you find words such as concluded, thus, therefore in the reading sentence, then you can be sure it is a concluding sentence.

The second example of how to draw conclusions from a paragraph can be seen in the example below.

“The event to commemorate the Republic of Indonesia’s Independence Day this year went lively even though the pandemic situation had not ended. Various competitions can still be held even though they have to comply with health protocols as regulated by health authorities and also the government.

Some of these competitions include tug of war, but the tug of war organized by several parties is different from the tug of war in the pre-pandemic situation. They take advantage of technological sophistication and progress to be used as a tug-of-war media, namely by using certain applications such as voting on Instagram. The trick is to pit the power of voting support between the two groups to be contested in several rounds so that later the superior party will qualify for the next stage. Thus, the spirit of nationalism and nationalism of Indonesian citizens can be maintained and a sense of unity can be preserved.”

The main sentence is located at the beginning of the paragraph which states that the event to commemorate Indonesia’s independence day can run lively even though the pandemic is not over. The final part of the paragraph is that in this way, the spirit of nationalism and nationalism is maintained and a sense of unity can be preserved. So it can be concluded as follows:

“This year’s commemoration of the Independence Day of the Republic of Indonesia can run lively even though the pandemic is not over yet, through a virtual tug-of-war competition that can maintain the spirit of nationalism and nationalism of Indonesian citizens.” This kind of conclusion technique is done by combining the main sentence with the sentence at the end of the paragraph.

How to make conclusions is important because it presents a review or essence of a work, be it writing or speaking. Don’t think that without a conclusion, someone’s work can still be judged well by those who read it. It is precisely in this section that the quality of the work can be seen and can move the reader to think or explore deeper.

Book Recommendations & Related Articles

 

How to Make a Book Review – Can Sinaumed’s make a book review? If not, Sinaumed’s needs to understand the steps for making a review to make it easier to write. Almost the same as other texts, review text also has a structure, elements, goals, and benefits.

If Sinaumed’s wants to know and master the steps for making a review, then he needs to know that. The following is an explanation of the reviewer starting from the meaning, elements, purpose, benefits, steps for making a review to examples of his writing: 

What is a Book Review?

A review is a written work that contains a review of a book that is judged, weighed, looked back, checked, scrutinized, reviewed a written work in a book. In practice, reviewers do not judge books only, but there are also film, music, drama, exhibition, and work reviews in other forms. In a review, there is a process of scrutinizing, analyzing to produce an assessment which will then be commented on from the work. 

In the process of carrying out the steps for making a review, Sinaumed’s needs to pay attention to the elements that must be present in a review such as the following:

1. Elements of the Review

• Review Title
• Book Identity
• Book Overview
• Authorship
• The strengths and weaknesses of the book
• Conclusion

2. Purpose of the Review

• Can provide information about the book to the reader
• Can give reasons as material for consideration of readers of a book
• Can answer readers’ questions about the book being reviewed
• Shows information that can be used as a reference whether the book is worth reading or not
• Can promote the book to the right readers 

3. Reviewer Benefits

• As a consideration for prospective readers in choosing the book they will read
• It can bring economic value to the reviewer, for example, the book review can be published in the mass media, both print and online
• As a book promotion for authors and publishers

How to Make a Book Review

After Sinaumed’s knows about the form of a book review, it’s time to make one. Here are the steps for making a book review that Sinaumed’s can do 

1. The first step in making a review is to determine which book to review, which is a non-fiction book or a type of fiction. Although basically the writing of the review is the same, there is a slight difference in the chronological part of the story. 
2. After finding a book to review, the next step in making a review is to read the book from beginning to end. After reading the book, Sinaumed’s will get an overview of the contents of the book and be able to analyze it into a review in the form of an assessment or comment relating to a particular topic. 
3. Next, Sinaumed’s needs to choose a review writing technique, such as cutting and glueing techniques, focusing techniques, and comparing techniques, each of which has its own style. This writing technique also needs Sinaumed’s to adjust to the review form that Sinaumed’s will make. This is because technique greatly influences Sinaumed’s in making reviews. 
4. In a work or review, Sinaumed’s must write based on the elements of the review mentioned above. The elements of the review become the characteristics or characteristics of the text that will be understood by the reader as a review writing that reviews books.
5. After the writing is finished, the step to make a review that is no less important is to re-read it. There are still many people who underestimate or do not re-read the writing that he has finished making. Even though this section is important as a form of self-editing before the writing is published and reaches the readers. Even though in practice the manuscript will still fall into the hands of the editor, the writer still needs to read and re-check the writing whether it is in accordance with its original purpose and can be said to be finished or not. 

Example of a book review

After knowing the steps for making a review above, Sinaumed’s can look at the following review writing examples which review fiction book reviews that are popular among readers and are analytical in nature. Sinaumed’s can use the book review example below as a reference when making a book review.  

The Fate of Books and their Addicts

Title : Paper House
Author     : Carlos Maria Dominguez
Print : September 2016
Publisher : Left Margin, Tangerang
Bold : vi + 76 pp, 12 x 19 cm
ISBN : 978-979-1260-62-6

Books become inanimate objects that appeal to those who like to read. The likes diction in question is a hobby because reading becomes a fun activity, so that it becomes a routine or habit. So what about those who do not like to read? Books are just inanimate objects that are not at all tempting to read, even reluctant to touch.

Carlos Maria Dominguez in Paper House succeeded in presenting book-crazed characters. No longer ‘like’ but already addicted to books. From Bluma Lennon, Carlos Barauer, Delgado. It is through the character Aku that the three book addicts become very interesting to find their connection to.

Sure enough, whether it’s Bluma, Baruer, or Delgado, books are like life to them. “Bluma devoted her life to literature, without ever imagining that literature would take her away from the world” (p. 2). Bluma died after being hit by a car at the first street corner while walking through poetry and carrying Emily Dickinson’s work. His death was because of the book.

Book Enthusiast

By Delgado, I was shown a madness that he really saw from an inanimate object called the book. Glass-covered shelves along the walls, from floor to ceiling, were filled with books. From the rooms he found identical shelves, crammed with collections of books, carousels in the corridors for storing thick dictionaries, books in the bathroom, maid’s room, kitchen and back rooms. 

“Building a library is creating life. Libraries are never just random collections of books” (p. 26). Delgado told me. For Delgado, the library is a door into time.

Unlike Delgado. Brauer has a distinct way of devouring books and nurturing them. Delgado told Aku of his mistake in Barauer’s attitude towards the important books he had. There are hundreds, even thousands of books owned by Brauer. He was controlled by his passion in collecting books. He became more like a conqueror who had no shame at auction.  

The Fate of Books

It is now a common sight to see books used as props for a table; it was even used for a lamp table, piled up like a tower and then put a tablecloth on top; dictionaries were used more for pressing and straightening things than they were for leafing through, and many books were used for keeping papers, money, and secrets hidden on shelves. People seem to be able to change the fate of books too.

Smartphones, laptops, Ipads and televisions break much more often than books. a book does not fall to pieces unless its owner so wishes, by tearing the pages, or burning them. 

The relationship that humans have with durable objects that can last one, two, even twenty centuries, and thereby defeat the grains of sand of time, has never been innocent. The vocation of human life becomes attached to the indestructible grains of this soft wood. (pg 58) 

It’s a hard ending to the story after Carlos Maria Dominguez builds the storyline. Where a book enthusiast creates the fate of his book to really accompany him to live in solitude. Even a book addict would treat his favorite object that way. 

To become a book collector, Brauer’s character teaches us to become book addicts too. Not solely buying it desperately to own but only for display, just to waste money. Even to explore the book alone was reluctant first. Then why is it displayed neatly, beautifully and systematically if only to be seen. It’s better to just tear it or burn it so it doesn’t take up room space.

Don’t make books a path to futility. Albert Camus even gave a statement that the most terrible punishment for them is for those who do nothing, do useless and hopeless work. So, let’s collect books and get addicted to books!

Freedom in Imagination

Title: JRENG, Putu Wijaya’s short story collection

Author      : Putu Wijaya

Print : January, 2018

Publisher: BASABASI

Bold: 416 pages; 14 x 20 cm

ISBN : 978-602-6651-25-9

“Freedom, do you think independence is enjoyable? Do you think Merdeka is free from all bad luck? Do you think Freedom means you’ll suddenly be rich and happy? You are an idiot. Freedom is a burden.” Matter. 85

The euphoria of independence is still felt today. Attributes such as red and white flags, colorful flags, banners, even twinkling lights are still intact on the side of the road. But whether the solemnity of the spirit of independence is truly euphoric or not in a person who considers himself as independent as Indonesia. This is it, is the euphoria that we have witnessed, really as free as independence?

Independence is not as funny as a sack race. Independence is not as simple as a cracker eating contest. Independence is also not as easy as shouting “MERDEKA” on the stage in front of the mic. That is the face of independence which we always repeat on 17 August. We believe that the aspirations of the sovereign from colonial hands have been successful, achieved, achieved. That’s a great suggestion someone. But that is how Indonesians interpret the independence of their country, including their confidence that they are completely independent.

Storytelling Awareness

Through this collection of Putu Wijaya’s short stories, the face of Indonesia is shown in words. Jreng, with thirty-seven short stories, fully reveals the depravity of Indonesia behind its independence. Putu Wijaya succeeded in exposing Indonesia without patronizing. All that neat in his fat data words. This means that even though Putu Wijaya’s writing was packaged in the form of a short story (fiction), it succeeded in bringing the reader to truly become Indonesian. Indonesia’s independence.

After all, Putu Wijaya is a native Indonesian writer who has the advantage of turning the factual events around him into fictional events. This is what I mean by independent imagination. I remember Sartre’s words that Imagination is an awareness. That’s what Putu Wijaya did. He was aware of what was around him. It was this fact that built Putu Wijaya’s imagination to produce twenty short stories. Twenty short stories specifically cover Indonesia. Putu Wijaya realized all of these things from a country called Indonesia. Everything that is in it, the people, officials, religion, economy, law.

Image is the way in which an object appears to itself in consciousness, or a way in which consciousness presents an object to consciousness itself. Images appear spontaneously independent of will. It doesn’t just appear as an abstract fantasy. Actually imagination has a strong foundation of content awareness to form something. Putu Wijaya’s foundation in each of his short stories is so strong, that this Balinese-born writer is so good at creating intriguing plots. Reading Putu Wijaya’s short stories is like exploring the Indonesian nation and its humanity which is full of problems. Interestingly, the problems and tragedies are told in a humorous or comedic tone that keeps the reader entertained at the same time.

Stories About Freedom

In one of his short stories entitled Merdeka, Putu Wijaya is so striking about the meaning of independence for his country. Merdeka, which is also used as a character in the story, is so full of meaning in conveying criticism with satire. Merdeka is a child who was born in a small town. His father was a former freedom fighter.

“You are my hope, my future, and heir. I give you the name Merdeka and become Kusuma Nation. Write a history that is different from what I have experienced in the past. Free yourself from all kinds of colonialism, don’t be like your father. Free this country from poverty. Free the people from the misery caused by the tyranny of their own leaders. Be the future for all of us!” matter. 73

Through the figure of Merdeka, the writer who is also the founder and leader of the Mandiri Theatre, succeeded in overturning the fact that his father’s belief in Merdeka actually happened. This kind of flow actually makes his short stories even more interesting. The reader seems to be convinced by the firmness of Merdeka, which has had an independent spirit since birth, but in fact it is still not independent. The figure of speech used is unexpected at the beginning of the story. All like a surprise that makes the reader shake his head. 

In addition to the story of the Merdeka figure, Putu Wijaya tells a lot about Indonesian data which is difficult to explain scientifically. For example, the tempeh patent has been stolen, the people are used as a show as keepers of tradition, but the tourism and cultural industries extract abundant profits, teachers who lie to their students and a few other stories about the fate of truth. 

It is from the ruins of Putu Wijaya’s story that I dare to say that we experienced independence which is still in our imagination. Don’t worry, it is imagination that will deliver true independence. It’s just that this moment of independence awakens our imagination that we have been reminded by August 17 and all the processions and attributes of independence that we are still alive and still need to improve on our previous lives. It is this moment of independence that becomes a bridge to strengthen our sense of nationalism. Diluting racism, disguising greed, and obscuring interests. All of that is only for independence, at least freedom as a human being, both morally and ethically. 

Book Recommendations & Related Articles

So, that’s an explanation of the review, starting from the definition, elements, purpose, benefits, steps for making a review to examples of writing. Can Sinaumed’s make a review yet? Basically, when writing a review text, there is no patent requirement in which style one should write. However, Sinaumed’s needs to know the basic concept of review text so that it can reach the reader’s hands optimally. Judging from the goals and benefits, the reviewer has an important role in the presence of the book. 

That’s why there’s nothing wrong with Sinaumed’s mastering the steps for making a review correctly. sinaumedia can visit sinaumedia’s book collection at www.sinaumedia.com to get references on how to make a review, such as the following book recommendations: Enjoy studying. #Friends Without Limits. 

The requirements for making an SKCK (Certificate of Police Records) are important for anyone who needs this letter for a specific purpose. Previously, SKCK was known as SKKB (Certificate of Good Conduct) which was usually widely used as a document of certain requirements.

SKCK itself is a statement issued by the National Police through the Sector Police (Polsek) or Regional Police (Polres) which contains a person’s criminal record for a certain period of time until this certificate expires. In other words, SKCK is a person’s record as important evidence that the person concerned has acted properly or has never committed a crime or crime based on police records.

Based on the official Polri website, SKCK is valid for up to 6 months from the date of issue. Sinaumed’s can extend expired SKCK for certain activities. The meaning of the SKCK function is sufficient to know the requirements for making the necessary SKCK as a complement to management requirements. Some of them are civil servant recruitment requirements or CPNS registration requirements or job applications at a private or government agency.

What is SKCK?

Certificate of Police Records (SKCK) is a letter issued only by the Indonesian National Police (Polri). Previously, SKCK was known as a Certificate of Good Conduct. SKCK’s function is to search for someone’s criminal record. So far, there are two ways to make SKCK. First, the general public can come directly to the nearest police station. The second option is to register the SKCK application online. Sinaumed’s needs to know that how to make this SKCK is not free, aka it costs money.

Applicants or the general public who wish to do so must pay a fee. Previously, the cost of making an SKCK was IDR 10,000. However, based on PP No. 60 of 2016, SKCK fees and costs are set at IDR 30,000, and these fees are still valid. Based on the official Polri website at https://www.skck.polri.go.id , SKCK is stated as an official letter issued to applicants or residents through the Security Intelligence or Intelkam feature.

SKCK can explain criminal activity or records of individuals or data subjects related to the crime. SKCK can be extended if it expires. SKCK is valid for up to 6 months from the date of issue. To make SKCK for the first time, the general public needs to prepare some of the necessary documents.

This also applies to Indonesian citizens or foreigners. Apart from that, it has also been quoted from the official Polri website and other sources, along with the stages and creation of the latest SKCK 2021, the following are the requirements for making an SKCK along with a complete description that you need to know:

Terms of Making SKCK

The requirements for making an SKCK are different for each person’s personal or group needs when registering it. That is why we need to understand in advance the types of requirements to make SKCK according to our needs, such as the following description:

1. Requirements for Making SKCK: Cover Letter

First, the requirement for making an SKCK is to prepare an application letter from the Village where you live. To receive this cover letter, we must first contact the local RT so that they can make a cover letter for the RW. after that, you will receive a letter of introduction from the RW to the Kelurahan or Village with these requirements.

After receiving a letter of introduction from the RW, meet with the Kelurahan officer. Then you will be asked to fill out the required form to make an SKCK.

2. Requirements for Making SKCK: Personal Data

Please complete these requirements before submitting the SKCK to the Polsek or Polres. For Indonesian citizens (WNI), the following requirements apply for equipment required to make an SKCK:

• Photocopy of Identity Card or Driving License (SIM). Bring the original KTP or SIM as proof.
• Photocopy of KK (Family Card).
• Original Birth Certificate or Photocopy of Birth Certificate.
• Copy of passport (if any).
• 6 4×6 photos with a red background. Dress neatly with a collar and don’t use facial accessories or facial expressions. People who wear the hijab must show their entire face in the photo as a requirement for making an SKCK.

3. Requirements for Making SKCK for Foreign Citizens (WNA)

Foreigners can also make SKCK. This is related to the issuance of permanent residence permits (visas) for those who wish to work or live in Indonesia. A visa issued by the Immigration.go.id website is a document that certifies entry permits for foreign nationals. Depending on the type of visa, foreigners can also work in Japan. The type of visa a person has also determines how long a foreigner can stay in the country.

To obtain a permanent residence permit in Indonesia, foreigners must first make an SKCK. SKCK cannot be made at the Polsek or Polres level for this purpose. With reference to the level of regional accountability, this document can only be processed by the National Police Headquarters. Also various administrative activities and issues, etc.

Naturalization of citizenship or child adoption procedures for foreign applicants also requires an SKCK. As reported by the official Polri website, the following are the requirements needed to issue an SKCK to foreigners in Indonesia.

• Photocopy of IMTA of the Ministry of Manpower of the Republic of Indonesia.
• Copy of Limited Stay Permit Card (KITAS) or Permanent Stay Permit Card (KITAP).
• If you are an Indonesian citizen (WNI), bring a photocopy of your KTP and marriage certificate.
• A cover letter from a sponsor, company or agency that employs, uses or is in charge of foreigners.
• Photocopy of passport
• Photocopy of Police Registration Certificate (STM). Prepare a 4 x 6 cm color photo. A total of 6 sheets with a yellow background, photos with polite clothes and collars.
• In this case, the photo does not use facial accessories, the face is displayed, and for applicants wearing a shawl, the photo must show the entire face.

How to make an SKCK directly at the police station

Apart from the requirements for making an SKCK, what Sinaumed’s needs to know is that he can do a manual SKCK with the local police and the local police. The process doesn’t take long. As a side note, Sinaumed’s can contact the Polres (government or city level) directly instead of the Polsek such as to apply for a job, complete civil service management or CPNS, and apply for a visa or other intergovernmental needs. The process of making SKCK directly or offline is as follows:

• After fulfilling the requirements to make an SKCK, go directly to the SKCK section and register or enter the file that was created. Sinaumed’s will be asked to fill out a form later in the section.

• The Polsek will demand the completeness of the above requirements as a form of integrity. To make it easier and faster, Sinaumed’s can start preparing all the requirements for making an SKCK in the requested document format and bring the original documents in case of review.

• For those who are considering fingerprints, the new SKCK does not yet have a fingerprint formula, to be precise it can collect fingerprints from the resort police in the official fingerprint recording section.

• According to police guidelines or your local police station, this fingerprint recording usually comes at a cost. However, some Polres or Polsek have removed this fee, so it is free and there is no fingerprinting fee. Be sure to ask for it first. Taking care of SKCK at the Polres there will be a process of taking fingerprints which can usually be faster than any SKCK issuance procedure. This shows the experience of the Polsek in dealing with SKCK issues. Then the Polsek made a letter of recommendation for fingerprinting at the Polres.

• After the fingerprint process is complete, collect the files that have been prepared and pay the SKCK issuance fee at the counter. Please wait in line. Then SKCK will be ready soon.

How to Make SKCK Online

Apart from coming directly to the police station, Sinaumed’s can easily make an SKCK online. If all the required documents have been prepared, the applicant can easily and quickly access a website belonging to the Republic of Indonesia Police on a personal computer or smartphone device because there is no need to queue anymore. For more details, see the guidelines on how to make SKCK online as follows:

• In the browser view, open the official website of the Indonesian National Police, namely https://www.skck.polri.go.id
• In the menu section, click on the “Registration Form” section.
• Pay attention to each column to be filled in.
• After that, fill in all available forms correctly and completely.
• Make sure all data is filled in clearly and completely.
• Usually the applicant will be asked to fill in data in the form of personal data, family interactions, level of education, criminal case, physical characteristics, attachments, the intended municipalities, and others.
• Re-check the data that has been filled in. Make sure there are no writing errors or typos.
• Applicants can click in the Satwil section the option “Types of SKCK creation required”, then click the synchronous option with the purpose of Sinaumed’s making SKCK.
• Upload a photo, preferably the photo was of good quality.
• Next attach the fingerprint formula. The applicant can get it at the nearest police station.
• If it has been filled in completely, the applicant will receive proof of registration & numbers to pay for the online SKCK creation fee.
• Payment can be made by sending via BRI bank or to the nearest police station.

Cost of Making SKCK

After completing all the requirements for making SKCK and uploading documents, the applicant will get a code for the cost of making SKCK. This code is used to process payments according to the SKCK implementation fee. Making SKCK for Indonesian citizens is subject to an import duty of IDR 30,000 and making SKCK for foreigners is subject to import duty of IDR 60,000. After the payment is made, the applicant will receive a registration code. The registration code must be brought to the police station for SKCK collection.

How to Extend the Latest SKCK

Expired SKCK can be extended by submitting it to the police. How to Extend SKCK and required documents:

1. Please bring the following documents to the SKCK service center of all police stations. Original/certified old SKCK sheet (validity up to 1 year). 1 photocopy of KTP 1 photocopy of National Identity Card (KK) 1 photocopy of birth certificate. Recent color passport photo 3 4 × 6 with a red background.
2. Request the SKCK extension form and fill in the data correctly.
3. The police officers examined the document first.
4. Applicants are usually required to pay a fee of IDR 10,000.
5. Applicants only need to wait for a call to receive an extension of the SKCK validity period that has been filled in.

SKCK function

1. SKCK issued by Polsek

The Sector Police (Polsek) is a sub-district level police structure in the Unitary State of the Republic of Indonesia. SKCK issued by the police can be used for various purposes, including applying for non-PNS and non-BUMN jobs or for private companies. In general, private companies do not require an SKCK to complete application documents, but there are several large companies that require applicants to submit an SKCK as a requirement for their recruitment.

The SKCK issued by the Polsek can also be used to fulfill requirements if you wish to continue your education, such as going to school and studying in several agencies, as well as requirements for moving to dormitories managed by the government or private. In some areas, residents wishing to move to another area will be asked to show an SKCK issued by the police to make a resettlement notification.

In addition, the SKCK issued by the Polsek is also needed for those who wish to run for village officials and to renew their employment contracts, such as non-PNS workers at the Regional General Hospital. SKCK issued by the Polsek can also be used as a prerequisite for issuing trade licenses and for the manufacture of seafarers. A seaman’s book is an official document issued by the state that physically resembles a passport. The seafarer’s book contains the seafarer’s identity and is used as a seafarer’s travel document and work report.

2. SKCK issued by Polres

The Resort Police (Polres) is a structure of the Indonesian National Police which is one level above the police station (Polsek), including districts or cities. In general, the requirements for applying for Civil Servants (PNS) must include an SKCK issued by the Polres. The SKCK document issued by the Polres is also one of the prerequisites for registering village heads, DPRD members, and candidates for regional heads at the district or community level. If Sinaumed’s is applying for a state-owned company, or if he has plans to marry a police officer or member of the TNI, he usually also requires an SKCK document issued by the Polres.

3. SKCK issued by Polda

Regional Police (Polda) are the police force in charge of Polres at the state or special area level. Candidates for mayor or candidate for DPRD at the provincial level must submit an SKCK issued by the Polda.

If Sinaumed’s plans to travel or work abroad, it is also necessary to make an SKCK from the Regional Police or Police Headquarters. For interstate or overseas needs, SKCK is generally requested by the nearest regional police. This means that an SKCK from the local police or Police Headquarters is required to issue a visa for overseas purposes.

• 14 Powerful Tips to Pass CPNS This Year
• Definition of SBMPTN: Purpose, Requirements and Flow of Registration
• Aircraft Parker Salary: Requirements, Preparation, Roles, and Interesting Facts
• How to Become a Flight Attendant: Requirements and Selection Stages
• Stages of CPNS Selection and Things that Must Be Prepared

So, that’s an explanation of the requirements for making an SKCK and how to make it, both in person and online. Document management such as SKCK is an example of public service, especially by the police. If Sinaumed’s wants to learn more about public services and the police system, then you can visit sinaumedia’s book collection, at www.sinaumedia.com as the following book recommendations: Enjoy studying. #Friends Without Limits.

How to Make a NPWP Online – As tax-abiding Indonesians, Sinaumed’s definitely understands how to pay taxes because this is one of our obligations. Especially for Sinaumed’s who just got a job, they are definitely required to make an NPWP so that tax payments can be made more easily. Please note that this NPWP stands for Taxpayer Identification Number which becomes another identity after the KTP, especially if you are of legal age.

Especially in this sophisticated era, of course making an NPWP can be done online. So that Sinaumed’s, as a tax-abiding Indonesian, doesn’t need to bother going to the tax office anymore to apply for this new NPWP. What’s more, if the location of the tax office is far from your house or boarding house, of course it will be inconvenient! Therefore, the Ministry of Taxes has provided this latest innovation.

Then how do you register for an NPWP online? Let’s watch so that Sinaumed’s will be more obedient to this Indonesian state tax!

How to Register for NPWP Online?

Please note, Sinaumed’s, that this NPWP is required for individuals and business owners.

Requirements for Completeness of Online NPWP Registration Documents

For Individual Taxpayers (WP).

Namely those who have carried out free activities or work. However, people who do not carry out activities or work are also required to register this NPWP, right… So, here are the requirements for the completeness of the documents:

• Active e-mail
• Scan e-KTP
• Scan of Job Description from the place of work (employees only)
• Scan of SK PNS (especially PNS/ASN)
• Business Certificate (especially for self-employed)

For Business Owners or Free Work

Namely for those who run a business or work in one or more places of business activity. Especially if the business activity is different from the place of residence. Well, here is a description of the conditions:

• Scan e-KTP
• If you are a foreigner, a photocopy of your passport, KITAS (Temporary Stay Permit Card) or KITAP (Permanent Stay Permit Card) is required.
• Photocopy of business activity permit documents that have been issued by the competent authority. It can also be in the form of a certificate of place of business activity or independent work issued by a Regional Government Official, at least a Lurah or Village Head.
• A statement letter on stamp duty explaining that you are actually running the business or freelance work.

For Married Women Who Want Their Tax Rights and Obligations to be Separated

Namely for those who are married women but want to separate their rights and obligations in terms of taxation. The document requirements are:

• Scan e-KTP
• Photocopy of passport and KITAS/KITAP (if a foreigner)
• Photocopy of husband’s NPWP card
• Photocopy of Family Card
• Photocopy of foreign tax documents (if the husband is a foreigner)
• Photocopy of agreement on the separation of income and assets. If not, it can also be in the form of a statement requiring that tax rights and obligations be carried out separately from the husband.

For Someone Who Has Not Fulfilled Subjective or Objective Requirements

Even though Sinaumed’s has not met the requirements subjectively or objectively in accordance with the provisions of the tax laws and regulations, but still wants to get an NPWP card, of course you can register, you know… This is even better because in case you know in the future you will immediately get free activities or jobs , so no longer take care of this matter anymore. So, here are the document requirements:

• Scan e-KTP

Steps to Register a Personal TIN Online

1. Open the official website of the Director General of Taxes, namely at www.pajak.go.id or ereg.pajak.go.id/login . Then, select the e-Registration system menu .
2. Click “Register”. After that, fill in the user registration data based on your data correctly, starting from the email address and password. Then, click “Save”.
3. Activate the account by checking the inbox on the email. If there is an email from the Director General of Taxes, follow the instructions and immediately activate it.
4. If the activation process is complete, immediately log in to the e-Registration system by entering the email and password that was created earlier. You can also click on the link in the Director General of Taxes activation email.
5. If you have successfully logged in, you will be directed to the WP Data Registration page. Fill in all your data correctly, in total there are 10 steps that you must fill in the form.
6. After all the data on the registration form has been filled in, select the “Register” button to send the form to the Central Tax Service Office.
7. Print the existing documents, namely documents in the form of Taxpayer Registration Forms and Temporary Registered Certificates.
8. If the document has been printed, please sign it . Then, put together all the complete document files that have been prepared beforehand.
9. Send the signed Taxpayer Registration Form to the Tax Service Office (KPP). There are two options, namely:

• Send the registration form to the KPP according to where you are registered as a Taxpayer via Registered Post. If it is to be sent by post, the delivery can be made no later than 14 days after carrying out the e-Registration.
• Scan the document file and upload it via the e-Registration application earlier.

10. Periodically check the registration status of the NPWP, both via email and the e-Registration application.

• If the status is rejected, it means that there is incomplete data and must be corrected.
• If the status is approved, the e-NPWP card will be sent to your home address via Registered Post.

What is NPWP?

NPWP stands for Taxpayer Identification Number, which is a special number given to taxpayers as a means of tax administration. This number can also be used as self-identification or identity of taxpayers in terms of exercising their rights and obligations to pay taxes.

For those who have met the requirements both subjectively and objectively and in accordance with the provisions of the tax laws and regulations, they must register themselves at the office of the Directorate General of Taxes in order to be registered as a Taxpayer and obtain an NPWP. This objective requirement means the requirements governing that taxpayers have received or earned income from their work.

How to register for NPWP can also be done online and offline. If online, namely through the official website of the Director General of Taxes, namely at www.pajak.go.id or ereg.pajak.go.id/login . Meanwhile, if offline, it can be done by visiting the Tax Service Office (KPP) directly and bringing the document requirements.

What is the Function of NPWP?

• Facility in tax administration in Indonesia.
• As identification or identity of taxpayers to exercise their tax rights and obligations.
• Maintain order in efforts to pay taxes and supervise tax administration.
• Included in every tax document.

What is the Format of the NPWP?

As with other identity cards, this NPWP also consists of 15 digits. The first 9 digits is the taxpayer code which indicates whether he is an individual taxpayer or a treasury body/collector. Meanwhile, the next 6 digits are the tax administration code.

Example: 08.506.787.0-541.000, it can be described as follows:

08 : Taxpayer identity indicating as an individual

506.787 : serial number or registration number

0 : check digit (functions as a security device to prevent falsification and NPWP errors)

541 : KPP code (depending on where the taxpayer is registered)

000 : code of center/husband or branch/wife

Now that’s the format of the number digits on the NPWP which of course everyone has different number digits. It’s the same with the digits on the KTP.

What are the Requirements for Removing NPWP?

Apparently, the NPWP can also be deleted , you know and only the Director General of Taxes can do this. In this case, there are many problems that require the NPWP to be removed and replaced with a new one. So, here are the conditions for deleting the NPWP.

1. Taxpayers no longer meet subjective and/or objective requirements. For example, died and left no inheritance.
2. Taxpayers in the form of business entities are undergoing liquidation or dissolution, due to business termination or merger.
3. A woman who previously had an NPWP, then married without making an agreement on the separation of assets and income.
4. Taxpayers in the form of permanent business entities stop their business in Indonesia, and want to move to another country.
5. There is an inheritance that cannot be divided in its position as a Tax Subject.
6. The Director General of Taxes considers it necessary to write it off, because the Taxpayer does not meet the subjective and/or objective requirements, in accordance with the provisions of the tax laws and regulations.

Are There Any Sanctions for Not Registering a NPWP?

Of course there are sanctions for those who have met the requirements both subjectively and/or objectively, but have not registered themselves to obtain an NPWP. This rule has been referred to in Law Article 39 paragraph 1 number 28 in 2008 . So, here’s a breakdown of the rules:

1. Any person who intentionally:

1. Not registering to be given a Taxpayer Identification Number or not reporting their business to be confirmed as a Taxable Entrepreneur.
2. Misusing or using without rights the Taxpayer Identification Number or the Confirmation of a Taxable Entrepreneur.
3. Did not submit a notification letter.
4. Delivering notification letters and/or information whose contents are incorrect or incomplete.
5. Refusing to carry out the inspection as referred to in Article 29.
6. Showing books, records, or other documents that are false or falsified as if they were true, or do not describe the actual situation.
7. Does not keep books or records in Indonesia, does not pay attention to or does not lend books, records or other documents.
8. Not keeping books, records, or documents which form the basis of bookkeeping or recording and other documents including the results of data processing from bookkeeping that is managed electronically or carried out by means of an on-line application program in Indonesia as referred to in Article 28 paragraph (11); or
9. Failure to deposit taxes that have been withheld or collected so as to cause losses to state revenues shall be subject to imprisonment for a minimum of 6 (six) months and a maximum of 6 (six) years and a fine of at least 2 (two) times the amount of tax payable which is not or less paid and a maximum of 4 (four) times the amount of unpaid or underpaid tax.

2. The crime referred to in paragraph (1) is added 1 (one) time to 2 (two) criminal sanctions if a person commits another crime in the field of taxation before 1 (one) year has passed, starting from the completion of serving the prison sentence imposed.
3. Any person who attempts to commit a criminal act of misusing or using without rights the Taxpayer Identification Number or Taxable Entrepreneur Confirmation as referred to in paragraph (1) letter b, or submits a Tax Return and/or statement whose contents are incorrect or incomplete, as referred to in paragraph (1) letter d, in the context of submitting a request for refund or making tax compensation or tax credit, shall be punished with imprisonment for a minimum of 6 (six) months and a maximum of 2 (two) years and a fine of at least 2 (two) times the amount of restitution requested and/or compensation or credit made and a maximum of 4 (four) times the amount of restitution requested and/or compensation or credit made.

Meanwhile, in the Constitution Number 36 of 2008 concerning Income Tax in Article 21 paragraph 5a, Article 22 paragraph 3, and Article 23 paragraph 1a, it also regulates the existence of this NPWP. Well, here is the description.

1. Article 21 paragraph 5a  states that withholding Income Tax Article 21 must apply a higher rate of 20% for taxpayers who do not have a taxpayer identification number (NPWP) compared to the rate set for taxpayers who can show a taxpayer identification number.

There are a few special additions to Article 21 (work-related benefits), the employer (private sector, treasurer) and workers (employees, civil servants) will both be disadvantaged if there are employees who do not have an NPWP. Because the mechanism for paying taxes under Article 21 for the private sector is usually borne by the employer, while for civil servants, specifically for fines under Article 21 due to not having an NPWP, the tax will be borne by the civil servants themselves.

2. Article 22 paragraph 3 states that Article 22 PPh collectors must apply a 100% higher rate to taxpayers who do not have an NPWP compared to the rates applied to taxpayers who can show an NPWP.
3. Article 23 paragraph 1a states that Article 23 withholding income tax must apply a 100% higher rate to taxpayers who do not have an NPWP compared to the rate applied to taxpayers who can show an NPWP.

What are the Purposes of Conducting a Tax Audit?

It should be noted that this tax audit activity has been regulated in the law that applies in Indonesia, both the Director General of Taxes regulations and the Director General of Taxes circular letter. The purpose of carrying out a tax audit which was written in the Decree of the Minister of Finance No.545/KMK 04/2000 on 22 December 2000, namely to test compliance with the fulfillment of tax obligations in order to provide legal certainty, justice and guidance to taxpayers. Meanwhile, another objective is in the context of implementing the provisions of the tax laws and regulations.

So, that’s a review of how to register an NPWP online and the sanctions imposed by the state if it is negligent in taking care of it. Does Sinaumed’s already have this NPWP as proof of being a tax-abiding citizen?

Also Read!

• Definition and Types of Tax Objects
• What is VAT?
• 4 Tax Functions for the State
• Understanding Tax and How to Pay It
• The Role and Function of Taxes in Economic Development
• Definition of Liquidity and Its Role in Investment
• How to Calculate PPh and PPB Taxes
• Definition of Property Law and the Laws that Govern It
• Know the Types of Taxes in Indonesia

How to Introduce Yourself in English (Self Introduction) – If you are confused about introducing yourself in English, this time sinaumedia will provide a complete review accompanied by 5 examples of how to introduce yourself in English or what is known as a self-introduction.

Definition of Self-Introduction

Self introduction is a term from English which is usually interpreted as “self introduction”. Self introduction is a form of expression and expression used by individuals to introduce themselves.

If an individual is in a new environment, of course he needs to do a self-introduction or self-introduction. This is so that other people who are in the new environment know the individual better. Whether the individual is in a new work environment, school or campus, friendship or social environment, and so on.

In doing a self introduction , several important points are needed to be conveyed. What are these points? These points include: (1) Delivering greetings; (2) Introductory sentence; (3) Submit name, address and origin; (4) convey age, occupation, hobbies, interests or interests; and (5) convey opening greetings.

Of the points above, the most common are points 1, 2 and 3. Because the rest will be an option depending on the situation and condition of the individual.

In principle, how to do a self-introduction in English is not much different from a self-introduction or self-introduction in Indonesian. Below, we will explain in full the steps or how to do a self-introduction and some examples of self-introductions in English and their meanings . 

However, it is better before doing a self-introduction, first look at the situation, conditions, the interlocutor in the surrounding environment, and their intentions or interests.

When you are in a school or campus environment, social circle or friendship, you can do a self introduction or introduce yourself in an informal and relaxed way.

However, if you are in a formal or official work environment or forum, of course your way of doing a self introduction tends to be different.

To find out how or the steps to do self-introduction in English, Sinaumed’s can first learn the basic English conversations that are often used in everyday life through the book Daily English Conversation: Proficient in Everyday English.

Not only that, this book will also explain how to carry out conversations that are adapted to situations and conditions, such as daily conversations in the classroom, in the laboratory, in the yard, in the dining room, and so on. Want to speak English fluently? Try buying this book.

Steps to Do a Self Introduction

In doing self – introduction in English, there are several things that need to be conveyed. This depends on the situation, conditions, interlocutors in the surrounding environment, and interests.

To do a self-introduction or self-introduction, etc., is done in a structured and systematic manner so that the points to be conveyed can be understood well by the interlocutor.

The self-introduction  itself generally uses fairly simple English which we often find and use in everyday life. Therefore, it is important for Sinaumed’s to master the basics of English through the book English For Everyday Speaking, English for Everyday Conversations.

In general, in conducting a self-introduction, there are several stages, methods, or you could say steps that must be considered, namely Opening , Content , and Closing . In order to know more details, let’s look at the review of the steps for doing self-introduction (in detail) below.

1. Opening _

In the opening or opening part, generally greet and ask how the people you invite to meet face to face, for example:

• Hello everyone…
• Hi, everybody, how are you today?
• Good morning/afternoon/evening, How are you?

2. Content _

Next is to enter the content section. However, before entering into the content , there are things that need to be conveyed, namely the goal. Express what your goals and intentions are in front of the interlocutor. Your goal, of course, is to do a self-introduction , so what you can say is something like:

• Let me introduce myself
• I would like to introduce myself
• I want to introduce myself
• In this opportunity, I would like to introduce myself
• May I introduce myself?
• I’m here to introduce myself

After that, enter the main content section which consists of several points, including:

1) Personal Details

In this case, you can state your full name followed by mentioning your nickname .

• I am… you can call me…
• My name is… you can call me…
• My full name is… please call me…
• My name is… my friends usually call me…
• I am Juliana Citra, you can call me Citra

a. Country of Origin

These points can be used as an option if you meet people from abroad, for example:

• I came from Indonesia
• I’m from Indonesia

b . Citizenship

• I’m Indonesian
• My nationality is Indonesian

2) Self -identity

State the place, date of birth, and also age, for example:

a. Place and date of birth

• I was born… (followed by in or on )

If it is followed by the word in , for example: I was born in 1999 or I was born in Bandung, May 3, 1999. Then, if it is followed by the word on , for example: I was born on August 2, 1999 or I was born on 2nd August 1999.

b. Age

State your age at that time, for example: I am… years old

3)  Addresses

State your place of residence or your current address, such as street names and so on, for the original address, for example:

• I come from…
• I am from…
• I come from Madura
• I am from Madura

For residence, for example:

• Now, I stay…
• Now, I live…

( Notes : can be followed by in, on, or at . However, pay attention to the three prepositions, their usage tends to be different)

• The usage of in is followed by country, city, village. Usually to explain someone’s whereabouts in a geographical context or a wider scope, for example: I stay in Jakarta or I live in Indonesia .
• The use of on is rather narrow in scope followed by street names, for example: I live on Sukasari Street or I stay on Buah Batu Street.
• The use of at is more specific, followed by a complete address in detail, for example: I live at Mawar Street, No. 66, Surabaya.

4)  Job or Study (Job or School/College)

• School , for example: I am student of… or I study in…
• Lecture, mentioning the name of the university and department, for example: I am a student of… in major… or I study in, my major is…
• Have graduated from school or college, for example: I graduated from… in…
• Occupation, for example: I work in… as… (mention the place of work and position) or I am a staff/manager (according to the job position) of…. For example, I am a manager of PT. Jaya’s work

5) Interests

Can mention activities that you enjoy or hobbies, for example:

• My hobby is… (one hobby)
• My hobby are… (more than one hobby)
• i like…
• My activities are…

 3. Closing (Closure)

For closing, it usually ends with thanks, wishes, and of course closing greetings. Example:

• That’s about me… I hope… and have a great day. thank you
• This is the end of my self-introduction
• I think enough, thanks for your attention.

The explanation above is the general and detailed steps or stages . However, as previously explained, in doing a self-introduction , it all depends on the circumstances, the interlocutor, and also his interests. Also pay attention when you do a self introduction , you are in a formal or informal situation.

It would be nice if you have a little picture about self-introduction in English, the book 100 Language Functions For Fluent English, Proficient in English Conversation is an English conversation book that can help Sinaumed’s improve their English skills.

By containing 100 expressions that are relevant in everyday conversation, of course this book will help you do self-introduction in English. So come on, buy it!

Example of How to Introduce Yourself in English ( Self Introduction)

1. Self Introduction Personal Profile

The first example of doing a self introduction can be done when you are in conditions and situations where you have to introduce your personal profile. Here’s an example.

Good morning everyone.

In this opportunity, please allow me to introduce myself. My name is Jojo Danuar, you can call me Jojo. I am the third child in my family, and I have 4 other siblings. I was born in Jakarta, December 2nd, 1999. Now, I live at Jalan Manggis number 14, South Jakarta.

I really like music and I have played the guitar since 6 th grade. Now, I’ve made 4 songs and I’ve a dream to make a group band. I also want to share a stage with Maroon 5. I hope my dream can come true.

My father works in the hospital and my mother is a housewife. That’s all I can say about this introduction. Thanks for your attention. have a nice day.

Meaning in Indonesian:

Good morning everyone.

At this opportunity, allow me to introduce myself. My name is Jojo Danuar, you can just call me Jojo. I am the third child in the family and I have 4 siblings. I was born in Jakarta, December 2, 1999. Now, I live at Jalan Manggis Number 14, South Jakarta.

I really love music and I can play the guitar since 6th grade. Currently, I have composed 4 songs and I have a hope to form a music band. I also want to be on the same stage with Maroon 5. I hope my dream can come true.

My father works in a hospital and my mother is a housewife. That’s all I can say in this introduction. Thank you for your attention. Have a nice day.

2. Self Introduction as a New Student

The following is an example of a self-introduction if you are a new student at a foreign school or campus or an international school.

Good morning everyone!

My name is Dinda Kirana. I am a new student at this university. I was born in Pekalongan, a small city in Indonesia, on January 6 th , 1999. My hobbies are writing and reading. If there is a competition, I’d love to take part as long as it relates to my hobbies. I think that is my first step to achieve my goal of becoming a famous writer. That’s all I can tell about myself. Thank you and nice to meet you.

Meaning in Indonesian:

Good morning everyone!

My name is Dinda Kirana. I am a freshman in this university. I was born in Pekalongan, a small town in Indonesia, on January 6, 1999. My hobbies are writing and reading. If there is a competition, I will be happy to take part as long as it relates to my hobby. I thought that would be my first step in achieving my goal of becoming a famous writer. That’s what I can tell about myself. Thank you and nice to meet you.

Studying together with  this Easy English Conversation  book can help you master your daily communication skills in English. This book with an introduction to Indonesian, will make it easier for beginners to understand its contents. In addition, it also contains examples and practice questions that will hone and strengthen your skills. Let’s learn English with this book!

3. Self Introduction as a New Employee

If you are a new employee in a company, you can use the example below to do a self introduction.

good afternoon.

Let me introduce myself. My name is Ruri. I am a newemployee here. Previously, I had worked in various reputable companies in Jakarta. So, I will do my best for this company so that this company can make more progress and get a higher profit. I think enough, I hope we can work together as a team. Thanks for your attention.

Meaning in Indonesian:

Good afternoon.

Introduce myself. My name is Ruri. I’m a new employee here. Previously, I have worked in various leading companies in Jakarta. So, I will try to do my best for this company so that this company can make more progress and make higher profits. I think that’s enough, I hope we can work together as a team. Thank you for your attention.

4. Self Introduction to Start the Presentation

During lectures, of course you are required to make presentations to report the results of your assignments in front of the class. In this situation, there are actually many examples that you can apply, one of which is below.

Hello. Good morning everyone. My name is Nuraini as a group leader. Today, I would like to convey my group’s research on sociocultural linguistics that we completed for one month.

 Meaning in Indonesian:

Hello. Good morning everyone. My name is Nuraini as the group leader. Today, I would like to present my group’s research on sociocultural linguistics which we have completed for one month.

5. Self Introduction to Explain Busynesses Undertook

When you introduce yourself, maybe you will also be asked about the busyness that you are currently living. So, as an illustration or reference for you, of course you can see an example of doing a self-introduction in English in that situation.

good afternoon. I am Letusha Gunawan. You can call me Ucha. I was born in Madura, May 25th, 1998. Now, I am managing a personal blog about trends and healthy lifestyles. If you’re interested, you can visit and read my article on my personal blog. I think enough. Thank you and have a great day.

Meaning in Indonesian:

Good afternoon. I am Letusha Gunawan. You can call me Ucha. I was born in Madura, May 25 1998. Currently, I’m managing a personal blog related to trends and healthy lifestyle. If you are interested, you can visit and read my articles on my personal blog. I think its enough. Thank you and have a nice day.

That is an explanation of self-introduction , starting from understanding, steps or how to do it, to examples of self-introduction.

If Sinaumed’s wants to know more about self-introduction or other knowledge related to English, you can buy books or e-books according to your needs at sinaumedia.com and sinaumedia Digital .

sinaumedia will always be here as #FriendsWithoutLimits to accompany you in seeking knowledge. Hope it is useful.

There is material in it that is prepared in full and is certainly easy to understand. This book provides 585 conversation situations and contexts, 43 communication topics that often appear in communication, idioms, and many more. Thus, you will actively speak English. Interested? Come on, buy it soon.

Author : Tasya Talitha Nur Aurelia

How to Get Money From Freelance – In this sophisticated era, various types of professions have developed that can generate rupiah coffers. Maybe when long ago, professions could only be limited to teachers, doctors, mechanics, and others. However, now times have changed…

Of the various types of professions that are developing, one of them is freelance . Freelancing is in fact in great demand by many people, you know, because this type of profession is flexible and can also generate high income.

Freelancing is currently also a favorite opportunity for students because it can increase their pocket money, especially in the digital era like today. There are many ways to become a freelancer .

So, what exactly is freelancing ? Then what are the ways you can do to get rupiah coffers from this freelance profession ?

So that Sinaumed’s understands it better, let’s take a look at the explanation about freelancing and how to get money from this freelance business !

What is Freelancing ?

In this digital era, there are many jobs that guarantee your wallet will be filled, one of which is freelancing . Currently, not a few have worked as a freelancer . According to them, being a freelancer provides many of the same advantages as other permanent jobs.

Freelance or freelance is a type of work that is not bound by a long-term contract, but still has a work attachment to the company. Even though they are not bound by a contract, a freelancer still works according to the project given by the company.

This freelance is more flexible or does not require working hours like company employees in general. The work done by a freelancer usually depends on the project and has its own deadline.

In this case, the wages or salaries received by a freelancer vary, depending on the difficulty level of the project he is working on.

How To Get Money From Freelance

Then, how do you get money from freelancing ? What are the tips that novice freelancers can use to enter the world of freelancing ? Let’s look at the following description!

1. Focus on One Area of ​​Expertise

The first thing to become a freelancer is to determine what area of ​​expertise you have. Try to choose areas of expertise that are of your interest, so that when you receive a project from the company, you will be happy working on it.

If you don’t have enough skills or expertise, how come you can practice by studying or taking online courses. Through these online courses , later the skills you have will eventually become reliable.

For example, you like or have writing skills . So, you can choose to become a freelance content writer or copywriter. 

2. Join the Freelancer Community

To expand your network, you can join the freelancer community . There are many things that you can get from the community, for example, you can get information about freelance projects from companies and info about online courses to hone skills .

If in the community there is information about freelance projects , it can be a golden opportunity to be contacted directly by prospective clients. Well, that way, you can get a new project to work on, right…

3. Create a Compelling Portfolio

After getting various projects from companies, you can create your style portfolio which contains the work and projects that you have worked on before. This can be useful so that prospective clients are interested in using the services of the skills you have.

When your portfolio is complete, you can save it on Google Drive, so that when a potential client requests a portfolio, you only send a link to access it on Google Drive.

Apart from that, you can also save the portfolio on social media specifically for a professional, for example LinkedIn. How come many have gotten new prospective clients from LinkedIn.

4. Determine Appropriate Service Rates

Your goal as a freelancer is to earn rupiah, right? Well, then you have to determine the tariff for the skill services that you have at the appropriate price.

Try not to set service rates that are too low , okay , then you will get a little profit. But also don’t set a high rate of interest, your prospective client will object.

So that you are not confused about the rates, you can consult with other freelancers . Another thing that you should consider in determining rates is adjusting the budget that the client has and depending on the level of difficulty of the project you are working on.

5. Complete Work with Full Responsibility

As with ordinary employees, every job given must have a deadline, as well as projects given to freelancers . As a freelancer, you must consciously work on projects quickly and responsibly.

If the client asks you to revise, immediately do the revision, so that the client is satisfied with the service you offer.

6. Must be careful in selecting prospective clients

Careful in selecting prospective clients also affects the income that we will earn later. There are two things that must be considered in choosing a prospective client, namely the budget owned by the prospective client and the time spent on the project .

7. Define Target Market

Determining the target market is the next way to get money through freelancing . By determining the target market, you can determine who most needs the skills you have.

For example, the skill you have is writing. Then the services you offer can be in the form of content writers and copywriters . That means, the target market for your skills are business people who are advertising their products or the mass media.

If you already know who the prospective client is, it will be easier to determine what services you should provide and perform.

8. Promoting the Skills You Have

There are many ways to promote your skills , especially in this digital era. You can promote it through professional-only social media like LinkedIn, or even social media like Instagram and Twitter.

If you have more budget, you can also promote your skills through paid advertisements, for example Google Ads, Facebook Ads and Instagram Ads services . You can choose according to the budget you have.

So, those are some ways to get money from freelancing . Then, what are the advantages and disadvantages of being a freelancer ? Come on, see the following explanation!

Weaknesses and Pros of Being a Freelancer

Disadvantages of Being a Freelancer

• Difficult to do social interaction. This is because a freelancer is usually not required to go to the office so it will be difficult to socialize and do not have face-to-face office colleagues.
• Not getting supporting facilities . These supporting facilities include insurance and other office facilities.
• Social status. Someone who becomes a freelancer usually doesn’t get a position, so it often creates misunderstandings by being considered an unemployed person.

Pros of Being a Freelancer

• Flexible working hours. A freelancer usually has working hours that do not depend on his attendance at the office. Therefore, freelance work is suitable for those who can divide their time between freelance work and their daily obligations, for example housewives or students.
• Free to work anywhere. A freelancer is not required to be present at the office, therefore they can work on projects that have been given anywhere, be it at home, in a cafe, or in a public library.
• Income that is not classified as small . The wages or salaries earned by a freelancer are not fixed, because they depend on the number of projects being worked on. Even so, for someone who doesn’t have a contract with a company but gets paid is great.
• Prospective . Currently, many companies are actively looking for and need freelancers . This is evidenced by the emergence of many sites providing freelance services today.

Examples of Freelance Work

There are quite a lot of types of work that a freelancer can do . For those of you who are novice freelancers , here are some examples of work that freelancers can generally do , namely:

• Copywriter
• Content Writer
• Design (Logo, website, product, social media content, etc.)
• Business consultant
• Photographer
• Barista
• Proofreaders
• Foreign language translator
• Private tutor
• Digital Marketing
• and others

So, those are some ways you can do to get rupiah coffers from freelance businesses and some things related to the freelance profession . Is Sinaumed’s interested in becoming a freelancer in order to increase his monthly allowance? If so, Sinaumed’s can do a number of these methods, especially hone the skills they have!

Recommended Books & Articles Related to How to Get Money from Freelance

How to Find Main Sentences – Have you ever read a long piece of writing containing some information conveyed by a writer with a specific purpose? An article usually consists of many sentences which are summarized in several paragraphs, each of which contains important information for the reader’s attention.

In a paragraph there are several important things that must be carefully examined by the reader. These things are related to the existence of a sentence that contains the main idea and several sentences which are a description of the continuation of that matter. The main idea as a main sentence is the core of a piece of writing.

Definition of Main Sentence

Judging from the origin of the word, the main sentence means a sentence that contains the essence of a story fragment or paragraph that contains all the contents. It contains the main idea, main idea, main idea, main idea, or main idea. The main sentence in a paragraph is usually only one sentence. Because it contains the entire contents of the story fragment, therefore it is general in nature. When someone knows where the main sentence is located, he will know exactly what he wants to review from the writing.

If a paragraph does not have a main sentence, then it can be said that the paragraph is not good and will cause confusion. With the main sentence, it will trigger the emergence of other sentences that contain a more detailed explanation of certain information. Its existence is important because it can be used as a basis for developing the next sentence which is an explanatory sentence or a special sentence. This material is usually found in Indonesian subjects and is quite important because it is usually also tested for certain tests. Some of the tests referred to are the national exam or the basic ability test in CASN (Prospective State Civil Apparatus) selection.

Main Sentence Features

Here are some characteristics of key sentences that you should understand in order to easily identify them.

1. Must Stand Alone

A sentence can be said to be the main sentence when it can be related to the sentence before or after it. In other words, there are no conjunctions like this, that, those, and so on. Conjunctions between sentences are also not as characteristic as on the other hand, besides, meanwhile, and so on. However, for some of the following conjunctions between sentences it can be found in a main sentence to show a conclusion, namely because of that and thus. So, not always conjunctions between sentences are not the characteristics of the main sentence.

It also contains clear main ideas or core issues without the need for further sentences. Precisely the main sentence is a bridge to develop a more detailed explanatory sentence to be explained. So that the existence of an explanatory sentence actually follows behind. The presence of an explanatory sentence is actually a complement to the main sentence, although if there is no explanatory sentence it is not a problem. However, an explanatory sentence cannot stand alone because it must be related to other sentences.

2. Is General

The core conveyed from the main sentence contains general information. It also contains problems or ideas that can be explained in more detail or in more detail in the following sections. Because it contains things that are general in nature, examples, facts, data, descriptions, or opinions are not points that are located in the main sentence.

3. Contains a Specific Problem or Idea

The main sentence is an introduction to a story that contains the problems or ideas put forward by the writer. With the problems that arise, then there is further development that explains these problems to be described in explanatory sentences. It is located elsewhere in the paragraph in question.

How to Find Key Sentences

Then how can we determine which main sentence is clearly in a writing that we read. Check out the following explanation.

1. Find the Primary Key

The key you should find when looking for a main sentence is in the sentence itself. If you find a phrase that contains instructions, then you can be sure that the sentence is not in the position of the main sentence. The phrase is an explanation of the core that has been discussed in the previous section. The most important technique you can use is to carefully read each section to make it easier to find.

2. Look for Explanatory Sentences

As the name implies, the main sentence contains the main idea or main idea which means it can stand alone. Pay attention to the presence after the first sentence and before the final sentence in paragraph fragments. If it turns out that after the initial sentence is an explanation, then it is likely that it is the main sentence. Conversely, if the beginning of the paragraph contains an explanation of some special things then the main sentence is at the end.

3. Pay attention to references in explanatory sentences

The word reference is another way to find out where the core of a story is in a paragraph. If there are references, pay attention to the origin of the referred reference which may indicate the existence or location of the main sentence. The reference as intended is usually at the beginning or the end of the sentence.

Key Sentence Differences

Judging from the difference, main sentences are divided into three types, namely deductive paragraphs, inductive paragraphs, and mixed paragraphs.

1. Deductive Paragraph

A deductive paragraph is a paragraph whose main sentence is in the initial position or at the front. Because it is inductive, the pattern of information conveyed is from things that are general to things that are specific. At the beginning of the paragraph, the main sentence acts as a general element while the special element is in the explanatory sentence. Explanatory sentences here usually contain information about examples, evidence, facts, or details.

2. Inductive Paragraph

An inductive paragraph is the opposite of a deductive paragraph, namely the main sentence is at the end or at the back of the paragraph. The pattern of information conveyed is also reversed, namely from things that are specific to things that are general in nature.

The beginning of the paragraph does not act as a main sentence, but as an explanatory sentence because it contains special characteristics. At the end of the paragraph, the main sentence contains the general characteristics that were previously conveyed at the beginning. Because it is at the end, the main sentence in an inductive paragraph is usually a conclusion from a discussion at the beginning of the sentence.

The development of inductive paragraphs becomes varied because they can be divided into three, namely causal patterns, generalization patterns, and analogy patterns. The causal pattern means that the sentence contains information about the cause and effect of why something can happen. The pattern of generalization means a review that is explained in the discussion of paragraphs that contain certain information. While the analogy pattern is a pattern in which a paragraph contains information which is a parable of a thing.

3. Mixed Paragraphs

Besides being deductive and inductive, a paragraph can be mixed. As for being mixed, namely a combination of deductive paragraphs and inductive paragraphs. Because of the mixture, there are two main sentences, the first is at the beginning of the paragraph and the second is at the end. The pattern that is formed is also a combination of the two, namely from general to specific and to general again.

 

 

The main sentence at the beginning is a statement that contains general things that the writer will discuss. While the final part is a conclusion from the information that has been conveyed earlier and in the middle. The existence of two main sentences should not contradict each other. Rather, the two must be related to one another. when it is at the end, then it is an affirmation of the main sentence conveyed at the beginning of the paragraph.

Main Sentence Examples

To better understand how to find the main sentence in a paragraph, here are some examples and explanations.

1. Example 1

Thorough preparation and strong mentality are the keys to achieving success, not only in one field but for all fields. This is something that must be owned and becomes the principle of an athlete in order to achieve the highest achievements in accordance with the events he participates in.

Including Eko Yuli Irawan, an Indonesian weightlifter who successfully presented a silver medal at the 2020 Tokyo Olympics some time ago. If it weren’t for good preparation, it would be impossible for him to present such a glorious achievement for the motherland. Even though he was hampered by the Covid-19 pandemic which attacked all corners of the world, he never gave up on preparing himself. He trained so hard while he was in the country even though he couldn’t test his abilities against several other athletes. Even if there is no pandemic, he can measure the extent of his abilities compared to his rivals from other countries.

Discussion :

If you listen to the paragraph above briefly, it is included in the deductive paragraph, because the main sentence is at the beginning of the paragraph. The initial sentence can stand alone and if it is not accompanied by an explanatory sentence it is not too problematic. The main sentence at the beginning contains an explanation that a person must have preparation and a strong mentality to be able to achieve success in all fields. Afterwards it contains an explanation about an athlete must also have such principles in order to obtain the highest achievement that can be presented. It was also explained that Eko Yuli Irawan, a weightlifter from Indonesia, was able to achieve success because of his unyielding spirit.

2. Example 2

Football and money are two things that are interrelated like two sides of a coin that cannot be separated from one another. The football industry for some accomplished businessmen is a very valuable source of income in today’s modern era. Some conglomerates are willing to pour out quite a lot of funds to be able to invest in football clubs in several countries.

Starting from Roman Abramovich, who bought the English club, namely Chelsea, to Nasser El-Khelaifi, who acquired the French club PSG for a large sum. They are willing to spend a large amount of funds as a form of long-term investment to increase the coffers of wealth they already have. Therefore, in the future, this form of investment can penetrate all fields, including football.

Discussion :

The main sentence of the paragraph that has been presented is at the end of the sentence, namely investment in the future will penetrate into all fields, one of which is football. This is indicated by the word “therefore” which is a conclusion so that the paragraph is included in the inductive category. The first part contains an explanatory sentence which states that the relationship between football and money cannot be separated even though they are different.

The next sentence explains in more detail, it is stated that football for some investors is a profitable enough investment land to be willing to spend large amounts of money. All sentences from the beginning to before the last sentence are explanations and the last part concludes all the explanations that have been presented.

3. Example 3

Many activities that some people do not realize are included in sports activities that can improve health and fitness. There are many forms of exercise that can be done when you are busy and don’t have time to exercise, one of which is taking advantage of the stairs at work as a medium for exercise.

Reduce the use of the elevator so that you regularly go up and down the stairs so that the activity is indirectly counted as a form of exercise. In addition, walking to a place to eat outside the office when taking a break also includes other sports activities that can be done. Invite a few friends to walk together as your effort to invite them to exercise and reduce traveling by motorized vehicles. Therefore, there are many activities that some people are not aware of as part of sports that they can do to keep the body in a fit condition.

If you listen carefully, the paragraph fragment above is a mixed paragraph because there are two main sentences presented at the beginning and the end. In the initial paragraph it is explained that many activities that people are not aware of are part of sports that can improve health and fitness.

Then the final part emphasizes that by doing activities that some people are not aware of, that includes how to keep the body in a fit state. The middle section is an explanation that contains several activities that can be done by those who don’t have enough time to exercise. By taking advantage of activities at work, sports can still be done.

 

 

Writing for some people may be an easy job to do. However, putting ideas, ideas, and thoughts into written form is not as easy as what is in the minds of each individual. Many people are able to speak in public, but when it comes to putting what is being discussed in written form it is difficult to do. Even when you can write, you have to be able to master the principles of using main sentences in the writing, especially in scientific works. Its existence will be very important because it relates to important information that is useful for readers to understand so that they can increase their knowledge.

If you plan to become a writer, it is important to understand the existence of main sentences in the writing that you will produce later. The success of a writer lies in his readers, because his work will be enjoyed by them later. When the reader understands the intent of the writing, it can be said that the writer succeeded. Conversely, when the reader is confused about understanding the writing, the writer fails to produce good and quality work.

By studying the use of main sentences in writing, be it scientific or not, it will be easier for writers to develop their ideas. On the other hand, the flow of thought to be conveyed can be easily understood from one section to another. So that it will form a comprehensive and continuous story. Hope it is useful.

Book Recommendations & Related Articles

How to Establish a Political Party – Political parties are a group of people who are in an organized group. In a party, a group of people who are in it have a certain ideology and also have the same goal. One of the goals of forming a political party is to get a position. In addition, the formation of political parties also aims to have political power in government or in a country.

In order to achieve its goals, political parties do it in accordance with the existing constitution. Likewise, to establish a political party, one must meet the requirements set by the electoral body. In Indonesia, the institution that administers general elections is known as the General Elections Commission (KPU).

To find out more about political parties and how to set up a political party, you can see this article regarding how to set up a political party, Sinaumed’s.

Definition of Political Parties

Political party as an organization that coordinates its prospective members who will then compete in a general election in a country. In general, party members already have the same ideas as the political party itself. Then, members of the party also help spread the ideology of the political party he or she joins.

According to the Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI), a political party is an association established to realize a certain political ideology.

In the world of politics, political parties can be regarded as modern organizations that have continued to develop and spread throughout the world in the last few centuries. In a country there are those that have a lot of political parties and there are also those that only consist of a few parties.

Political parties themselves can be said to have quite an important role in a democratic government system, including the state of Indonesia. In addition, political parties also have a role in a country that has an autocratic political system. In this case, the autocracy is a political system that usually consists of only one party.

Political parties themselves can then develop from various kinds of societal divisions, such as divisions between the lower class and the upper class. In addition, political parties sometimes streamline the political decision-making process by encouraging their members to work together.

The structure in this political party consists of party leaders, party advisers, and so on. The party executive is usually in charge of all the administrative work. Meanwhile, members of political parties have a role in assisting the party, up to choosing the party’s own candidates.

History of Indonesian Political Parties

The Boedi Oetomo organization founded by Dr. Wahidin Soedirohoesodo and his friends in 1908 were the origins of political parties in Indonesia. Even though at the beginning of its formation, Boedi Oetomo was not an organization that was involved in pure politics, historical experts agree that the presence of Boedi Oetomo was a forerunner to the establishment of a political organization.

The political party that was first born in Indonesia was a party founded by a triumvirate, namely Dr. Cipto Mangunkusumo, Dr. Setiabudi, and Ki Hajar Dewantara. The first party itself was named Indische Partij. This party was founded on December 25, 1912 in the city of Bandung.

The political parties that were established during the Dutch colonial era were always accompanied by various kinds of feelings of anxiety and also could not live in peace. This was because this party had the main goal of politically overthrowing the Dutch government. In the end, the leaders of the figures from the first party in Indonesia, the three of them were then exiled to Bangka, Kupang, and Banda, until finally they were exiled to the Netherlands, so that the party founded by this triumvirate was only 8 months old.

Since then, various organizations have emerged that dare to engage in politics, namely the PNI or the Indonesian National Party which was founded by Ir. Soekarno as the first president of the Republic of Indonesia. Political parties also have a very large role in the course of the Indonesian nation’s struggle for independence.

Currently, political parties in Indonesia no longer aim to free themselves from colonialism, but aim to free every Indonesian people from various kinds of government problems, including those in the economic, social and various other sectors.

Characteristics of Political Parties

La Palombara and Weiner (1966) then identified several basic characteristics that characterize a political party, namely:

1. Continue to Undergo the Program and its Ideals

Political party organizations are often expected to continue to exist even though their founders are no longer there.

2. Organizational structure

Political parties themselves can only carry out their political functions if they are supported by an organizational structure, from the local to the national level, as well as regular patterns of interaction between the two.

3. Purpose of power

This political party was founded with the aim of gaining and maintaining power.

4. Support

Political parties often receive widespread support from the public. Because this support then becomes a source of legitimacy to rule.

This also shows that political parties must be able to be accepted by the majority of society and be able to mobilize as many elements of society as possible.

Functions of Political Parties

Broadly speaking, the roles and functions of political parties are then divided into two. First, the internal roles and tasks of the organization. Second, roles and functions related to the wider community, nation and state.
Meanwhile, essentially, political parties have the main function of seeking and maintaining power to realize various programs that are based on a particular ideology. In addition to the functions mentioned above, political parties also have the following functions:

1. Public Communication Facilities

According to Sigmund Neumann, political parties are intermediaries that can link social forces and ideologies with official government institutions and link them to political action in a wider political society.

2. Socialization Facilities

The next function of political parties is as a means of socialization. In this case, what is meant by means of socialization is spreading ideology and fighting for the public interest. especially in the public interest.

3. Recruitment Facilities

The third function of political parties is as a means of recruitment. What is meant by recruitment means is carrying out the process of recruiting quality new cadres. That way, the party’s ideology can continue to run and can realize the wishes of the wider community.

4. Political Participation

The next function of political parties is for citizens to participate in political activities. That way, citizens can play a role in determining government policy.

5. Regulatory Means

The function of the last political party is a means as a means of regulation. In this case, what is meant by regulatory means is that political party members can accommodate and also integrate various kinds of input from the public.

Party System

Hague and Harrop (2004) define the party system as the interaction that occurs between political parties, which then gains significant votes. Meanwhile, Maurice Duverger (1954) then divided the party system into three, namely:

1. Single Party System

Although considered irrelevant by some observers, the single-party system is widely recognized and applied to many countries. This system also has a non-competitive nature because all groups must be able to accept the leader of the party and it is not justified to compete with him or even be considered a form of betrayal.

A single party is also a party system in which in a country there is only one largest party that controls all aspects of people’s lives.

2. Dual Party System

The dual-party system can be interpreted as in a country where there are two dominant parties in the acquisition of voting rights. There are three conditions for this system to run smoothly, namely a homogeneous society, a society that has a strong consensus on socio-political principles and objectives, and historical continuity.

3. Multi-party system

This system is then considered to be the most effective political party system in representing the diverse desires of the people and is more compatible with cultural and political plurality when compared to two parties.

Quoting the director general of pp.Kemenkumham.go.id , our constitution then implies that Indonesia implements a multi-party system. This itself is stated in Article 6A (2) of the 1945 Constitution which states that the presidential and vice-presidential pairs are then proposed by a political party or a coalition of political parties. The word ‘joint political parties’ itself means that there are at least two political parties that join together to be able to nominate the president and compete with other candidates carried by other political parties.

How to Establish a Political Party

Referring to Article 2 of Law Number 2 of 2008 concerning Political Parties, in creating a new party there are at least requirements that must be met. Here’s how to set up a political party, including:

1. The party was founded by at least 50 Indonesian Citizens (WNI) aged more than or equal to 21 years and accompanied by a notarial deed.
2. The establishment of the party has accommodated at least 30 percent women’s representation.
3. Parties must also have Statutes (AD), Bylaws (ART), as well as a party management structure at the central level.

The Articles of Association in question are containing information on the principles and characteristics of political parties, such as the vision and mission of political parties, names of political parties, symbols and symbols of political parties, objectives and functions of political parties, organization, place of position, decision-making, management of political parties , regulations and decisions of political parties, political education, and also political party finances.

Quoting from the jdih.kpu.go.id page , political parties are then entitled to take part in elections if they meet the following requirements:

1. Has the status of a legal entity in accordance with the Law on Political Parties.
2. Have management spread throughout Indonesia, at least 75 percent of the number of districts and cities and 50 percent of the number of sub-districts in related districts and cities.
3. Allocating 30 percent of women’s involvement in party management at the central, district, city and provincial levels.
4. Membership of at least 1,000 people or 1: 1,000 of the total population in the relevant regency or city as evidenced by a membership card (KTA) or electronic identity card (KTP).
5. Have permanent offices at the central, provincial, and district or city levels.
6. Submit the party’s name, symbol and image sign to the KPU
7. Submit the account number to the KPU

After fulfilling these requirements, the new political party will be asked for several additional documents to complete the administrative requirements. Then, the KPU will carry out verification and if it has been declared valid and correct, the party can compete in general elections in Indonesia.

Related Books

1. Introduction to Political Parties

This book discusses, among others: the definition of parties, the history of political parties, the legal basis for regulating political parties, the principles of political parties, the ideology of political parties, the functions of political parties, the goals of political parties, the party system, the legal arrangements for the dissolution of political parties, nine political party theses according to Thomas meyer. There are 10 main points of discussion that can be a reference for teachers, researchers and academics as well as politicians in understanding political parties.

2. Factions and Internal Conflicts of Political Parties in Indonesia in the Reformation Era

In this reform era, political parties are often plagued by problems of internal conflict and party divisions. The influential parties that have seats in the national parliament have, without exception, experienced conflict. The party’s internal conflicts, some of which even led to cracks and the formation of new parties.

This situation is of course very unfortunate considering that parties have a central function to recruit important political positions, political communication, political control, and encourage the consolidation of democracy in Indonesia. The question is why internal conflicts and party factionalization often occur, even though, since 2002, laws have been drafted to prevent them.

The Law on Political Parties has specifically regulated party conflict management, and has even made several amendments to perfect it. Another big question is, what are the impacts of various internal conflicts and party splits on party organizations, the party system and democracy in this country. This book thoroughly reviews the causes and effects of the internal conflicts and divisions of political parties that took place during the reform era

3. Political Parties: Dynamics & Institutional Problems in Indonesia

There is no end to the discussion about political parties. The problem of institutionalizing political parties and the post-reform party system still reaps a lot of criticism. The arrangement of the party system in Indonesia which results in an extreme number of political parties not only causes polarization and fragmentation, but is also incompatible with a presidential system.

In addition, political parties in the Reformation era have not yet become public institutions that have responsibility or accountability to their voters. One of the roots is that political parties are still trapped in an oligarchic pattern in the strategic decision-making process.

In the study of political science, the presentation of this book helps students and political science students in developing party insights as well as political patterns in Indonesia. Weaknesses in the institutionalization of political parties are obvious. However, by reading this book, readers will also get answers to the discourse on reforming political parties in Indonesia.

4. Renewal of Political Parties in Indonesia

This book recommends strategies to improve political parties through five key elements. First, the election of the chairman must be more democratic, not based on heredity and have limited power. Second, the determination of candidacy is more open and uses a tiered mechanism to find the right candidates in legislative, regional head, and presidential elections by prioritizing cadres who have worked for the party.

Third, managing the relationship between the central and regional administrators causes divisions down to the regional level. fourth, set up a democratic mechanism in internal party disputes. Fifth, increase the need for party funds so that the party is far from being dominated by “black” money from groups of contributors which leads to the control of the party. The author describes these five things in detail. It is hoped that this book will be read by party leaders and cadres, political and future generations, students and academics.

If you want to find various kinds of books about politics and how to set up political parties, then you can get them at sinaumedia.com . To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information.

Plane Axis of Symmetry – We often find the symmetries of the objects around us. Symmetry is like the exact reflection or mirror image of a line, shape, or object. A line of symmetry can be defined as an axis or an imaginary line that passes through the center of an object and divides it into two identical parts, i.e. it can be vertical, horizontal or diagonal. In addition, there are many forms of this symmetry, there are folding, rotating, and axes of symmetry.

Understanding the Axis of Symmetry in Flat Shapes

There are three main types of symmetry operations, namely reflection, rotation, and translation.

• Reflection (mirroring) is the operation of reflecting an object in a line as a mirror plane.
• Rotation is an operation to rotate an object with a point as the center. An example is an equilateral triangle having rotational symmetry with a rotation angle of 120 degrees.
• Translation is an operation to transform objects from one region to another with a vector. More complicated symmetries are combinations of these operations. Symmetry is widely used in various scientific disciplines such as geometry, mathematics, physics, biology, chemistry, art and so on.

Even if two objects with high similarity appeared together, they should be different. For example, if you rotate an equilateral triangle about its center by 120 degrees, the triangle will appear the same as before the rotation. This rotation in Euclidean geometry results in an unrecognized change. In fact, each corner of an equilateral triangle modeled as a molecule exhibits a different symmetrical behavior.

The object with the most symmetry is empty space because each part can be rotated, reflected or translated without changing. The most common type of symmetry is left-right or mirror-image symmetry which is symbolized by T. This symbol is used to reflect along the vertical axis.

An equilateral triangle exhibits three axes of reflection symmetry, and a rotational symmetry. Rotating the triangle about the center of the triangle by 120 or 240 degrees shows no change. An object that only exhibits rotational symmetry behavior but does not have reflection symmetry is the swastika.

Felix Klein, the German geometer, gave a very influential statement in the Erlangen program in 1872, namely symmetry as a combination and organization of principles in geometry. This gave rise to the group’s new concern in geometry and the slogan transformation of geometry (an aspect of new mathematics, but highly controversial in modern mathematical practices).

The axis of symmetry itself is a line that divides an object or shape into two symmetrical parts in such a way that it will appear that the object on one side will be similar to the mirror image of the other side. This line can divide an object into two parts, four parts, and so on.

In mathematics, the axis of symmetry and optimum value are two things that are usually used in solving quadratic equations and functions. The axis of symmetry itself is the shadow line that divides the two plane shapes equally, while the optimum value is the optimum and minimum value of an equation.

To understand the axis of symmetry and the optimum value in quadratic function equations, see the explanation in this article. Make sure you read it to the end, okay!

Geometry in Dimensions

Geometry in two dimensions is a form that is two dimensions, which means that the building only involves length and width.

• A square, which is a two-dimensional flat shape formed by four ribs (a) that are the same length and has four angles, all of which are right angles. This shape is also known as a square.
• Rectangle, which is a two-dimensional flat shape formed by two pairs of sides, each of which is the same length and parallel to its partner, and has four angles, all of which are right angles.
• A triangle, that is a polygon with three ends and three vertices. It is one of the basic shapes in geometry. The triangle with vertices A, B, and C is denoted △ABC. In Euclidean geometry, every three points, when non-collinear, define a unique triangle and, at the same time, a unique plane (i.e., two-dimensional Euclidean space). In other words, there is only one plane containing the triangle, and each triangle is contained in several planes. If the entire geometry is just Euclidean planes, there is only one plane and all the triangles are contained within it. However, in higher dimensional Euclidean space, this is no longer true.
• Trapezoid, which is a two-dimensional flat shape formed by four edges, two of which are parallel to each other, but not the same length. A trapezoid is a type of quadrilateral that has special characteristics.
• A parallelogram or parallelogram (English: parallelogram ) is a two-dimensional plane shape formed by two pairs of edges, each of which is the same length and parallel to its partner, and has two pairs of angles, each of which is equal to the angle opposite it. A parallelogram is a derivative of a quadrilateral which has special characteristics. A parallelogram with four edges of the same length is called a rhombus.
• Circle, which is a shape consisting of all points in a plane that are a certain distance from a certain point, the center; the equivalent is the curve traced by a point moving in a plane, so that its distance from a given point is constant. The distance between any point of the circle and the center is called the radius. Specifically, a circle is a simple closed curve that divides the plane into two regions, namely the interior and exterior. In everyday usage, the term “circle” can be used interchangeably to refer to the boundaries of the image, or the entire image including its interior; in strict technical usage, the circle is just the boundary and the whole image is called a disc. Circles can also be defined as a special type of ellipse; the two foci coincide and the eccentricity is 0,
• A regular ellipse or oval is a figure that resembles a circle that has been extended in one direction. An ellipse is an example of a conic section and can be defined as the locus of all points in a plane that have the same sum of distances from two predetermined fixed points (called foci). In Indonesian, regular ellipses or ovals are also known as equivalent terms, namely ellipses (or just ovals), oblong circles, and ellipses.

How to Determine the Symmetry Axis of Plane and Optimum Value

1. Axis of Symmetry

Symmetry means balance between left and right or top and bottom. An example of an object or shape of symmetry: if we draw a line from the head, nose, mouth and navel downwards, it will be seen that the right and left sides are the same. There is a right eye and a left eye, a right ear and a left ear, a right hand and a left hand, a right foot and a left foot, and so on.

If a shape when folded the sides coincide exactly, the shape has fold symmetry. The fold marks are called the fold axes of symmetry. The number of fold symmetries is equal to the number of axes of symmetry. A shape that can be folded into two equal parts and coincides exactly is called a symmetrical shape.

Meanwhile, quoted from a book entitled Mathematics Genius Class 5 SD written by Sulis Sutrisna, the axis of symmetry is a line drawn in a flat plane, so that it can divide that plane into two equal and congruent parts. The axis of symmetry in the graph of a quadratic function functions as a line of reflection from a point on the graph of the quadratic function.

Symmetry features, namely:

• Has fold symmetry.
• It can be folded or divided into two equal parts.

How to determine the axis of symmetry? Here’s an example of how to determine the axis of symmetry.

2. Optimum Value

According to Yuliansyah in a book entitled Mathematics Teaching Materials Supporting Book , the optimum value is the maximum value (maximum) or the smallest value (minimum). The maximum and/or minimum values ​​are commonly known as the objective form, objective function, objective function, or objective function.

The optimum value in the quadratic function can be found using the following calculation formula.

y = -D/4a

Number of Symmetry Axis Plane Shape

The number of axes of symmetry for a flat shape is as follows.

Two-dimentional figure	Symmetry Axis
Circle	infinite
Parallelogram	do not have
Trapezoid isosceles	1
Right angled trapezoids and any trapezoids	do not have
Rectangle	2
Equilateral triangle	3
Isosceles triangle	1
Any triangle	do not have
Rectangle	4
Cut the rice cake	2
Kite	1

Do you still remember the number of axes of symmetry from the shape above? One thing that must be understood is that the axis of symmetry definitely divides a flat shape into two, three, four and so on. That way, you will know better without having to memorize the number of axes of symmetry of a flat shape.

Parabolic Axis of Symmetry

The graph of a quadratic function will look like a parabola. The parabola’s axis of symmetry is the vertical line that divides the parabola into two congruent or equal parts. The axis of symmetry always passes through the apex of the parabola. The x-coordinate of the vertex is the equation of the parabola’s axis of symmetry.

We can identify a line of symmetry graphically by simply finding the point farthest from the curve of the parabola. This is called the apex, the point where the two lines are connected. If the parabola is a hill, the highest point on the hill will represent the apex of the parabola. If the parabola is a valley, the lowest point in the valley will represent the apex of the parabola. However, if you go through a quadratic function, there is a formula you should know.

Parabola Symmetry Axis Formula

For a quadratic function in standard form, y = ax² + bx + c, the axis of symmetry is the vertical line.

Examples of Symmetry Axis and Optimum Value Problems

To understand how to determine the axis of symmetry and the optimum value, see the example problem and how to solve it below.

Example Question 1

Find the axis of symmetry from the graph y = x² − 6x + 5!

Solution:

As already mentioned, for a quadratic function y = ax² + bx + c, the axis of symmetry is the vertical line 

 

a = 1, b = −6 and c = 5.

If entered into the formula will be as follows.

 

 

 

 

Example Problem 2

If you know the quadratic function: f(x) = 4x 2 8x + 3, what is the axis of symmetry, the optimum value and the optimum point of the function?

Solution:

Given the quadratic function: f(x) = 4x 2 8x + 3

Determine the axis of symmetry (x value):

The axis of symmetry can be calculated by the formula x = – b/2a:
x= -b/2a
x = – (-8)/2 (4)
x = 1

Finding the optimum value:

The optimum value can be determined by calculating y = -D/4a or entering a value for x. Here’s how to find the optimum value by entering the value of x.

f (x) = – b2-4ac/4a
f(1) = -8^2-4(4) (3)/ 4(4)
y = -1

Determining the optimum point:

The optimum point is the point that lies at one of the extreme points (corner points) of the settlement area. The optimum point can be determined after the x and y values ​​have been found.
The optimum point of the equation f(x) = 4x 2 8x + 3 is (1,-1).

Example Problem 3

A fashion company wants to produce x-cut trousers. The required production costs are expressed by the function f(x) = 3×2 –30x+175 in hundreds of thousands of rupiah. What is the minimum cost required to produce shirts?

Solution:

It is known that the function f(x) = 3×2 –30x+175, value a = 3, which means a > 0, so the parabola opens upwards. So, the function f(x) = 3x 2–30x+175 has a minimum value.

Determining the axis of symmetry (x value):

Finding the value of x using the equation x = -b/2a will yield:
x = -b/2a
x = – (-30)/ 2. 3
x = 30/6
x = 5.
Value of x is 5.

Determining the optimum value:

The optimum value in this case the minimum cost of the function f(x) = 3x 2 – 30x + 175 can be calculated by plugging the value of x into the function. The result is as follows.
f(x) = 3x 2-30x+175
f(5) = 3. 5^2 – 30(5) + 175
y = 100 (in hundreds of thousands of rupiah).
The minimum cost to produce x pants is IDR 10,000,000.

Example Problem 4

Check out the picture below!

The line which is the axis of symmetry is …
A. p line
B. q line
C. r line
D. s line

Discussion:
Answer B.
The line q is the axis of symmetry, which is the line that divides a figure into two equal parts.

Example Problem 5

Check out the picture below!

The number of axes of symmetry in the figure is . . .
A. 8
B. 4
C. 2
D. 1

Discussion:
Answer A.
The axis of symmetry is the line that divides a shape into two equal parts.

Example Problem 6

Determine the axis of symmetry and the optimum value of f(x) = -2x² + 3x + 4.

Discussion:

f(x) = -2x² + 3x + 4
a = -2
b = 3
c = 4
D = b² – 4ac = 3² – 4(-2)(4) = 9 + 32 = 41

Symmetry axis:

x _p = -b/(2a) = -3/2(-2) = 3/4

Optimum value:

y _p = -D/(4a) = -41/4(-2) = 41/8

Example Problem 7

Determine the equation of the axis of symmetry and the optimum value of the following quadratic function.
y = – x2 ⁺  2x

Discussion:

It is known:
a = –1 , b = 2 and c = 0
The equation of the axis of symmetry of the function is x = – b/2.a
x = –2/2. (–1) = –2/–2
x = 1
So, the equation of the axis of symmetry is x = 1.
For the value x = 1, the function value is y = – 1 ²  + 2. 1 = –1 + 2 = 1
Because a = –1 < 0 (negative), the maximum value of the function is 1.
It is called the maximum (largest) value because there is no value for the function that is greater than 1. It
can be seen for this problem by calculating the value of the function for x = –b /2a , the computation is simpler.

—

Such is the meaning of the axis of symmetry and also the formula for finding the axis of symmetry from a parabolic graph. If you are interested in learning material about this axis of symmetry or various other forms of material, you can study with sinaumedia.

Book Recommendations & Related Articles

sinaumedia Literacy – Many college majors are so tempting to take. Many famous campuses are interesting to enter. Or do you even feel you don’t want anything because you don’t know where it fits? Choosing a college major is one of the most important decisions in life. Because it will help you be more motivated in going through the lecture process such as doing assignments, completing thesis, as well as having fun in learning which will lead you to various achievements leading to the best career prospects in the future. Besides that, it is very important to think about the majors and universities you are going to in advance because it will make it easier for you to know what grades are needed to achieve them.

How to determine the appropriate course major

Consider carefully before deciding, don’t make the wrong choice. What’s more, you know, most 2nd semester students just realized this mistake. This is evidenced in a scientific publication from Educational Psychologist by Integrity Development Flexibility (IDF) Irene Guntur, M.Psi., Psi., CGA, that around 87% of Indonesian students have the wrong major. In order not to be one of them, here are some tips you can do to determine the most appropriate college major for you Sinaumed’s, Check these out!

 

1. KNOW YOUR PASSION THROUGH ACHIEVEMENT

Check your grades again at school. What subjects always get the best grades? From here, you can search for study programs related to that value. Another alternative is that you can see the achievements you have achieved in other fields besides school studies. For example, if you have a talent for drawing, then you can choose majors related to drawing, such as Visual Communication Design (DKV), Fine Arts, and others.

Choosing a college major that suits your interests will make you go through your college life happily. Piling up college assignments won’t feel like a burden if you’re really interested in doing Sinaumed’s.

In choosing the right major, you must first find as much information as possible about a major. Like if you are interested in the world of broadcasting, the book What Courses? Broadcasting majors can be the right choice to get to know more about this major.

2. FIND MAJORS ACCORDING TO PERSONALITY

Besides passion, it turns out that personality has an important role in determining your college major. In fact, it is also one of the factors that make someone successful in their field. Here are some personalities that will help you determine your major in college, including:

• Be Realistic
• Thinker
• Artistic and creative
• Helper Spirit
• Like to communicate and easily make friends
• Always Organized
• Love teaching
• Good understanding of Political Science
• Follow Business Development
• Interested in Languages
• Interested in Fashion
• Interested in History
• Interested in Psychology

For example, if you have an artistic and creative spirit, you can enter your two personalities into the Visual Communication Design major, this also applies to other traits. Match personality and majors that would suit your personality. In this case, also understand your abilities, if you want to become a doctor but do not have qualified skills in science subjects, it will certainly complicate your steps going forward. Look at your own potential better before choosing the right Graduation major in Sinaumed’s.

 

3. PSYCHOTES TESTS

Psychological tests can be one of the references in determining a suitable college major. Even though it’s not 100% effective at reading potential and character, it can be used as a reference for how to determine the right college major. This test will help you analyze your interests, values, character, strengths, weaknesses, to the scale of your abilities in the arts or social fields, as well as in terms of investigating and interpreting things. Not only that, several personality tests will also show interest, suitable career fields, to the work style that suits you.

There are many free online personality tests on the internet such as: “What should I major in quiz” by Loyola, “College major personality quiz” from ThoughtCo, and even personality tests like the Myers & Briggs MBTI Personality Type Test.. From there, it can help you. provides an overview of personality and what majors are right for you, Sinaumed’s.

Before taking the psychological test, Sinaumed’s can also study and train themselves first through various sample questions that can be obtained through the Smart Guide to Passing Psychotest.

 

4. DON’T VOTE JUST BECAUSE OF FINANCIAL PROSPECTS

The essence of education is no longer to prepare oneself for the world of work so that one can get established quickly. Maybe this view is still relevant in the days of our parents who had minimal opportunities. But now, you can be whatever you want as long as you want to fight for it. Therefore do not make money as a reference. Education exists to develop all intellectual potential and capacity so that you can develop according to what you really want. Education allows you to see the problems around you in a more precise way, and allows you to solve them in the most efficient way. When you enjoy the learning process, luck will follow Sinaumed’s.

 

5. DON’T RUSH, ASK FOR THE OPINION OF THE NEAREST PEOPLE

Give Yourself Time and Ask for Help, reading various references makes you more dizzy and stressed? Relax for a moment. Inhale, exhale, relax. Get rid of the laptop and cellphone that you use for surfing first to find the right direction. It’s a good idea to go out and talk to lots of people. Because when you find it difficult to decide or want to know more about the major that is considered right for you, there’s nothing wrong with asking for advice from people who are more experienced in that field. Apart from having experienced this field, they will also have a better understanding of career prospects in the department concerned. Ask this question to students in semester 6, people who work according to that department, lecturers or your Sinaumed’s teacher. The opinions of other people are also important considerations to see different points of view. Who knows, they may have other directions that can add references to choosing the right major for you, Sinaumed’s.

 

6. IDENTIFY OTHER PROBLEMS THAT MAY BE FACED

Who says we have to look at the positive side all the time? Sometimes we also have to see a problem to know how to solve it. For example, when you have chosen a major and a university. After digging up all the things about the department and campus, you have to know the other effects that will be caused, so you can be prepared to deal with them. For example, you understand that in that area the cost of living is expensive and maybe your parents will find it difficult to support you. That way you have to accept the consequences, namely working part-time to make a living while studying at Sinaumed’s.

 

7. CONSIDER EMPLOYMENT PROSPECTS

One way to determine the right major is to consider future job prospects. What are your career goals? Who do you want to be like? Become a software engineer, digital marketer, or designer? You must explore your inner motivation first before deciding which major to choose. Because, motivation will really help you get through all the obstacles that might make you lazy to go to college, lazy to do assignments, and finally leave campus. Ask these 3 things before choosing a Sinaumed’s major!

 

• Will this major lead you to a job that is currently in great demand in the industrial world? In addition to choosing based on interests, talents, and abilities. Seeing job opportunities from the major you choose is also important. If the job opportunities from your major feel narrow, try to determine another major as a backup and compare.
• Is the number of competitors in the college major not enough?
• What is the salary for this type of work in the major?
• Look at job prospects for the next 5 years. In the current era of globalization, you also have to be smart in following and understanding the direction of change in the world. This includes choosing a major in college. What is trending in the world and Indonesia is currently one of the benchmarks when continuing education. But also pay attention to whether this trend will last in the next 5-10 years? So that when you finish college, there are many jobs ready to accommodate you, Sinaumed’s.

 

8. AVOID JOINING

Indeed, adaptation to campus will feel awkward without friends from previous high school. But think again, it’s you who will live your college life, your parents also spend money on your college. Don’t be afraid to choose a major that suits your interests and abilities even if you don’t know anyone, because of course you will make new friends later. So there’s no need to feel afraid and lonely, let alone let this fear lead you in the wrong direction.

9. CHOOSE THE RIGHT CAMPUS

Not everyone is given the opportunity to enter a prestigious campus. Even though getting into a famous campus will give you many advantages. Sometimes there are companies that open job vacancies with certain college requirements. Even though it’s not even written down, usually when selecting, alumni of major colleges will be made a priority. The number of predecessors who have entered the world of work can also help careers. For example, a new graduate who is looking for work accidentally meets a former senior who is already working. There is a possibility that he will be assisted or found a connection. Therefore it is very important to choose the right campus, because of course it is very proud if we graduate from the best university, but of course this is not something that is easy to get. It takes hard work as well as good academic skills to get into the best universities, so prepare yourself as early as possible. Because if you are going to major from your favorite university, then you must be prepared to have hundreds or even thousands of rivals in fighting over college seats there, Sinaumed’s!

 

10. DIPLOMA OR GRADUATE?

Diploma and bachelor graduates will certainly have different job opportunities, where these opportunities will really depend on the workplace you are going to go to later. If you want to work as a teacher, it is impossible to take a diploma level. On the other hand, if you intend to become a financial staff member in a company, it would be best if you choose an accounting diploma. Nothing is better than one another, either a diploma or a bachelor’s degree both have their advantages and disadvantages. There is no need to force yourself to become a scholar, if indeed the intended career can be achieved with a diploma, this also applies vice versa.

 

11. CONSIDER LOCATION AND COST

College will be different from school, most likely you will be out of town or even abroad and going to college far from your parents. You have to be prepared for risks like this. Campus location is a very important thing to consider, but this won’t be a problem if you are prepared from the start to study away from your parents. Don’t choose a university just because it is close to where you live, choose the best university with majors that suit your interests. Also consider tuition fees. When choosing a major, cost is often an obstacle that cannot be ignored. Moreover, if you choose to study outside your current city of residence. Of course you will need more money, both for boarding houses and other daily needs. However, don’t let the cost be an obstacle for you to study at the department or university of your dreams. You can go to college while working part-time or look for scholarships to offset your tuition fees.

 

12. HAVE OPTIONS

Optimism is a feeling that must be owned by every individual. However, in choosing a major everyone must be realistic about the failures that might be faced. Therefore, it is highly recommended to prepare at least 2 college majors and campuses to be chosen. The goal is to prevent yourself from becoming unemployed because you don’t pass the selection at your main campus, Sinaumed’s. To further finalize your intention, for those of you who have several choices of majors, do a little research by comparing the pluses and minuses when choosing that major. Try asking yourself again, and settle your heart after going through various comparisons and excuses.

 

13. FIGHT 100%

If you have determined the major you want, the last step is to make maximum preparations and fight in SBMPTN, manage your study time as well as possible (There’s nothing wrong with trying to find questions for the SBMPTN exam beforehand and study them carefully. The SBMPTN exam questions have a different pattern. not much different from year to year so if you are familiar with the questions then you will have no trouble doing it). If your results are not accepted, don’t immediately get discouraged and pessimistic. There are still other paths you can try. You can try the independent route or enroll in a private university. Private universities also have quality that is no less good than PTN, you know.

 

WHAT IF ACCEPTED AT PTN BUT NOT FROM PASSION?

Not infrequently there are those who are accepted at PTN but don’t get the chosen major. Returning to the first point, going to college that is not in accordance with your calling will have a negative psychological impact which will then impact your GPA and decrease your enthusiasm for studying every day. Indeed, the Selection for State Universities goes through a very strict process, with a limited quota. But studying at a public university is not a guarantee of success or failure in one’s career. Whether studying in private or public schools, if you are serious about it and want to try, you can definitely get Sinaumed’s.

Be happy with the major you choose. If you are still confused about choosing a major that suits your interests and talents, try to list some of the closest majors. After that, you can cross out the most inappropriate majors one by one until you are left with the majors that you might choose. The key to finding is not rushing.

Various tips to help you in dealing with these difficult times can be found in the Anti-stress Book: How to Stay Relaxed When Everything Is Chaotic.

Also pay attention to the credibility of the information you get. Then, follow the right choice according to your calling. That way, whatever the outcome will be is part of your decision. The challenges that confront you will be lived as a form of responsibility to yourself and your parents. Excited search! Good luck finding Sinaumed’s soon!

How to Determine Main Idea  – In writing an essay, it is important to have a main idea or main idea that becomes the core message of a piece of writing. With the main idea, information and messages to be conveyed to the reader will be more focused.

The information conveyed can also vary, ranging from information for education, inspiration, to recreation or entertainment. The following is an explanation of the main idea and how to determine it.

Definition of Main Idea

Based on the meaning according to the Big Indonesian Dictionary, an idea is a design that is arranged in thoughts, ideas, and ideals.

Meanwhile, according to the Big Indonesian Dictionary, the main meaning is a basic plan that is arranged in the mind which is the main thought of a paragraph in writing.

The main idea or what is often referred to as the main idea, main idea, or main idea is a main idea or design that the author tries to convey as the subject of a discussion in a paragraph.

Kinds of Paragraphs in Determining the Main Idea

In a paragraph, you will usually find the main idea or main idea which, based on its location, is divided into the following.

1. Deductive Paragraph

In deductive paragraphs, we can find the main idea or main idea at the beginning of the paragraph. The main idea or main idea will be stated first then followed by an explanatory sentence as a supporting sentence.

For example, everyone will be tested with everything they have. What if that person has knowledge, then he will be given a test on how to use that knowledge. Unlike the case with people who have wealth, then he will be given a test how to use this wealth for himself and also for others.

In the paragraph above, we can see that the first sentence is the main sentence, with the main idea being a test for everyone.

2. Inductive Paragraph

In inductive paragraphs, we can find the main idea or main idea at the end of the paragraph. Explanatory sentences as supporting sentences will be expressed first and then end with the main idea or main idea of ​​a paragraph.

For example, everyone will definitely do something that causes sin, but if that thing keeps happening and that person doesn’t want to change and repent, so they do it over and over again, that’s a bad impact.

What if we think of it as poison in the body, if we keep drinking it, our health will be disturbed, and the body will get weaker and eventually we will get sick.

This illustrates, big and small sins if done continuously will have a bad impact on us.

In the paragraph above, we can see that the main sentence is at the end of the paragraph, and the main idea is the bad effects of a sin.

3. Mixed Paragraphs

In mixed paragraphs, we can find the main idea or main idea at the beginning and at the end of the paragraph. Usually the final sentence is used to emphasize the main idea or main idea in the initial sentence.

Main Idea Characteristics

In general, the main idea in a paragraph has the following characteristics.

1. Have explanatory sentences or supporting sentences to explain the main idea in a paragraph.
2. Usually there is an explanation or reason that supports the main idea.
3. The main idea serves as the core of a paragraph and is usually the center of discussion.

Steps to Determine the Main Idea

In finding the main idea or main idea in a paragraph, you can follow the following steps which can help you find the main idea in a paragraph.

1. Reading the entire paragraph, the first thing to do is to read an existing paragraph properly.
2. Mark the important words in a paragraph, after reading the paragraph as a whole, then you can mark the words that you think are important which are the core of a paragraph.
3. Recognizing the difference between main sentences and explanatory sentences, in a paragraph as described above, usually the main idea or main idea will be found at the beginning or end of the paragraph. So you have to focus more on these parts first.
4. Conclude the paragraph, after determining the important words. You can conclude a paragraph which can then be used as the main idea or main idea.

Examples of Main Ideas in a Paragraph

1. Example 1

Trees provide various benefits for humans and other living things. Trees are useful as a source of food, medicine and industrial materials. One of the most important roles of trees for humans and all living things is that trees are a producer of fresh air in the world.

The main idea of ​​the paragraph above is, the benefits of trees for the health of living things.

Based on the paragraphs above, we can see that the first sentence is the main sentence of the paragraph, and the other sentences are useful as explanatory sentences for the existing main sentences. As we can see from the sentence “Trees are useful as a source of food, medicine and industrial materials.” which indicates that trees provide various benefits.

2. Example 2

The mud flood disaster caused by the collapse of the Situ Gintung embankment, located in South Tangerang, has caused various kinds of diseases to the people around there. Some of the diseases caused by the mud flood disaster are diarrhea, dengue fever, typhus, and leptospirosis.

The main idea of ​​the paragraph above is that floods cause various kinds of diseases.

Based on the paragraphs above, we can see that the first sentence is the main sentence of the paragraph, and the other sentences are useful as explanatory sentences for the existing main sentences.

As we can see from the sentence “Some of the diseases caused by the mud flood disaster are diarrhea, dengue fever, typhus, and leptospirosis.” which explains various examples of diseases that can be caused by a flood that occurs.

3. Example 3

Many types of companies are currently in dire need of IT personnel to keep up with the times that are happening. So lately the need for developer workers is needed. Therefore, many millennials take advantage of this opportunity to become a professional developer.

The main idea of ​​the paragraph above is the opportunity to become a professional developer.

Based on the paragraphs above, we can see that the final sentence is the main sentence of the paragraph, and the sentence that comes before the final sentence becomes the explanatory sentence for the main sentence. We can see this through how the initial sentences explain the reasons for the great opportunity to become a professional developer.

4. Example 4

When someone thinks too much about the problem, it will make that person sadder. In addition, rather than dragging on in sadness, it’s better to focus on solving the problem. There is no need to think about and exaggerate the problem, but keep your spirits up and ask for help from people you can trust. That’s how to overcome sadness if you are experiencing problems.

The main idea of ​​the paragraph above is, how to overcome sadness.

Based on the paragraphs above, we can see that the final sentence is the main sentence of the paragraph, and the sentence that comes before the final sentence becomes the explanatory sentence for the main sentence. We can see this through how the initial sentence is an explanation of how to deal with sadness when experiencing problems, while the final sentence is the title of the methods described.

5. Example 5

One day, Jennie was playing basketball with her best friend Aldi on the court in front of her house. Even though Jennie is a woman, this does not prevent her from playing the male game. For him, all games are the same, not limited by a gender, as long as the game is fun for him.

The main idea of ​​the paragraph above is, Jennie’s favorite game.

Based on the paragraphs above, we can see that the final sentence is the main sentence of the paragraph, and the sentence that comes before the final sentence becomes the explanatory sentence for the main sentence. We can see this through how the initial sentence tells an event to explain Jennie’s favorite game.

6. Example 6

Addiction to pornography can damage the brain. The brain of pornography addicts will be continuously stimulated which causes excessive production of dopamine and endorphins. Under normal conditions, these substances can be useful for people on the move. However, it is different from the case of pornography addicts. Where the brain will experience excessive stimulation, which in the long term can make the brain smaller and eventually damaged.

The main idea of ​​the paragraph above is that pornography addiction can damage the brain.

Based on the paragraphs above, we can see that the first sentence is the main sentence of the paragraph, and the other sentences are useful as explanatory sentences for the existing main sentences.

As we can see that the first sentence is the core of another explanatory sentence which helps to explain why pornography addiction can damage the brain itself.

7. Example 7

Pigeons have various types of colors, which consist of brown, black, white, and sometimes a mixture of these colors. Pigeons have a kind of sensor on their noses that they can use to identify their home. That is why doves that have flown away can return to their homes without hindrance. Pigeons generally eat grains such as rice, corn, and many more.

The main idea of ​​the paragraph above is the diversity of pigeons.

Based on the paragraphs above, we can see that the first sentence is the main sentence of the paragraph, and the other sentences are useful as explanatory sentences for the existing main sentences.

As we can see that the main sentence explains the various colors of the dove followed by a brief explanation of the dove itself.

8. Example 8

Insomnia can be caused by various factors. Insomnia or what is meant by sleep disturbances is generally caused by anxiety or a burden on one’s mind, other things that cause insomnia are working late into the night, uncomfortable bed conditions, and other habits.

The main idea of ​​the paragraph above is, the causes of insomnia.

Based on the paragraphs above, we can see that the first sentence is the main sentence of the paragraph, and the other sentences are useful as explanatory sentences for the existing main sentences.

As we can see that the main sentence states that insomnia is caused by various causal factors, which are then explained in the explanatory sentence.

9. Example 9

Plastic waste can harm the environment if disposed of carelessly. This is because plastic is not a material that can decompose. This means that plastic cannot be recycled naturally. If plastic is dumped into waters, both seas and rivers, it can disrupt the ecosystems in it because animals can accidentally consume plastic that has broken down into microplastics.

The main idea of ​​the paragraph above is, the dangers of plastic waste for the environment.

Based on the paragraphs above, we can see that the first sentence is the main sentence of the paragraph, and the other sentences are useful as explanatory sentences for the existing main sentences. As we can see, the supporting sentences explain the dangers of plastic waste for aquatic ecosystems which are the core of the main sentence.

10. Example 10

Influenza is an illness caused by a viral outbreak that can easily be transferred to other people. Influenza is spread by direct contact between one person and another. According to existing findings, the influenza virus is more susceptible to areas with high humidity levels such as North America and Europe during winter, as well as tropical countries during the rainy season.

The main idea of ​​the paragraph above is, the spread of influenza.

• Based on the paragraphs above, we can see that the first sentence is the main sentence of the paragraph, and the other sentences are useful as explanatory sentences for the existing main sentences. As we can see that the main sentence describes the spread of the influenza virus, which is supported by an explanatory sentence explaining how the spread of the virus can occur.

Also read articles related to “How to Determine Main Ideas” :

• Scientific papers
• Example of a book review
• Definition of short stories
• Meaning of Poetry
• Definition of Non-Fiction Stories
• Characteristics of short stories
• Definition of Poetry

Conclusion

The main idea or main idea is the core of a paragraph in writing. In writing an essay, it is important to know the main idea that becomes a message to be conveyed to the reader so that the essay written has a correlation between one sentence and another.

In addition, when working on a given problem or finding out the main idea of ​​a paragraph, you can first read it in its entirety so that you understand the essence of the story first which can make it easier for you to find the main idea or main idea.

Well, that’s an explanation of the main idea or main idea of ​​a paragraph. As we can see that in general the location of the main idea or main idea is at the beginning of a sentence or the end of a sentence in a paragraph. However, it is possible that the main idea can be found in both, which is referred to as a mixed paragraph.

If Sinaumed’s has an interest or wants to practice how to find main ideas or main ideas in a paragraph, you can start from various essays, both novels, story books, and many more which you can only get at www.sinaumedia.com as #Friends Without Limits for Sinaumed’s to grow. Hope it is useful!

The book entitled Social Structure and Political System of the Toba Batak until 1945, written by Bungaran Antonius Simanjuntak, contains information about a collection of questions including exercises to find the main idea or main idea in an essay.

Author : Andrew

How to Convert Ordinary Fractions into Decimals – In how to convert ordinary fractions into decimals it is not difficult. To find out how to change ordinary fractions into decimals, we can use long division, multiplication, or even a calculator if you want to calculate faster. After mastering and understanding how, we will be able to easily convert fractions into decimals.

There are several methods for converting ordinary fractions into decimals, namely:

 

Method 1 – By Long Division

1. Write the denominator outside the left side of the divider symbol and the numerator inside the right side of the divider symbol.

For example, we want to convert 4/5 to decimal. Write a “5” to the left of the divisor and the number “5” to the right of the divider. “5” is the number that divides and “4” is the number that is divisible.

2. Write “0”, then a decimal point or comma, above the divisor. Since what is being calculated is a fractional part, the result will be less than one, so this step is very important. Next, write a decimal point, then a “0,” after the “4” to the right of the divisor. Even though “4” is the same as “4.0”, the zeros make “4.0” divisible by “5”.

3. Calculate the result using long division. With this division, you can ignore the decimal point, so you only need to calculate 40 divided by 5.

Here’s how:

• First, divide 4.0, which is considered 40, by 5. The product of 5 that is closest to 40 is 5 x 8 = 40 so that “40” is divisible by “5”.
• “40” divided by “5” equals “8”. So, write an “8” after the “0,” above the divisor so that the result is “0.8.”

4. Write down the final answer. So, “4” divided by “5” equals “0.8”. Write down the answers and you’re done.

 

You can learn about Mathematics Learning Media with Geogebra
by Prof. Dr. H. Nanang Priatna, M.Pd and Muhammad Arsani, S.Pd., M.Pd.

 

Method 2 – Fractions that Return Repeating Decimals

1. Write long division. To begin long division, we may not be able to predict if the result will be a repeating decimal. for example, we convert the common fraction 1/3 into decimal form. Write 3, or the denominator, to the left of the divisor and 1 to the right of the divisor.

2. Write the number 0, then a decimal point or comma above the divisor. Since the result will definitely be less than 1, this step will prepare the answer to be written in decimal form. The decimal point also needs to be written to the right of the number “1” which is located on the right side of the divider symbol.

• Divide 10 by 3. 3 times 3 gives 9, leaving 1. So, write 3 to the right of the “0,” at the top of the divisor and subtract 10 from 9, which leaves 1 in the end.
• Write the number “0” to the right of the number “1” on the bottom so that you get another “10”. When repeating dividing “10” by “3” the same process is repeated: write the number “3” to the right of the first “3” at the top of the divider and subtract the new “10” from the number “9” .
• Continue until a pattern is formed. The division on this number can go on forever. 10 continues to be divided by 3, there will always be a remainder “1” below and a new “3” after the decimal point above the divisor symbol.

• There are lots of fractions that have repeating decimal results, for example 2/9 (“0.2” where the “2” keeps repeating), 5/6 (“0.83” where the “3” keeps repeating) , or 7/9 (“0.7” with the repeated “7”). This pattern will always occur if the denominator is a multiple of 3 and the numerator cannot be divided completely by the number of the denominator.

 

You can learn about SMA/MA Interactive Books Kl.10 Mathematics Specialization Smt.2 Rev.
by Miyanto, Nur Aksin, Suparno

Method 3 – With Multiplication

1. Find a number that can be multiplied by the denominator in the fraction to give 10, 100, 1,000, or whatever number is in the group of 10. This can be an easy way to convert fractions to decimal without using long division methods or a calculator . First, just find a number that can be multiplied by the denominator of the fraction to get 10, 100, 1,000, and so on. The trick is to divide by 10 first, then 100, then 1,000, and so on by the denominator until you get a result that is an integer.

Example:

• 3/5. 10/5 = 2. 2 is an integer. 2 can be multiplied by 5 to make 10. So 2 can be used.
• 3/4. 10/4 = 2.5. 2.5 is not an integer. 100/4 = 25. 25 is an integer. 25 can be multiplied by 4 to get 100. So 25 can be used.
• 5/16. 10/16 = 0.625, 100/16 = 6.25, 1000/16 = 62.5, 10000/16 = 625. 625 is the first integer found. 625 can be multiplied by 16 to get 10,000. thus, the number 625 can be used.

2. Multiply the numerator and denominator of the fraction with the integer that was obtained from the previous step. This step is quite easy, just multiply the numbers above and below the fraction with the integer that was obtained in the first step. Example:

• 3/5 x 2/2 = 6/10
• 3/4 x 25/25 = 75/100
• 5/16 x 625/625 = 3,125/10,000

• 3/5 = 6/10 = 0.6
• 3/4 = 75/100 = 0.75
• 5/16 = 3.125/10,000 = 0.3125

 

You can learn about the Mathematics Dictionary
by Mugy Mustamant

Method 4 – By using the Calculator

1. This method will look young. Divide the numerator by the denominator. Just use a calculator to divide the number in the quantifier, the number at the top of the fraction by the denominator, the number at the bottom of the fraction. For example, we want to convert 3/4 to a decimal. Just hit the number “3”, then the division symbol (“÷’”), then the number “4”, and finally the equal sign (“=”). Then you will see the results

2. Write down the answers you get. The answer is 0.75. So, the decimal form of the usual fraction 3/4 is 0.75.

Book Recommendations & Related Articles

 

How to Choose the Right Broker – When it comes to investing, maybe there will be lots of terms that we often hear, one of which is broker. In general, the definition of a broker is an individual or an agency that mediates or represents an intermediary in trading securities in the capital market. The term broker is something that is quite close to the world of stocks. Not a few also call it the term broker. However, what exactly does the broker mean? What are the duties of a broker that are closely related to investments and stocks?

In this article, we will discuss in more detail the definition of a broker and its various types as well as how to choose the right and trusted broker.

Definition of Broker

The definition of a broker is a party that brings issuers together with investors to carry out buying and selling trades in the capital market. In English, brokers are also known as brokers. Where this broker can be said to be a broker in terms of investment. The individuals involved in this brokerage firm must have fairly high professional standards. They must have passed the Broker-Dealer Representative exam or WPPE and also have a CFA certificate or Certified Financial Analyst.

BAPPEBTI or the Commodity Futures Trading Supervisory Agency is a government-owned institution under the auspices of the Indonesian Ministry of Trade which has the task of supervising and also regulating futures trading in Indonesia. BAPPEBTI will supervise all activities that occur in the brokerage company. This government-owned supervisory agency has direct responsibility to the Minister of Trade or the Minister of Trade.

This supervision is carried out so that activities run in accordance with the provisions of the applicable law.

Meanwhile, the definition of a broker according to the OJK or the Financial Services Authority is an intermediary in trading who is appointed and also sworn in, in entering into an agreement, the intermediary acts for and on behalf of the security by receiving a provision. They do not have a regular working relationship with the broker or broker.

Broadly speaking, the definition of a broker is an individual or company that acts as an intermediary for buying and selling shares in the capital market or futures trading between issuers and investors.

Broker Duty

It can be said that the broker’s most important task is to assist investors in conducting transactions in the capital market. The broker’s main job is to act as a transaction intermediary, which will definitely help investors when they don’t have time to keep an eye on their assets all the time. A broker or company must carry out their duties in accordance with predetermined exchange ethics. The following are some of the broker’s duties, including:

1. Connecting Issuers with Investors

As financiers or fund owners, investors look for issuers to invest their money to develop the issuer’s company. The two parties, be it investors or issuers, often have difficulty finding match points according to their respective needs. In this case, the broker’s job is to act as an intermediary for issuer companies and investors.

2. Recommend the Best Investment Instruments

Apart from serving as a liaison between issuers and investors, another broker’s job is to recommend the best investment instruments to investors. In the investment world, brokers have adequate capacity and are responsible to investors. So, providing input and advice in making decisions for investors is one of the broker’s duties. If the broker provides the right recommendations, then the reputation of the broker will definitely be higher and known.

3. Accompanying Investors in the Transaction Process

The broker’s next task is to accompany investors during the transaction process in the capital market. Where the process usually contains a series of agreements and agreements between issuers and investors. Broker assistance in this transaction process avoids risks and can also run smoothly. In the process, the broker’s responsibility is to carry out all transaction orders instructed by investors, be it buying or selling. Not infrequently investors or clients often rely on the performance of brokers in analyzing the capital market because investors do not have much time.

Types of Brokers

Brokers are divided into several types. If based on the client, these types of brokers include:

1. Retail Brokers

Retail brokers are brokers who assist individual or individual investors in conducting transactions on the capital market. In simple terms, in this type, a broker is an individual whose job is to assist small investors in making business decisions and conducting an analysis. The income of this retail broker depends on the success of his analysis.

2. Institutional Brokers

This type of broker is more focused on the interests of large investors such as agencies, banks and institutions. This institutional broker will not assist individual investors in making an investment. One example of an institutional brokerage client is a mutual fund institution. Institutional broker commissions will usually be much less than retail brokers.

Then, according to the services provided by the brokerage firm, the types of brokers can be divided into:

1. Full Service Brokers

As the name implies, this type of broker will serve investors in full. That means, brokers will help investors, starting from providing information, analysis results, accompanying the transaction process, to maintaining accounts from investors. For novice investors or those who do not have expertise in analyzing the capital market, it would be very suitable to choose this type of full service. This broker commission is quite large compared to other types of brokers.

2. Deep Discount Brokers

Different from the previous types of brokers, this type of deep discount broker will not provide full service. Brokers are only tasked with instructing share buying and selling transactions and maintaining investor or consumer accounts.

3. Discount Brokers

These discount brokers will not process transactions with issuers, but they will only assist investors in making investment decisions. The duties of this type of broker include providing recommendations, information, results from analysis, providing advice, risks, investment strategies, and making decisions.

4. Internet or Online Brokers

This type of broker is a type of broker that is currently on the rise or is popular, because of its activities carried out online, namely online brokers. Basically, this online broker has services that are quite the same as other types. The difference is only in terms of the activities they carry out, namely utilizing the internet so that transactions become faster and are not limited by space.

How to Choose the Right Broker

Before starting a partnership with a brokerage firm, there are several things that must be considered. Make sure to follow some of the tips below:

1. Check the Legitimacy of the Brokerage Company

The first thing to note is that we must first check the legitimacy or legality of the brokerage company. Apart from that, we can also ask for proof from them by showing the legal documents. If everything is safe, then we will avoid the threat of fraud because the company is supervised by capital market supervisors.

2. Choose those who have adequate and reliable capabilities

Brokers are important intermediaries for investors. Where a good brokerage company will certainly have a good reputation and also trusted branding. Because companies that have legality do not always have a good reputation among the wider community. This good reputation shows that the results of the analysis and recommendations are quite accurate.

3. Pay attention to Broker History with Previous Investors

Broker history is an indicator that can show its ability to help complete transactions to reap maximum profits. Not only that, we can also see whether the relationship with investors is well established. Don’t forget to pay attention to testimonials that have high potential in evaluating the company’s performance.

4. Adjust to Needs

Then the last thing is to make sure to choose a brokerage company that suits your needs. Because the broker itself consists of various types and services in the capital market. Not only that, make sure the commission that must be given is according to ability. This is intended so that it is not burdensome in the future. If at this time we have a business or business that is being run, then one of our investment goals might be to develop or expand the business in the future.

Legal Brokers in Indonesia

There are several conditions that must be met by a broker to be able to have official legality. In Indonesia alone, there are 96 brokers who have been officially registered on the IDX or the Indonesian Stock Exchange. Some of them are Indo Premier, Mandiri Sekuritas, Samuel Sekuritas Indonesia, Mirae Asset Sekuritas Indonesia, Morgan Stanley Sekuritas Indonesia, and MNC Sekuritas. Apart from that, there are still many other legal brokers that have been registered in Indonesia.

From the explanation above, we can understand that there are various types of brokers spread across Indonesia. Therefore, we must be able to adjust our choices to what we really need. If we are still trying to learn and are new to the investment world, then it would be better to choose a full service broker. And vice versa, if we have knowledge and experience that is long enough, then we can choose a deep discount broker to put more emphasis on spending.

This is an explanation of the definition of a broker and several types as well as tips for choosing the right broker. For Sinaumed’s who want to know more deeply about other ways of investing, they can read related books by visiting sinaumedia.com. To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information.

How to Calculate the Volume of a Block – Sinaumed’s certainly knows that in mathematics we can study several branches of knowledge in it, such as algebra, geometry, arithmetic, and so on. No exception with various kinds of shapes and wakes of space.

However, we will not discuss the branch of mathematics as a whole, ok Sinaumed’s. In this article, we will discuss how to calculate the volume of one of the geometric shapes.

Before that, did Sinaumed’s know what was included in the various geometric shapes?

Space structures include cubes, blocks, prisms, pyramids, cylinders, cones, and spheres. In general, these spatial shapes have formulas, characteristics, properties, and so on with their respective differences. Thus, this article will discuss one of the geometric shapes, namely the beam.

A beam is a type of three-dimensional geometric shape which is bounded by six sides, namely a rectangle. The beam also has six sides, eight vertices, and twelve ribs.

Meanwhile, the side planes on the beam are located in pairs and parallel to each other. The sides of the beam are length, width, height, with different lengths.

Sinaumed’s can also read one of the following book recommendations entitled “Build Flat and Build Space” by Dewi Djuwita which is only available at sinaumedia.com to find out more about some other information about geometric shapes. Just click below, Sinaumed’s!

We also encounter many blocks in everyday life, such as food boxes, erasers, fish bowls, drink boxes, bathtubs, shoe boxes, post boxes, books, cupboards, refrigerators, and so on.

Well, Sinaumed’s already knows what beams mean by reviewing previous articles, right? Next, we will find out how to calculate the volume of a cuboid. Listen to the end of the article below, Sinaumed’s!

Block Volume Formula

It is known that how to calculate the volume of a block is very simple and easy to remember. All you need to do is multiply the three sides of the block, namely length, width, and height.

Source: Kelasprogrammer.com (Google)

One of the most important things to note in calculating the volume of this block is to make sure the length on all sides is in the same unit. For example, the length of the beam is expressed in cm or m, then the width and height must also be expressed in cm or m so that correct and appropriate results are obtained.

Thus, the unit for the volume of a block is a unit of length squared or commonly known as a cubic. For example, cm3 (cubic centimeters), m3 (cubic meters), and so on.

In order for Sinaumed’s to better understand how to calculate the volume of a block, then consider the following examples of questions using the formula above.

Example Question 1 

It is known that the length, width and height of a block are 3 cm, 2 cm and 4 cm respectively.

Wanted: calculate the volume of the block?

Answer:

It is known that length = 3 cm, width = 2 cm, and height = 4 cm.

V = pxlxt

V = 3 x 2 x 4

V = 24 cm3

No need to worry, Sinaumed’s, you can learn more about how to calculate the volume of a block or other shapes through the following textbook recommendations because how to calculate the volume of a block can be learned in grade 5 elementary school. You can find out more if you have read and practice it every day at home so it’s easy to find questions like this in lessons at school. Just click below!

Example Problem 2 

A block is 10 m long, 2 m wide and 200 cm high.

Wanted: Calculate the volume of the block?

Answer:

The way to solve the second example problem is basically the same as the previous problem, but the height of the block does not use the same units. Therefore, you must equate these units first so that they have the same units.

Length = 10 m

Width = 2 m

Height = 200 cm to 2 m

Then, enter in the formula v = pxlxt

V = 10 x 2 x 2

V = 40 m3

Example Problem 3 

A cuboid has a length of 300 cm, a width of 10 cm and a height of 20 cm.

Asked: calculate how much is the volume of the block?

Answer:

V = pxlxt

V = 300 x 10 x 20

V = 60,000 cm3

Example Problem 4 

It is known that Budi has a pool in the form of a block with a length of 80 cm, a width of 60 cm and a height of 40 cm. In the pool, of course, will be filled with water.

Asked: how much water is needed to fill ⅔ of Budi’s pond?

Answer:

It is known that the pond length (l) = 80 cm, width (l) = 60 cm, and height (t) = 40 cm.

Wanted: the volume of the block in the pool ⅔

V = ⅔ xpxlxt

V = ⅔ ( 80 cm x 60 cm x 40 cm)

V = ⅔ (192,000 cm3)

V = 128,000 cm3

So, the amount of water needed to fill ⅔ of Budi’s pond is 128,000 cm3.

Example Problem 5 

Jojo wants to make a catfish pond in the form of a beam with a width of 40 cm, a length 3/2 times the width and a height of 4 catfish ponds more than that width.

Asked: How much volume in the catfish pond will Jojo need?

Answer:

Is known:

The width of the catfish pond (l) = 40 cm

The length of the catfish pond (l) = 3/2 x (l) = 3/2 x 40 = 60 cm

The height of the catfish pond (t) = (l) + 4 = 40 + 4 = 44 cm

Formula: v = pxlxt

V = 60cm x 40cm x 44cm

V = 105,600 cm3

So, the volume of the catfish pond that Jojo needs is 105,600 cm3.

Sinaumed’s can also read one of the following books entitled “Basic Mathematics” by Afidah Khairunnisa which contains information on the role of science and technology development as well as references and references for students or mathematicians in studying one of the geometric shapes or other mathematics. Get the book by clicking below, Sinaumed’s!

So, that’s the discussion in this one article about how to calculate the volume of a block along with several examples of problems related to the volume of a block. We hope that after reading this article, you can add insight and knowledge about how to calculate the volume of an unknown block.

Book Recommendations & Related Articles

 

If you are interested in finding some other information about how to calculate geometric shapes other than blocks, you can look for references to related books which are only available on the sinaumedia.com website , which are ready to become #Friends Without Limits in accompanying you in developing and moving forward every day. Happy learning and hopefully useful!

Author: Elsya Islamay

Production Costs – Definition, Examples, How to Calculate, and Elements – The production process is the main operational activity of an industry or manufacturing company. The company will take into account the existence of production costs when processing begins from raw materials into ready-to-use or semi-finished goods.

The calculation of production costs is quite complex because there are many types of expenditure components in manufacturing companies. For this reason, further understanding related to it is quite important. The following is a review regarding production costs , starting from the definition, examples, how to calculate, and the elements.

1. Definition of Production Costs

Production costs are costs incurred by the company during the manufacturing or management process with the aim of producing products that are ready for market. The calculation of production costs will be carried out starting from the beginning of processing, until finished or semi-finished goods.

The accumulated expenses required by the company to be able to process raw materials into finished products are referred to as production costs. The scope of production costs contains 3 elements, namely raw materials, direct labor, and factory overhead.
Production costs will be borne by the company until the processing produces goods that are ready to be sold on the market. Later, these costs will be calculated per unit of product, making it easier to calculate and retrieve profit figures.

These costs will later lead to the formation of the cost of finished goods at the end of the accounting period. The total economic sacrifice used in the processing of raw materials to become finished goods and ready to be marketed is called production costs.

Company expenses in the form of production costs are also interpreted as expenditures that are definitely needed to produce finished goods. The nature of these costs is widely considered to be incurred as long as the production of goods is still ongoing.

The characteristics of production costs are different when compared to operating expenses. Operational costs are usually incurred by companies to support the company’s managerial system, while production costs are for managing ready-to-sell goods.

As one example is when you build a building that requires precise calculations in order to do it precisely and quickly. A book entitled The Smart Book for Calculating Building Costs by Rio Manullang can help Sinaumed’s understand this.

2. Types of Production Costs

Classification of production costs is very important for companies to know what types of expenses are needed during the processing of goods. A company needs to classify production costs in order to facilitate the calculation of cost of goods later.

The classification of production costs has an influence on the calculation of the company’s financial statements. Companies must be able to understand correctly what types of production costs are, so they can calculate them appropriately.
In general, there are 5 types of production costs that are known to accumulate expenses when managing goods. Check out the reviews regarding the types of production costs that exist in manufacturing companies in the following details.

2.1 Fixed Costs

Variable costs are expenditures whose amount will not change, even though the volume of production of goods has increased or decreased. This type of cost has a certain nature, so it can be budgeted appropriately.

Fixed cost elements have the same nominal amount that must be paid in each production process. Fixed costs will not experience swelling even though the production process is busy, so it can increase output.

The company can plan a budget for these fixed costs because they are certain, so there is no need to worry about additions or reductions. These fixed production costs will usually be incurred as long as the production process is still running.

One example of fixed costs that must be paid by the company in the same amount, even though the volume of production changes is the cost of factory rent. The company is required to pay these fees regularly according to the agreed price.
Another form of fixed costs is the company’s expenses to pay employees’ monthly salaries. Another company expense that is also fixed is salary costs for factory security guards who use a monthly payment system.

2.2 Variable Cost

The next type of company production expenditure is variable costs, the amount of which depends on output. If the production of goods is higher, the variable costs will also increase.

Variable costs will only be required during the production process, so that they become the basis for spending per unit to be reported. The type of variable cost that is required in the production process is the purchase of raw materials.

Expenditure to purchase raw materials will usually be influenced by output targets during the production process. This variable cost will always change as long as the production process changes.

When the production process stops, it means that the variable costs incurred by manufacturing companies are zero. Variable cost is an important component of production costs to determine the price of goods when marketing takes place, in a matter of per unit.

2.3 Average Cost

Average cost is the cost per unit that will be obtained by dividing the total expenditure by the amount of production output. This average cost is needed by the company to determine future production decisions.

The cost of production per unit will be known by calculating this average cost. Furthermore, the company can determine the percentage of profit to be achieved from the average cost. Average cost will be compared with fixed costs when making production decisions.

From the results of the comparison, information will be obtained about which costs are higher between fixed and variable costs. This can be used as a benchmark for the company to determine the ideal profit.

2.4 Marginal Cost

Marginal costs can also be referred to as additional expenses that will be used by companies to increase production. Companies can find out the maximum amount of output that can be obtained during the production process by adding marginal costs.

Marginal cost calculation is done by adding the variable cost during the production process. Companies can also associate fixed costs with marginal costs when producing additional output.

The function of marginal costs is to help companies maximize overall operational activities. This will enable the company to achieve the maximum profit value of the product more efficiently.

Marginal costs can only be calculated after the fixed and variable costs are known by the company. Marginal cost calculation is done by dividing the increase in cost and the change in production target quantity.

2.5 Total Cost

The last type of production expenditure is the total cost obtained from the combination of variable and fixed costs. This total cost will be information regarding the total amount of expenses incurred during the production process.

This total cost can only be calculated when the company already has output in the form of finished goods ready for sale. Calculation of this total cost must be done every production period is completed so that it can be reported immediately.

This total cost is comprehensive because it includes all company expenses during the production process. The cost of raw materials, administration and marketing must be taken into account in this total cost.

In controlling the costs incurred by a company, there are concepts and cost accounting methods that can be used. Cost Accounting Book 2nd Edition by Firdaus A. Dunia and Wasilah Abdullah can help Sinaumed’s understand cost accounting.

3. Example of Production Cost

Production costs are taken into account during the product processing process in a business in a manufacturing company. One example that will be discussed this time is a manufacturing company engaged in the food sector where the output is noodles.

In this case the Healthy Food Company produces ready-to-cook yellow noodles with an output of 4,000 packs of finished goods for one month. The following is a breakdown of the yellow noodle production costs for one month.

Cost of purchasing raw materials = Rp. 11,000,000
Direct Labor Cost = Rp. 3,500,000
Factory Security Guard Wages = Rp. 2,000,000 (only during the production process)
Factory Rental Cost = Rp. 1,500,000

The total production cost incurred to produce 4,000 packs of yellow noodles is IDR 18,000,000. From the total expenditure, the production cost per unit can be determined by dividing the total cost by the total number of products. The calculation is Rp. 18,000,000 : 4,000 = Rp. 4,500.

Furthermore, the company can determine the selling price by calculating the cost of production per unit plus the percentage of profit.

In this yellow noodle product, the profit percentage used is 40% of production costs. So, the calculation of the selling price per unit is Rp.4500 + (40% x Rp.4500) = Rp. 6,300

The company will be able to determine the selling price more precisely by knowing the total cost of production. In addition, this cost information is also useful for companies to minimize potential risks during the production process.

4. How to Calculate Production Costs

Calculation of production costs will later be used as a reference to determine the value of the cost of production. There are several steps that need to be taken in calculating this production cost.

As an illustration of the production calculation, below is presented the expenditure data of PT Antara for one month. PT Antara is a company engaged in the production of hijab with a total output of 5,000 units for one month.
Hijab products from PT. Antara is marketed through 3 large stores and e-commerce. The following is PT Antara’s expenditure report data for one month.

• Raw material inventory IDR 30,000,000
• Semi-finished raw materials Rp. 40,000,000
• Finished goods ready for sale Rp. 80,000,000
• Purchase of raw material inventory Rp. 50,000,000
• Shipping costs IDR 5,000,000
• Machine maintenance costs IDR 5,000,000
• Direct labor salary Rp. 30,000,000
• Remaining use of raw materials and remaining semi-finished materials Rp.30,000,000
• The remaining semi-finished materials Rp. 5,000,000
• Hijab ready for sale Rp. 30,000,000

Once the expenditure data is known, then production costs can be calculated. The following are the steps taken to calculate the production costs.

Stage 1:

Raw materials used = initial balance of raw materials + purchases of raw materials – ending balance of materials
= Rp. 30,000,000 + (Rp. 50,000,000 + Rp. 5,000,000) – Rp. 30,000,000
= Rp. 55,000,000

Stage 2:

Production Costs = raw materials + direct labor + factory overhead costs
= IDR 55,000,000 + IDR 30,000,000 + 5,000,000
= IDR 90,000,000

Production costs per unit = production costs: total units
= Rp. 90,000,000 : 5,000
= 18,000

Stage 3:

Cost of Production = total production costs + beginning inventory balance – ending balance

= IDR 90,000,000 + IDR. 40,000,000 – Rp. 5,000,000
= Rp. 125,000,000

Stage 4

Cost of Goods Sold = Cost of production + initial inventory – ending inventory
= Rp. 90,000,000 + Rp. 80,000,000 – Rp. 50,000,000
= Rp. 140,000,000

Related Books :

1. Utilization of Excel 2010 to Prepare Production Budget

2. Production Management Book

5. Elements of Production Costs

Production costs in manufacturing companies are divided into 3 types which include the process of obtaining raw materials to become goods ready for sale. The following are elements that need to be included in the production costs of manufacturing companies.

5.1 Cost of Raw Materials

The first element that must be included in production costs is the cost of raw materials. This cost is used to obtain the main materials that will be used to process the product. Acquisition of raw material costs is obtained from the purchase and processing of the main material.

There are several things related to the company’s raw material costs. The first component in the raw material cost is the cost incurred for purchasing. Companies can buy this raw material either by debit, credit or import from outside suppliers.

The cost component that must be spent on raw materials is the expenditure for warehousing purposes. Raw materials that have been purchased by the company need to be distributed to the warehouse to plan which material will be processed first.

Raw material costs also take into account other acquisition expenses, including during the delivery process. This production expenditure arises because of the calculation of the cost of raw materials purchased by the company.

Cost elements that are definitely taken into account in the acquisition of raw materials include the purchase price, shipping costs, and warehousing costs until they are ready for processing. While the cost of receiving disassembly, and ordering is often not included, because it is difficult to calculate.

Recording of raw material purchases will usually be adjusted to the nominal on the invoice. The transaction document will contain information regarding the cost of purchase, freight charges, and VAT.

5.2 Direct Labor Costs

Direct labor costs are the budget required by the company to pay the salaries of production employees. Direct labor is a company employee who is directly related to the production process.

The salaries of these production employees will be calculated starting from the processing of raw materials to finished products. One example of employee salaries that can be included in direct labor costs is the wages of machine operators.

Components of direct labor costs in professional manufacturing companies do not only include the base salary of employees. Other costs such as employee benefits and insurance are also included in the direct labor cost calculation.

This direct labor cost budget can be done by planning employee needs in advance. Furthermore, the company can determine the basic wage that will be received by direct workers in accordance with the division of their duties.

Companies also need to supervise the performance of direct workers so that salaries can be distributed properly according to the quality of work. This direct labor cost will be calculated in the production cost per unit.

5.3 Factory Overhead Costs

Other expenses related to the production process excluding raw materials and direct labor are called factory overhead costs. These overhead costs often arise due to additional material costs, production control processes, and taxes.

Factory overhead costs will later be calculated in the income statement after the accounting period is over. This cost element has an important role to maximize the production process.

Production-related labor wage payments that cannot be charged to product output will be included in factory overhead costs. There are also machine maintenance and factory rental costs which will also add to overhead costs.

Factory overhead can also be included in variable costs which can change accordingly. production volumes. Examples of factory overhead costs that follow production volume are purchasing factory equipment and paying for factory electricity.

How do you calculate PPh and PBB taxes? – Sinaumed’s, every Indonesian citizen is required to pay taxes, be it vehicle tax, residence tax, income tax, and others. However, do you know the meaning of the tax itself?

A. Definition of Tax

Tax in the Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI) means a mandatory levy, usually in the form of money that must be paid by residents as a mandatory contribution to the state or government in relation to income, ownership, purchase price of goods, and so on.

In simple terms, paying taxes can be interpreted as an obligation that must be carried out by citizens in an effort to finance the state and national development. All tax payment procedures must comply with existing laws and regulations.

Usually the type of tax that is often known by many people is the motor vehicle tax. Have you ever heard of income tax and land and building tax? The two taxes need to be known by many people, both understanding and how to calculate them. By knowing the two types of taxes, we will try to pay the taxes on time.

If you want to know about income tax and land and building tax, let’s take a look at these two taxes, starting from their definition to the formula and how to calculate them.

B. Definition of PPh and PBB

1. Income Tax (PPh)

Income Tax (Pajak Penghasilan or PPh) is a tax imposed on individuals or entities on income earned during a tax year. In this case, income is an economic capability that can be used to meet daily needs or increase wealth for both domestic and foreign sources. In simple terms, income can be interpreted as profit from a business, honorarium, salary, gifts, and so on.

2. Land and Building Tax (PBB)

If we own a plot of land or have a residence, the land and residence will be taxed. The tax imposed on land ownership or residence is called Land and Building Tax or commonly abbreviated as PBB.

At first this tax was a central tax, but since the emergence of Law No. 28 of 2009 concerning Regional Taxes and Regional Retribution (PDRD), rural and urban PBB have become regional taxes. However, for PBB on plantations, forestry, mining, they are still part of the central tax.

C. Subject to Income Tax and Land and Building Tax

“Tax subject” is a term in the tax law that is indicated for an individual (personal) or organization (group) based on the applicable tax law. The thing that needs to be underlined in “tax subject” is that a person or entity is a “tax subject” but not all of these people and entities are subject to tax.

In other words, “tax subject” will only be imposed on individuals who have met the taxpayer requirements. While the entities that are subject to taxpayers are Limited Liability Companies (PT), Limited Liability Companies, State-Owned Enterprises or regions with any name and in any form, partnerships, companies or other associations, firms, joint ventures, cooperative associations, and permanent establishments.

Basically, tax payments must be made if there is income earned in Indonesia. Thus, if a person or entity no longer earns income or income in Indonesia, then there is no need to pay taxes.

The conditions that are not subject to the taxpayer are as follows.

• When you die;
• When choosing to leave Indonesia forever;
• When the legal entity is liquidated, the legal entity is no longer subject to taxpayers.

1. Subject of Income Tax (PPh)

Based on the Income Tax Law it is not clearly explained what is meant as an income tax subject, but in general income tax subjects are divided into three groups, namely:

• Individuals and inheritance that have not been divided into a unit to replace those who are entitled;
• Entities consisting of Limited Liability Companies (PT), Limited Liability Companies, State or Regional Owned Enterprises in whatever name and form, associations, corporations or other associations, firms, partners, cooperative associations, and other business entities;
• A permanent establishment (BUT) is a business carried out by a person who does not reside in Indonesia or is in Indonesia for no more than 183 days within a 12 month period or an entity that is not established and is not domiciled in Indonesia. The bodies referred to include management positions, company branches, representative offices, workshops, office buildings, and workshops.

Domestic tax subjects will be taxed on income obtained from Indonesia, meanwhile, foreign tax subjects will be taxed based on income sourced from Indonesia.

Domestic tax subjects will be taxed based on net income or net income at general rates, while foreign tax subjects will be taxed based on gross income or gross income at comparable tax rates.

Domestic tax subjects are required to notify the Annual Tax Return (SPT Tahunan) as a medium for calculating the tax payable, while foreign tax subjects are not required to notify the Annual Tax Return because their tax obligations have been fulfilled through final withholding taxes.

2. Subject to Land and Building Tax (PBB)

A person or entity that is required to pay Land and Building Tax (PBB) in accordance with the provisions of the PBB Act can be referred to as a PBB subject. PBB tax is imposed on subjects who already own buildings or get benefits from the land (land). Based on the Agrarian Law, the rights to land and buildings in PBB are property rights, building use rights, usufructuary rights, usufructuary rights, and management rights.

However, in several cases where the building or land is used it is not clear who owns it and the PBB has not been paid, the Director General of Taxes has the authority to determine and stipulate who is the tax subject who will be responsible in order to be able to pay off the tax debt.

What is done when the Director General of Taxes determines the tax subject is to carry out research into the field, which is followed by determining the tax subject for buildings or land whose owners are unknown.

The selection of PBB subjects to pay taxes or pay off tax debts even though they do not have rights over the building or land used, has been stated in Law Number 12 of 1994.

However, if the subject that has been stipulated by the Director General of Taxes has objections, then the tax subject can file an objection by writing a statement stating that the PBB subject is not a person or entity that has to pay the PBB in question.

The thing that needs to be underlined when making PBB payments is that the status of ownership rights to land and buildings has nothing to do with the PBB payment process. This is because the appointment of a person or entity by the Director General of Taxes is not proof of ownership of land and building rights.

D. Objects of Income Tax and Land and Building Tax

1. Objects of Income Tax (PPh)

Income or income derived from work is a tax object. Income or income has a very broad meaning so that Law Number 36 of 2008 was made in which the object of income tax is contained in articles 21, 22, 23 and 26.

However, there are several types of income that are not part of the income tax object. The following are types of income that are not part of the income tax object.

• Inheritance
• Other income as contained in the income tax law.
• Aid or donations such as zakat and religious donations.
• Grant funds as long as they are not related to ownership, work effort, or control between related parties.
• Reimbursement or compensation related to work or services in the form of enjoyment from the Taxpayer or the Government, if given by a non-Taxpayer or certain Taxpayer will become Income).

2. Objects of Land and Building Tax (PBB)

The objects of Land and Building Tax are immovable objects. In simple terms, the surface of the earth which includes land, deep waters, and seas. Meanwhile, a building is a construction built on land/water with implanted or patented techniques. As for those included in the category of buildings as follows:

• Toll road;
• Swimming pool;
• Environmental roads that become an integral part of the building complex;
• fancy fence;
• Sports venues;
• Dock;
• luxurious garden;
• Oil, water and gas refineries;
• Other facilities that provide benefits.

As for those that are not included in PBB objects as follows:

• Land or buildings designated for public purposes, such as worship, health, education, culture, social, and others.
• Land or buildings used for public burials of ancient relics, museums, and so on.
• Land or buildings used by diplomatic missions or consulates. This is done so that the RI representative buildings abroad are also not subject to PBB fees.
• Land that is part of a protected forest, nature reserve, national park, and so on.
• Land and buildings used by representatives of international organizations determined by the Minister of Finance.

E. Formulas and Methods for Calculating PPh

In calculating income tax, it is necessary to carry out several stages. In order to make it easier to understand each stage, a case example will be given.

1. Calculate net income

All income earned during one year of work is gross income. Therefore, to calculate income tax, one year’s net income is required.

Net income can be calculated by subtracting gross (gross) income from dependents such as credit, insurance, debt, and others. Example: 80,000,000 (gross) – 5,000,000 (dependents) = 75,000,000, then net income for one year is 75,000,000.

2. Calculating Non-Taxable Income (PTKP)

If you have received net income for one year, the next step is to calculate Non-Taxable Income (PTKP). The purpose of calculating PTKP is to find Taxable Income (PKP).

PTKP already has a rate set by the Directorate General of Taxes. PTKP rates that need to be known are as follows:

IDR 54,000,000 for individual taxpayers.
Additional IDR 4,500,000 for married taxpayers.
Rp. 54,000,000 for the wife whose income is combined with the husband’s income.
Additional IDR 4,500,000 for each blood family member in a straight line and adopted children who are fully dependent, a maximum of 3 people for each family.

3. Calculating Taxable Income (PKP)

After getting the results of the PTKP calculation, the next step is to calculate the Taxable Income (PKP). To find out the amount of PKP, a reduction is made between net income and PTKP.

Example: 75,000,000 – 54,000,000 (not married) = 19,000,000, then the PKP obtained is 19,000,000.

4. Calculating Income Tax (PPh)

If you have received a PKP, the next step is to calculate income tax. To calculate income tax, it is necessary to know the amount (percent) that has been determined by the Directorate General of Taxes. The following is the calculation of the amount of income tax that must be paid for one year.

Taxable income up to IDR 50,000,000.00 (fifty million rupiah) is subject to a 5% (five percent) rate

Taxable income of more than IDR 50,000,000.00 (fifty million rupiah) to IDR 250,000,000.00 (two hundred fifty million rupiah) is subject to a 15% (fifteen percent) rate

Taxable income of more than IDR 250,000,000.00 (two hundred fifty million rupiah) up to IDR 500,000,000.00 (five hundred million rupiah) is subject to a rate of 25% (twenty five percent)

Taxable income of more than IDR 500,000,000.00 (five hundred million rupiah) is subject to a 30% (thirty percent) rate.

Example: 19,000,000 x 5% (under 50,000,000) = 950,000, then the income tax that must be paid for one year is 950,000.

5. Case examples of calculating Income Tax

Bagus is a father who already has one wife and one child. He earns 96,000,000 per month and has a dependent of 4,000,000 per month. Here’s how to find income taxes.

a) Net income = (gross income – dependents)

= 96,000,000 – 4,000,000
= 92,000,000

b) PTKP (1 wife and 1 child)
54,000,000 + 4,500,000 + 4,500,000
= 63,000,000

c) PKP (net income – PTKP)
92,000,000 – 63,000,000
= 29,000,000

d) PPh (PKP x PPh Percentage)
29,000,000 x 5%
= 1,450,000

Then the income tax that Bagus has to pay is 1,450,000.

F. Formulas and how to calculate PBB

Basically calculating Land and Building Tax (PBB) is tricky. As for how to calculate the PBB, it requires the Selling Value of Tax Objects (NJOP). NJOP can be said as a reference or reference to find out the market price or average price when you want to sell or buy land or buildings.

Actually there are many aspects that affect the NJOP of the earth, such as geographical location, environmental conditions, benefits, and so on. while the NJOP on buildings is determined or influenced by the materials used in the building, location, environmental conditions, and others.

Things that need to be considered when calculating the amount of land and building tax that must be paid are the Value of Taxable Objects (NJOP), Selling Value of Non-Taxable Objects (NJOTKP), and Selling Value of Taxable Objects (NJKP).

To calculate PBB, NJKP is needed. NJKP can be obtained from 20% multiplied by NJOP. After getting the NJKP, the next step is to use the formula commonly used to calculate PBB, which is NJKP multiplied by 0.5%.

G. Case Example of Calculating Land and Building Tax

Pak Bagyo wants to pay the land and building tax and he has a building of 100 square meters and a land area of ​​150 square meters. The price of land in Pak Bagyo’s area is around 4,000,000 per meter, while the price of the building is around 5,000,000. Here’s how to calculate PBB.

a) Land
150 x 4,000,000 = 600,000,000

b) Building
100 x 5,000,000 = 500,000,000

After getting the total value of land and buildings, then look for the NJOP

c) NJOP
600,000,000 + 500,000,000 = 1,100,000,000

d) NJKP
20% x 1,100,000,000 = 220,000,000

e) PBB
0.5% x 220,000,000 = 1,100,000
Then the PBB that must be paid by Mr. Bagyo is 1,100,000

H. Conclusion

Taxes are state revenues that are used to build the country and finance the country. Therefore, as a good citizen it is appropriate to pay taxes on time.

Income Tax and Land and Building Tax are two types of taxes in Indonesia. The two taxes have a different way of calculating either the formula or the percentage of tax that must be paid. Not only is the way of calculating them different, the two taxes also have differences in terms of “tax subject” and “tax object.”

To find out more about Income Tax and Land and Building Tax, you can read these two book recommendations. By reading these two books we will not be confused about calculating Income Tax and Land and Building Tax as well as increasing the desire to pay taxes on time.

Book Recommendations & Related Articles

1. Principles of Tax Law

2. Class XII SMK/MAK Tax Administration

3. Taxes & Funding of Indonesian Civilization

Author : Restu Nasik Kamaluddin

Multiplication of Fractions – The teacher’s main goal in learning mathematics is to help students understand mathematics and encourage them to use mathematics to solve problems in everyday life, and enjoy learning mathematics. Learning mathematics is the process of providing learning experiences to students through a series of planned activities, so that students gain competency in the mathematics material being studied.

Learning multiplication of ordinary fractions is a subject that is tricky, because teachers usually teach it directly without the help of the media, and are introduced without knowing the basic concepts. If students do not know the basic concepts, children will forget the material they are learning more quickly.

Learning is the most important activity in the entire educational process in schools. This means that the success of achieving educational goals depends a lot on the learning process taking place effectively. A teacher’s understanding of the meaning of learning will greatly influence the way the teacher teaches.

Gagne and Riggs say that learning is a system that aims to help the student learning process, which contains a series of events that are designed, arranged in such a way as to influence and support the internal student learning process. So, the core of learning is all the efforts made by the teacher so that the learning process occurs in students.

Based on this opinion, it can be concluded that learning is a process of interaction of students with educators and learning resources that is done intentionally, so that it allows students to learn to do or demonstrate certain behaviors as well.

Mathematics is a study material that has an abstract object and is built through a process of deductive reasoning, namely previous truths, so that the linkages between concepts in mathematics are very strong and clear. Mathematics functions to develop reasoning abilities through investigative, exploratory and experimental activities as a means of solving problems through patterns of thinking and mathematical models, as well as a means of communication as symbols, tables, graphs, diagrams, in explaining ideas.

According to Karso, learning mathematics in elementary school (SD) has the following characteristics.

1. Learning Mathematics Using the Spiral Method

The spiral approach in learning mathematics is an approach to learning a concept or a mathematical topic that always relates or relates to the previous topic. The previous topic can be a prerequisite for understanding and studying a mathematical topic.

The new topics studied are the deepening and expansion of the previous topics. Giving concepts begins with concrete objects, then the concept is taught again in a more abstract form of understanding using notation that is more commonly used in mathematics.

2. Gradual Mathematics Learning

Mathematics subject matter is taught in stages, starting from simple concepts to more difficult concepts. In addition, learning mathematics starts from concrete to semi-concrete and finally to abstract concepts. To make it easier for students to understand mathematical objects, concrete objects are used at the concrete stage, then images at the semi-concrete stage and finally symbols at the abstract stage.

According to Karso, the purpose of learning mathematics is to train and develop ways of thinking systematically, logically, critically, creatively and consistently. In addition, this learning is also expected to develop a persistent and confident attitude in solving problems.

The learning theory that underlies the inquiry method, according to Sanjaya (2011: 196) is constructivism learning theory. Constructivism is a theory that explains that humans build or construct their own knowledge through their interactions with objects, phenomena, experiences, and their environment.

Knowledge cannot be simply transferred from one person to another, but knowledge is built by the learner (Suparno, 1997: 28-29 ) . So, the knowledge acquired by students does not come from teachers who impart their knowledge to students, but students themselves who build their understanding through interaction with their environment.

Fractions in Mathematics

sinaumedia friends, have you ever heard the word “fraction”? By the way, do you understand the difference between fractions and integers? Well, this article will discuss further about fractions, especially the multiplication of fractions.

Before we give the multiplication formula for fractions, you must first remember about fractions. In simple terms, fractions are numbers that are not integers and are in the form a/b, both a and b are integers and the value of b is not equal to 0 (zero). Fractions consist of two components, namely the numerator ( a ) and the denominator ( b ).

There are three types of fractions. The first type of fraction is a pure fraction, which is a fraction where the numerator is smaller than the denominator. The second type of fraction is an impure fraction, which is a fraction where the numerator is greater than the denominator. The average impure fraction is simplified to another fraction in arithmetic calculations. The last type of fraction is a mixed fraction, which is a combination of whole numbers and pure fractions.

Here’s a full explanation.

1. Definition of Fractions

2. Types of Fractions

Fractions can be divided into three, namely:

a. Decimal Numbers or Decimal Fractions

If you want to convert the fraction to a decimal, you must divide the quantifier and denominator to 1 : 2 = 0.5. The following table will provide some examples of how to read a decimal number.

Number	How to read
0.5	zero point five
0.75	zero point seventy five
0.025	zero point zero twenty five

b. Ordinary Fractional Numbers

Number	How to read
	half or one by two
	one third or one third
	quarter or one fourth
	one-fifth or one-fifth
	one-sixth or one-sixth
	one-seventh or one-seventh
	one-eighth or one-eighth
	ninth or one-ninth
	two-thirds
	three-quarter

c. Mixed Fractions

The following table will provide examples of how to read mixed fractions.

Number	How to read
	one and a half
	two two thirds
	three three by four

3. Counting Operations in Fractions

Operations arithmetic in fractions, namely addition and subtraction, multiplication, and division.

a. sum

The properties of addition in fractions, namely:

1.  

Examples of its application, namely:

2.   (The direct result is simplified by converting it to a mixed number).

b. Subtraction

The properties of reduction in fractions, namely:

Examples of its application, namely:

c. Multiplication

The properties of multiplication in fractions, namely:

1.  
2.  

Examples of its application, namely:

d. Distribution

The properties of division in fractions, namely:

Fraction Multiplication Formula

If you already understand the explanation of fractions above, now we will continue by explaining the three multiplication formulas for fractions.

1. The Ordinary Fractions Multiplication Formula

This formula is the most basic fraction multiplication formula, which is to calculate the multiplication between ordinary fractions. The formula is as follows:

Take a look at the formula above! You only need to multiply the quantifiers and the denominators in the basic fraction multiplication formula. An example of the question is as follows.

3/4 x 1/2

The steps that you have to take are to multiply the numbers 3 and 1 as co-quantifiers, and multiply the numbers 4 and 2 as common denominators. The solution is as follows.

3/4 x 1/2 = 3/8

Isn’t it very easy, sinaumedia friends? Well, now we will proceed to the second formula.

2. The Formula for Multiplication of Ordinary Fractions with Whole Numbers

So, now we will discuss the multiplication formula for fractions at the next level, namely the multiplication between fractions and whole numbers. Integers are numbers whose values ​​are whole and not in the form of fractions, namely numbers that have been commonly encountered, for example 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and so on.

You only need to multiply the quantifier in the multiplication between whole numbers and fractions. The formula is as follows.

By the way, do sinaumedia friends know the factors that cause us to only multiply the quantifier and the reason for the constant value of the denominator?

The answer is, if an integer is converted to a fraction, the denominator will be 1, for example you will change the number 2 to a fraction, the fraction will be 2/1.

Well, now you have to recall basic arithmetic logic. Any number multiplied by 1 remains the same. Therefore, we don’t need to convert integers to fractions and just multiply the quantifiers in this formula.

Are sinaumedia Friends still confused? In the following, we will provide an example question below so that you can understand it better.

5/4 x 3

If we convert the integer 3 into a fraction, the fractional form will be 3/1. Now, let’s arrange these numbers in the multiplication formula we learned earlier.

5/4 x 3/1 = 15/4

According to the basic fraction multiplication formula, you have to multiply the other numbers in the quantifier and denominator. Therefore, you have to multiply the numbers 5 and 3 to get the number 15. Meanwhile, if we multiply 4 and 1, the result is 4. As you explained before, any number multiplied by 1 will have the same value. .

So, to make calculations easier, if you meet multiplication between fractions and whole numbers, what’s being multiplied is only the numerator.

3. Mixed Fraction Multiplication Formula

The last fraction multiplication formula is used to multiply mixed fractions among other numbers. Remember, mixed fractions are fractions that consist of whole numbers and impure fractions. Multiplication of mixed fractions is actually easy and has the same concept as multiplication of basic fractions. However, a mixed number must be simplified and converted to an improper fraction first.

In the following, we will provide an example question below so that you can understand it better.

1 ½ x 2 ¼

The first step you have to do is change each mixed fraction into an improper fraction. The formula for converting a mixed fraction to an improper fraction is as follows.

To convert a mixed number into an improper fraction, all you have to do is multiply the whole number by the denominator, then add up the result. If applied to the problem, it can be explained as follows.

1 ½ x 2 ¼
= 3/2 x 9/4

Now, if you’ve converted it into an ordinary fraction, all you have to do is multiply the two fractions according to the basic fraction multiplication formula, namely multiplying the same quantifier and denominator. The solution is as follows.

3/2 x 9/4
= 27/8

So the combined product of 1 ½ and 2 ¼ is 27/8. Remember, you still have to simplify the results above because they are still impure fractions!

Examples of Multiplication Fractions Questions and Answers

1. First Exercise

The following section will explain the discussion and answers to the multiplication of two mixed fractions in a book entitled Mathematics Class 5 SD/MI which is the work of Purnomosidi, Wiyanto, Safiroh, and Ida Gannny.

1. 2 2/3 x 5 =
= 8/3 x 5
= (8 x 5)/3
= 40/3
= 13 1/3

2. 1 4/5 x 2 =
= 9/5 x 2
= (9 x 2)/5
= 18/5
= 3 3/5

3. 2 5/8 x 6
= 21/8 x 6
= (21 x 6)/8
= 126/8
= 15 6/8
= 15 3/4

4. 1 5/7 x 4 =
= 12/7 x 4
= (12 x 4)/7
= 48/7
= 6 6/7

5. 1 7/9 x 2 =
= 16/9 x 2
= (16 x 2)/9
= 32/9
= 3 5/9

6. 5 x 1 3/7 =
= 5 x 10/7
= 50/7
= 7 1/7

7. 6 x 1 9/10 =
= 6 x 19/10
= 114/10
= 11 4/10

8. 12 x 1 4/9 =
= 12 x 13/9
= 156/9
= 17 3/9
= 17 1/3

9. 100 x 1 2/3 =
= 100 x 5/3
= 500/3
= 166 2/3

10. 2 2/3 x 1/6 =
= 8/3 x 1/6
= (8 x 1)/(3 x 6)
= 8/18
= 4/9

11. 2 4/5 x 1/8 =
= 14/5 x 1/8
= (14 x 1)/(5 x 8)
= 14/40
= 7/20

12. 1 2/7 x 2/5 =
= 9/7 x 2/5
= (9 x 2)/(7 x 5)
= 18/35

13. 1 2/7 x 2/3 =
= 9/7 x 2/3
= (9 x 2)/(7 x 3)
= 18/21 = 6/7

14. 1 7/8 x 2/5 =
= 15/8 x 2/5
= (15 x 2)/(8 x 5)
= 30/40
= 3/4

15. 2/3 x 1 5/9 =
= 2/3 x 14/9
= (2 x 14)/(3 x 9)
= 28/27
= 1 1/27

16. 2/5 x 1 3/7 =
= 2/5 x 10/7
= (2 x 10)/(5 x 7)
= 20/35
= 4/7

17. 3/4 x 2 3/10 =
= 3/4 x 23/10
= (3 x 23)/(4 x 10)
= 69/40
= 1 29/40

18. 4/5 x 1 7/8 =
= 4/5 x 15/8
= (4 x 15)/(5×8)
= 60/40 = 3/2
= 1 1/2

19. 5/8 x 1 3/4 =
= 5/8 x 7/4
= (5 x 7)/(8 x 4)
= 35/32
= 1 3/32

2. Second Exercise

1. 2/3 x 2/5 = …
2. 3/4 x 5/6 = …
3. 3/5 x 1/2 = …
4. 5/8 x 2/7 = …
5. 5/7 x 7/8 = …
6. 4/9 x 2/3 = …
7. 3/2 x 2/3 = …
8. 4/6 x 5/8 = …
9. 6/7 x 3/6 = …
10 8/9 x 3/4 = …
11. 3/4 x 1/2 x 2/3 = …
12. 1/2 x 5/6 x 2/4 = …
13. 5/7 x 1/3 x 4/5 = …
14. 4/5 x 2/3 x 3/8 = …
15. 1/2 x 1/3 x 1/5 = …
16. 2 1/4 x 3 2/3 = …
17. 3 4/5 x 5 1/6 = …
18. 5 1/2 x 2 2/3 = …
19. 2 5/7 x 3 3/4 = …
20. 4 1/8 x 1 5/7 = …

Answer Key to Multiplication Fractions Questions

1. 2/3 x 1/4 = (2 x 1) / (3 x 4) = 2/12 = 1/6
2. 3/4 x 5/6 = (3 x 5) / (4 x 6) = 15/24 = 5/8
3. 3/5 x 1/2 = (3 x 1) / (5 x 2) = 3/10
4. 5/8 x 2/7 = (5 x 2) / ( 8 x 7) = 10/56 = 5/28
5. 5/7 x 7/8 = (5 x 7) / (7 x 8) = 35/56 = 5/8
6. 4/9 x 2/3 = (4 x 2) / (9 x 3) = 8/27
7. 3/2 x 2/3 = (3 x 2) / (2 x 3) = 5/6
8. 4/6 x 5/8 = (4 x 5) / (6 x 8) = 20/48 = 5/12
9. 6/7 x 3/6 = (6 x 3) / (7 x 6) = 18/42 = 3/7
10 8/9 x 3/4 = (8 x 3) / (9 x 4) = 24/36 = 2/3
11. 3/4 x 1/2 x 2/3 = (3 x 1 x 2) / (4 x 2 x 3) = 6/24 = 1/4
12. 1/2 x 5/6 x 2/4 = (1 x 5 x 2) / (2 x 6 x 4) = 10/48 = 5 /24
13. 5/7 x 1/3 x 4/5 = (5 x 1 x 4) / (7 x 3 x 5) = 20/105 = 4/21
14. 4/5 x 2/3 x 3/8 = (4 x 2 x 3) / (5 x 3 x 8) = 24/120 = 1/5
15. 1/2 x 1/3 x 1/5 = (1 x 1 x 1) / (2 x 3 x 5) = 1/30
16. 2 1/4 x 3 2/3 = 9/4 x 11/3 = (9 x 11) / (4 x 3 ) = 99/12 = 8 3/12 = 8 1/4
17. 3 4/5 x 5 1/6 = 19/5 x 31/6 = (19 x 31) / (5 x 6) = 589/30 = 19 19/30
18. 5 1/2 x 2 2/3 = 11/2 x 8/3 = (11 x 8) / (2 x 3) = 88/6 = 14 4/6 = 14 2/3
19. 2 5/7 x 3 3/4 = 19/7 x 15/4 = (19 x 15) / (7 x 4) = 285/28 = 10 5/28
20. 4 1/8 x 1 5/ 7 = 33/8 x 12/7 = (33 x 12) / (8 x 7) = 396/56 = 7 4/56 = 7 1/14

3. Third Exercise

Examples of Common Fraction Multiplication Problems

Problem 1. Multiply common fractions.
Calculate 1/3 x 1/7 = . . .?

Answer: 1/3 x 1/7 = 1×1 / 3×7 = 1/21

Problem 2. Multiplication of simplified fractions
Find 2/5 x 7/10 = . . .?

Answer: 2/5 x 7/10 = 2×7 / 5×10 = 14/50 = 7/25

Notice, the result is 14/50. The 14/50 value can be simplified by dividing the numerator and denominator by 2 or multiplied by 1/2. Therefore, 14 : 2 = 7, and 50 : 2 = 25, so we get 7/25.

Answer = 14/50 and 7/25 have the same value.

Problem 3. Multiplication of Three Common Fractions
Calculate the product of these 3 fractions 1/2 x 4/5 x 3/8 = . . .?

Answer: The question is a multiplication of three successive fractions.

1/2x 4/5 x 3/8 = 1x4x3 / 2x5x8 = 12/80 = 3/20

Note, the payoff is 12/80. The fractional value can still be simplified to 3/20.

---

Well, that’s a discussion about the meaning, the three formulas for multiplication of fractions, and their understanding that you can learn and use in your daily life. Hopefully useful and see you in the next discussion. Have a good study!

How to Calculate Weton – Currently, the Javanese calendar is used to determine various important activities, such as activities to determine auspicious days for marriage, activities to determine days for circumcision, activities to determine events for death, activities to determine the construction of houses, and activities to determine good days for traveling .

The general public, especially the Javanese, think that they have to determine an auspicious day in advance to carry out various activities, for example wedding activities must be determined in advance on an auspicious day so that future couples who are to be married will not experience bad events, either before marriage or after marriage.

The community views that the Javanese calendar has a sacred value. As for the characteristics of the sacred, it is respected by humans, creates fear, is held in high esteem, is characterized by ambiguity, its benefits are unreasonable, gives strength, and emphasizes the guidance and obligations for its adherents and worshippers.

Related to the existence of belief and also belief in something in the Javanese calendar, it all depends on the views of each individual community who judges. We as editors can only take the positive side of the Javanese Islamic calendar in this contemporary life.

Various social actions carried out by the community in announcing the existence of the Javanese calendar are a folkways (habits) related to problems in social life, a mores (code of conduct) related to social life, and also a tradition (adat).

The Cycle of Market Days in the Javanese Calendar

Symbol of the market cycle in the Javanese calendar.

The Javanese in pre-Islamic times knew weeks that were not only seven days long, but from 2 to 10 days. These weeks are called by the names of dwiwara, triwara, chess, pancawara (pancawara), sadwara, saptawara, astawara and sangawara. The cycles that are still used today are saptawara (seven day cycle) and pancawara (five day cycle), while the others are still used on the island of Bali and in Tengger.

Saptawara or padanan consists of seven days connected with the lunar-earth system. This seven-day cycle coincides with the weekly cycle in the Christian calendar, namely Sunday, Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, Friday and Saturday. The following solah (movement) of the moon towards the earth are the names of the seven days.

• Radite • Ngahad , symbolizing meneng (silence);
• Soma • Senen , symbolizing progress ;
• Hangara • Tuesday , symbolizing retreat ;
• Buda • Rebo , symbolizing mangiwa (moving to the left);
• Respati • Kemis , symbolizing manengen (moving to the right);
• Sukra • Jemuwah , symbolizing muntung (going up);
• Stack • Setu , symbolizes descent (moving down).

The pancawara consists of Kliwon ( Kasih ), Legi ( Sweet ), Pahing ( Jenar ), Pon ( Palguna ), and Wage ( Cebony ) . Pancawara is also commonly referred to as a market . This cycle was previously used by traders to open markets according to existing market days. This is why many market names are now known that use that market name, such as Pasar Kliwon, Pasar Legi, Pasar Pahing, Pasar Pon, and Pasar Wage.

The market days are the patrap (attitude) positions of the months as follows.

• Kliwon • Kasih, symbolizing jumeneng (standing);
• Legi • Manis, symbolizing mungkur (turning backwards);
• Pahing • Jenar, symbolizing madep (facing);
• Pon • Palguna, representing sare (sleep);
• Wage • Gibbous , symbolizes lax (sitting).

Apart from pancawara and saptawara , there is also a six-day cycle called sadwara or paringkelan . Although sometimes it is still used in recording time, paringkelan is not used in calculating the falling time for traditional ceremonies at the palace. Paringkelan consists of Tungle , Aryang , Warungkung , Paningron , Uwas , and Mawulu.

Lunar Cycles in the Javanese Calendar

As in other calendars, the Javanese calendar also has 12 months. These months have borrowed names from Arabic adapted to the Javanese tongue, namely Sura , Sapar , Mulud , Bakdamulud , Jumadilawal , Jumadilakhir , Rejeb , Ruwah , Pasa , Sawal , Dulkangidah , and Besar . The lifespan of each month alternates between 30 and 29 days.

Here are presented the names of the Islamic Javanese months. Some of the month names are taken from the Hijri Calendar with Arabic names, but some of them use names in Sanskrit such as Pasa, Séla, and possibly also Sura, while the names Apit and Besar come from Javanese and Malay.

These names are the names of the lunar months or candra (lunar). The naming of the month is partly related to the big days in the Hijri month, such as Pasa which is related to Ramadan fasting, Mulud which is related to the Prophet’s Birthday in the month of Rabiulawal, and Ruwah which is related to Nisfu Sya’ban when the deeds of the spirit for a year are considered to be recorded. .

No.	Javanese calendar	Day Length
1.	Sura	30
2.	Sapar	29
3.	Mulud or Rabingulawal	30
4.	Bakda Mulud or Rabingulakir	29
5.	Early Friday	30
6.	Jumadil finally	29
7.	Regeb	30
8.	Ruwah (Arwah, Saban)	29
9.	Pasa (Puwasa, Siyam, Ramelan)	30
10.	Early	29
11.	Séla (Dulkangidah, Apit) *)	30
12.	Big (Dulkahijjah)	29/30
	Total	354/355

The names of the months are as follows.

• Warana • Sura, means rijal ;
• Wadana • Sapar, means wiwit ;
• Wijangga • Mulud, means brother ;
• Wiyana • Bakda Mulud, meaning ambuka ;
• Widada • Jumadilawal, means wiwara ;
• Widarpa • Jumadilakir, means rahsa ;
• Wilapa • Rejeb, meaning purwa ;
• Wahana • Ruwah, means being ;
• Wanana • Pasa, means middle ;
• Wurana • Sawal, means form ;
• Wujana • Séla, meaning wusana ;
• Wujala • Big, means kothong .

Information:

The alternative name for the month Dulkangidah is Sela or Apit. These names are a relic of the Old Javanese names for the name of the 11th season which is called Apit Weak . Séla means rock; associated with weak which means “land”.

The appearance of the moon in the Javanese calendar is as follows.

• The 1st of the Javanese month, the moon looks very small-just like a line, this is interpreted as a newborn baby, which gradually becomes bigger and brighter;
• The 14th of the Javanese month is called the full moon sidhi , the full moon represents adults who are married or married;
• The 15th of the Javanese month is called full moon , the moon still looks full, but there is already a sign of size and light is slightly reduced;
• The 20th of the Javanese month is called panglong , this is interpreted as someone who has started to lose his memory;
• The 25th of the Javanese month is called sumup , this is interpreted as someone who has started to be taken care of by other people or returns like a baby;
• The 26th of the Javanese month is called Manjing , this means that humans return to their original place again.
• The remaining four or five days symbolize the time when humans will begin to be reborn into a new worldly life.

The Year Cycle in the Javanese Calendar

One year in the Javanese calendar has an age of 354 3/8 days. For this reason, there is an eight-year cycle known as windu . In one windu there are eight years, each of which has its own name, namely Alip , Ehe , Jimawal , Je , Dal , Be , Wawu , and Jimakir . The years of Ehe , Dal , and Jimakir have a lifespan of 355 days and are known as long years ( Taun Wuntu ), while the remaining 354 days are known as short years ( Taun Wastu).). In this long year, the big month as the last month has a life of 30 days.

In addition, there is a 32 year cycle of four windu, namely the names of the days, markets, dates and months which repeat exactly or are called mash . The four windu in the cycle are named Kuntara , Sangara , Sancaya , and Adi . Each of these windu has its own symbol, namely Kulawu and Langkir . Each symbol is eight years old, so the total cycle of the signs is 16 years old.

Even so, there are still differences in calculations between the Javanese year and the Hijri year. Every 120 years, there will be a difference of one day in the two calendar systems. This is what made at that time the Javanese year was given an additional day. This 120 year period is called khurup .

Until the early 21st century, there were four khurup, namely Khurup Jumuwah Legi/Amahgi (1555 J–1627 J/1633 AD–1703 AD), Khurup Kemis Kliwon/Amiswon (1627 J–1747 J/1703 AD–1819 AD), Khurup Rebo Wage/Aboge (1867 J–1987 J/1819 M–1963 AD), and Khurup Selasa Pon/Asapon (1867 J–1987 J/1936 AD–2053 AD).

The current khurup name refers to the day that falls on the 1st month of Sura in the year Alip . On Khurup Asapon , the 1st of the month Sura of the year Alip will always fall on the Tuesday of Pon for a period of 120 years.

Wuku and Neptu

Related to the Javanese calendar, it is also known that the time period is considered to determine the character of the child being born, just as astrology is related to the Gregorian calendar. This period is called Wuku and the science of calculation is called Pawukon . There are 30 Wuku , each of which has a lifespan of 7 days, so that one Wuku cycle has a lifespan of 210 days which is called the Wuku Kitchen .

Besides Wuku , there is also Neptu which is used to see the value of a day. There are two kinds of Neptu , namely Neptu Dina and Neptu Pasaran .

Neptu Dina is a number used to mark the value of days in saptawara , while Neptu Pasaran is used to mark the value of days in pancawara . These values ​​are used to calculate the pros and cons of a day related to certain activities and the character of someone born on that day.

The Sultan Agungan calendar begins on Friday Legi on 1 Sura in the year Alip 1555 J, or 1 Muharram 1043 H, or 8 July 1633. This event occurs on Windu Kuntara, the Kulawu symbol and is marked by a sengkala moon which reads Jemparingen Buta Galak Iku (arrows of wild giants That).

Since then, the Mataram Sultanate and its successors have been able to hold traditional celebrations in tune with Islamic holidays. Traditional ceremonies such as the Garebeg are not an obstacle to the development of Islam, but instead are used as symbols of the religion itself.

This new calendar system was an attempt by a far-sighted leader to combine the two currents of civilization at that time, a reconciliation between the waves of Islamic culture and pre-Islamic civilizations. The new civilization which is now known as Mataram Islam.

Weton relationship with Javanese Primbon

Weton is used by Javanese people to determine something, be it character, one’s luck, even fate and others. However, a Javanese primbon book is needed to find out these predictions.

Primbon Java is a heritage book from the ancestors of the Javanese people who have an orientation towards the relationship between human life and the universe. Javanese primbon books have also been a source of reference for Javanese people for a long time.

Javanese primbon books have a function as a guide for determining attitudes in an action and one’s life. The contents of this book are predictions, various kinds of Javanese knowledge, magical formulas and a number system that is complicated enough to calculate lucky days and take care of all kinds of important activities such as matchmaking, marriage and others.

To find out the things above or to calculate lucky days, one’s Javanese weton and neptu are needed.

Java Neptu Table and How to Calculate Weton

Based on the table above, each day and market has various values. The way to calculate weton is to add up the value of the birthday with the Sinaumed’s market. Furthermore, see the following explanation for calculating weton with the Javanese neptu table.

The first way to calculate weton is to use neptu days with the Javanese market. in the Javanese neptu table, Sinaumed’s can observe that each day and Javanese market has a different value. In this case, how to calculate the weton can be done by adding up the value of the day and market owned at the weton of birth.

For example, if Sinaumed’s has a date of birth on Saturday with the Javanese kliwon market, it means that Sinaumed’s’ weton is Saturday Kliwon. To calculate the number of wetons, Sinaumed’s can add up the value 9, namely the number of neptu birthdays, namely Saturday, with a value of 8, namely the Javanese kliwon market.

So, 9+8 = 17, the number of neptu weton of someone who was born on Saturday kliwon is 17. With this number, Sinaumed’s can find out a person’s character, calculate luck, how does one get testimony and how to calculate partner compatibility.

In addition to how to calculate the Javanese weton in the first way, there is also a way to calculate the second Javanese weton based on the Javanese month and year.

In contrast to the first method, the Javanese neptu for months and years is usually used to estimate the rainy season, planting season, dry season, pests and diseases of certain plants, amount of harvest, fish catch and so on.

The 12 names of the months in the Javanese calendar are actually not much different from the months in the Islamic calendar. Meanwhile, the names of the years in the Javanese calendar consist of eight types.

In Javanese culture, the Javanese calendar will change every year once every windu. Therefore, every eight years, the name of the year on the Javanese calendar will change according to the order, namely Alip, Ehe, Jimawal, Je, Dal, Be, Wawu and the last is the year of Jim Akhir.

The following is a table of Javanese calculations based on the month and year.

From the table above, Sinaumed’s can calculate a person’s weton with the neptu month and Javanese year. For example, if someone was born in the month of Ruwah and in the year of Wawu, then Sinaumed’s needs to add up the value of 4 in the month of Ruwah and 6 in the year of Wau.

4+6 = 10, the number 10 is the final result of the sum and weton neptu of the Javanese month and year.

Meaning of Neptu Weton Matchmaking Results

After Sinaumed’s knows how to calculate the neptu weton, Sinaumed’s will get a number that functions to find out various things, such as lucky days, character, and even a mate. Usually the neptu weton calculation is more reasonable and commonly used for marriages or arranged marriages. With neptu weton, both candidates can see compatibility between each other, even get an idea of ​​compatibility and when should the wedding day be held.

Here are some meanings of the results of Javanese neptu calculations about a mate or partner.

1. Pegat (1, 9, 10, 18, 19, 27, 28, 36)

From the results of the neptu weton pegat calculation, it means that Sinaumed’s’ relationship with his partner is included in the vulnerable category. Pegat, according to Javanese primbon, is an indication of the possibility that Sinaumed’s and their partners often have problems in life.

2. Queen (2, 11, 20, 29)

If Sinaumed’s gets the results of a neptu weton calculation with the numbers 2,11,20, or 29, then it means that Sinaumed’s is quite lucky. Because, the category of the number of neptu weton Ratu means Sinaumed’s and the couple is a true soul mate. Sinaumed’s will have a very harmonious, happy relationship and even your relationship can make many people jealous because you two look so compatible.

3. Matchmaking (3, 12, 21, 30)

The meaning of the third neptu weton calculation is probably the meaning of the calculation that many couples really want. Because, if Sinaumed’s has a neptu number of 3, 12, 21, and 30, it means that Sinaumed’s and the Sinaumed’s pair are soul mates. More than that, it is predicted that Sinaumed’s and the Sinaumed’s couple will have a harmonious household life at all times.

If you get the results of this one neptu weton calculation, Sinaumed’s might be able to marry his partner without worrying!

4. Topo (4, 13, 22, 31)

The result of the fourth neptu weton calculation is the neptu topo category, namely 13,4,31 or 22. If Sinaumed’s gets the results of the neptu topo calculation, then Sinaumed’s needs to increase vigilance. Because, according to Javanese primbon, the meaning of neptu topo is that Sinaumed’s and his partner will experience difficulties during the early days of being married.

5. Tinari (5, 14, 23, 32)

If Sinaumed’s gets a calculation result of 5, 14, 23, or 32 then the number of neptu weton is included in the tinari, which means that Sinaumed’s doesn’t need to worry and can be calmer. Because tinari means happy news for Sinaumed’s.

The happiness in question is sufficient sustenance when Sinaumed’s builds a household. Apart from that, Sinaumed’s and his family will also be given the convenience of finding sustenance.

6. Solid (6, 15, 24, 33)

In Javanese, solid means arguing which characterizes a bad relationship. As the name implies, the number of neptu weton solid, namely 6, 15, 24 and 33, indicates a bad prediction for the life of the Sinaumed’s household and their partners. Even so, Sinaumed’s can be calmer because the relationship between Sinaumed’s and his partner will not end in divorce.

7. Sujanan (7, 16, 25, 34)

The result of the neptu weton calculation in the seventh match is sujanan with the numbers 7, 16, 25 or 34. If you get the neptu sujanan result, then Sinaumed’s needs to be more careful and alert.

The reason is that according to Javanese primbon, people who are included in the sujanan category are people or couples who are under threat of a big fight in the household caused by an affair.

8. Pesthi (8, 17, 26, 35)

According to the neptu weton mate calculation, people who have a number of pesthi calculations, namely 8, 17, 26, and 35 are people who will have a household that gets along well with their partner. If Sinaumed’s has the number of neptu weton match one, then Sinaumed’s will have a harmonious and harmonious family life.

The Neptu Distribution Still Has Calculations

In addition to the eight categories of neptu weton mate above, there are neptu division results that still leave remnants of the calculations and the meaning of the remaining neptu calculations is related to the luck of Sinaumed’s and his partner. Here’s an explanation.

1. Wasesa Segara or the remaining one, is predicted to have a big heart, have an authoritative character and smooth sustenance.
2. Semi arrears or the remaining two, according to Javanese primbon, means that there will be obstacles in terms of sustenance.
3. Satria Wibawa or the remaining three means that the remaining Neptu calculations are figures who will later be respected and respected in their environment.
4. Sumur Sinaba or the remaining four, according to Javanese primbon, means that Sinaumed’s will be filled with inspiration, live in harmony and become a role model for those around Sinaumed’s.
5. According to Javanese primbon, Satria Wirang or the remaining five will often face various kinds of difficulties in life. However, it was not explained what kind of difficulties Sinaumed’s would face.
6. Bumi Kepatak or the remaining six according to Javanese primbon means that Sinaumed’s will need to work hard in life to achieve his goals and the things he wants in life.
7. Lebu Ketiup Angin or the remaining seven in Javanese primbon, the remainder of this neptu calculation will face a difficulty, especially when Sinaumed’s wants to achieve dreams or aspirations, because Sinaumed’s will have difficulty finding peace.

Apart from calculating the neptu weton of a mate to see the compatibility between Sinaumed’s and their partner, the neptu calculation can also be used to calculate auspicious days based on the Javanese weton. Its function is so that when the wedding is held, the bride and groom and the wedding ceremony will not encounter any obstacles or difficulties.

In order to find out a good day, there is a different formula that Sinaumed’s needs to understand. The formula used is the number of neptu of the two prospective bride and groom, then if the two neptu are added to the auspicious days, then divided by five, the result must leave a number of three.

If the calculation results show more than three, that day is a good day to hold a wedding or other important event.

Also read:

Listen and Know! How to Build Passion Within Yourself – Being an enthusiastic and passionate person in doing something is what most people dream of because enthusiasm and passion make everything we do and the days we spend more colorful. Everyone without exception must have another side to themselves that cannot always be shown to the general public, especially those related to their passion.

It seems that the passion or passion for life that is ingrained in some people cannot always be shown to the surface because one way or another they decide to keep it to themselves even though that passion may be something they really like and are interested in.

Several factors such as job demands, the economy, personality, or even physical conditions are some of the things that prevent some people from closing their passions deeply. However, as we know, opportunities are always there and can come at any time, including to awaken the passion that is within us, whether it’s passion in hobbies, dream jobs, or aspirations that have not been realized so far.

So, therefore, in this discussion, we will try to discuss ways to awaken the passion that is sleeping inside every person who has that passion.

Furthermore, we will review the discussion below!

Definition of Passion

Before we discuss further about how to awaken passion in us, let’s look at the definition of passion itself below!

According to the Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI), passion means passion, passion, great desire, joy, emotion, anger and anxiety

Basically, the concept of passion is not ambition, desire, dream or wish. However, passion is something that begins with awareness.

Passion because it’s someone’s desire to do something or activity that he likes or thinks is important. Those who already have passion are willing to do various things to achieve something. In fact, they are willing to use their time, energy, and mind to achieve something.

This is something we consider to be a passion. So if you find something or activity that makes you ready to ignite things in your life, it means you have found a passion that you enjoy.

According to Vallerand and Houlfar, passion is a strong tendency to perform pleasurable actions.

Although according to Covey, the definition of passion is a burning desire, a strong belief and desire that can make a person disciplined to achieve his vision.

Pertula also stated that passion is a psychological state characterized by positive and strong emotional feelings, inner desire and high commitment to an activity that is considered meaningful by someone.

Gani and Priambodo stated that passion is a strong desire or passion that is aroused when a person believes that he will achieve pleasant results. Gani and Priambodo also interpret the opinion about passion that he who has no hope also loses passion. Passion or passion also refers to a state of mind, according to Gan and Priambodo.

Augustine gives his opinion about the meaning of passion. According to Augustine, passion is a passionate and passionate spirit to achieve a goal, a great desire and willingness to suffer for that goal. According to Augustine, passion is driven by feelings of love, which then creates passion to achieve goals and desires. Apart from this joy, according to Augustine, there is also suffering in desire.

Passion (from the Greek “suffer, endure” and from the late Latin (particularly Christian) passio “passion; suffering” (from the Latin pati “suffer”; participle: passus)) is a term denoting a feeling of strength and violence. or tendencies or nearly uncontrollability in relation to certain people or things. Passion can vary from a strong interest in, or admiration for, an idea, proposal, or goal; enjoy an interest or activity with enthusiasm; strong attraction, excitement or feelings for someone. It is used primarily in the context of romance or sexual desire, although it usually conveys a deeper or broader range of emotions than the term lust, often including the notions of ecstasy and/or agony.

Denis Diderot (1713-178) described passion as “desire”. We call inclinations, desires, and aversions brought to a certain intensity, by vague feelings of pleasure or pain, caused or followed by the disordered movements of blood and animal spirits, lust. . They can be so strong as to prevent the exercise of all personal liberties, a state in which the soul is somehow passive; hence the name lust. These tendencies, or so-called inclinations of the soul, arise from our understanding that great good or great evil is contained in the object of passion itself.

How to Awaken Passion in Us

Finding or identifying passion is not easy. In fact, it often takes a long time. Even for years. There are many cases where people don’t know their passion until they are alive. As well as encouraging you to do something passionately, we also cover how to build on that.

Here are some ways to generate passion in us:

• Find the motivation behind the decision
• Find your value and what you believe in
• Do some self-reflection
• Look for patterns and themes in the answers to the questions you ask yourself
• Start thinking about what you want to do
• Also think about what activities you’ve always wanted to do
• Set goals
• Don’t commit yourself, commit to “ready but” behavior
• Mind calming exercises
• Be patient with yourself
• Draw a conclusion

1. Ask yourself

The first way is to ask yourself; do you like something? Think about what activities you do and what you really like. You’ve been doing it for a long time. Maybe from childhood. You do it all the time and you love the activity.

2. Find out about topics that interest you by spending time reading

In general, people who like something often know what they like. There are many ways to get information, one of which is by reading. Take a look, so far you often read which topics. Trending topics become the door to discovering what your true passion is.

3. Brainstorm

It’s okay if you can’t imagine anything. You really don’t know what you’ve been doing all this time. Maybe you need to do some brainstorming. The trick is to get out a piece of paper and start jotting down ideas. Write down what comes to mind.

If necessary look around the house. Write down your observations. Everything that comes to mind and is written down on paper becomes material for your own evaluation.

4. Ask about

Asking other people’s opinions is fine. You can ask about your passion to people you trust so far. discuss Find out how others found their passion. What are they doing?

Asking others gives you food for thought. Actually, there are many possibilities.

5. Do not stop working first

This method is mainly for those who are already working. So if you’re already working but don’t know what your passion is, don’t rush to leave. It’s no fun to work without passion, but the decision to leave a job without passion should be considered carefully. If you decide to go out, be well prepared.

6. Try it first

Before you decide to pursue your passion, do some experimenting first. For example, you work, but without passion. Then you think that your passion is not in this job and you are attracted to other tasks that match your passion. You can try a job that suits your passion by taking a side job.

This method is used to determine whether the job is really an interesting field or not. Is it really your passion?

7. Do a lot of research, you need to do a lot of research

The next option is to do as much research as possible. Through research, you can get comprehensive information about what you are interested in. Research can be done as easily as searching for information in books, the internet, magazines and the media. In addition, you can explore through questions and discussions.

8. Practice, practice, and practice some more

Keep practicing until you find your passion. Finding your passion might be hard, but that’s okay. Keep the spirit and practice, ok?

9. Don’t quit

When you can’t find your passion, it must be tiring. However, keep trying and if you still don’t know your passion. Take a short break if necessary. Take a break, but don’t stop trying.

Two Types of Passion

In psychology, Professor J. Vallerand said that passion is divided into two types, namely passion for harmony and passion for obsession. Both differ in their effect on the individual concerned.

Two types of lust are described below.

1. Passion Harmony

Passion Harmony is positive passion. Someone does something out of pleasure, love, and according to your love for something. For example, if you can turn your hobby into a source of income.

With a desire for harmony, you are happier because there is no conflict between your actions and your personal values. The steps taken in practice are more organized, have clear goals, and the results of your work are more organized and can be evaluated with a cool head.

2. Passion full of passion

What is passionate passion? This is based on external factors, such as the obligation to receive a high salary to support the family.

In this passion, you are forced to act, even if it doesn’t match your personal values. In fact, you are like a robot in that you have no ability to control the results and you may not like the results.

Studies show that people who are prone to lust and obsessions are rarely gentle when it comes to problems or challenges in their life. Such people are also often characterized by intolerance towards things that go against their passions and obsessions.

Benefits of Finding Passion for Yourself

Here are 5 benefits of passion that you will get if you do it with passion:

1. Build a strong character

Passion makes a person a strong character. How could that be? So when someone does something with passion, he still tries to reach his goal.

No matter how many people underestimate it. It encourages persistence. This character makes a person a strong person.

2. Teaching about time estimates

A person who knows his passion automatically knows what his goal is. For that, he knows which activities should be prioritized. Don’t waste time on useless things.

3. Increase people’s joy in life and work

There is a big difference between people who recognize their passions and those who don’t. A person who recognizes his desires clearly knows what he wants.

Another case with people who have no passion. He tends to do things for other people or on other people’s orders. Hence, he does not live a contented life because he acts according to the wishes or orders of others.

At the same time, passionate people are satisfied with what they do. He enjoys every process, and even though obstacles often arise, he tries to find a way out. It is believed that passionate people enjoy life and work more.

4. Improve concentration

On the other hand, passion drives a person to do something wholeheartedly. It’s also what separates people who have passion from those who don’t. Someone who doesn’t have passion tends to do something half-heartedly because they don’t do it voluntarily.

Passionate person knows very well what he is doing. What are the goals and objectives. This makes it easier to concentrate. It’s easier to focus on what you want.

5. Reducing stress

Other benefits based on research published in The Annals of Behavioral Medicine. Passion can remember stress. In addition, passion also increases passion and happiness. This is because passion affects the purpose of life. He feels his life is full of meaning.

According to Ika Indriasari and Noni Setyorini, passion is related to work. The benefits described above are generally the benefits of passion. So, Ika Indriasari and Noni Setyorini’s research specifically looks at the impact of passion in work.

Two of the three planned hypotheses are correct, namely passion has a positive effect on work performance. Second, the meaning of work affects morale. The higher the importance, the stronger the relationship between morality and performance.

So the benefits of passion in the world of work are not just a figment of the imagination. Passion affects performance and morale. Therefore, a workplace that supports and supports the morale of employees is very necessary to keep them motivated and excited.

This fact shows the importance of passion in a career. Before you enter the world of work, you must identify your passion from now on. This will make it easier for you later when you graduate and finally go to work, because working with passion is much more fun than working without passion.

Conclusion

That’s a brief discussion of how to awaken passion in yourself. The discussion this time does not only discuss how to awaken passion in oneself but also discusses the definition of passion, then discusses the types and benefits of passion itself. Finding out how to build passion in ourselves really helps us to more easily develop passion in ourselves and how to develop it so that it becomes something positive in our lives.

Thus a review of how to awaken passion in yourself. For Sinaumed’s who want to learn all about how to build passion in themselves and other psychology-related knowledge, you can visit sinaumedia.com to get related books.

As #FriendsWithoutLimits, sinaumedia always provides the best products, so you have the best and latest information for you. To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information.

Author: Pandu Akram

Related article:

Optimism is Never Give Up: Find Out Its Definition and Benefits

Know the Types of Work

What is Passion & How to Find Passion

10+ Ways to Eliminate Lazy Feelings to Get Excited Again

Optimistic Definition, Characteristics and 5 Benefits

How to Become an Archaeologist – If you love all things related to ancient civilizations, then the archaeologist profession is the ideal job for you. Archeology itself is a science that belongs to the branch of the humanities and the work of archaeologists is none other than to find out how certain people lived in certain historical stages. These archaeologists have a responsibility to research as well as uncover human history and add significant value to society and the economy with their findings.

These professionals will look for patterns to understand why and how human behavior has evolved. Meanwhile, becoming an archaeologist requires a commitment to higher education, training, and persistence in the field. This profession can be useful for those who have a passion for archeology.

As we know, history is a puzzle consisting of millions of pieces, from buildings to bones, from plates to armor. Archaeologists will search for and collect these pieces, then piece them together to create an image of the past.

What is Archeology?

Archeology is a study of human culture from different eras by combining history and geology. Someone who studies this science is called a student majoring in archeology who in their studies will study material on cultural history of various artifacts from time to time, such as inscriptions and also paintings found in various locations. Apart from that, someone who studies in this field of knowledge will also learn about how to dig up ancient artifacts, examine various historical facts behind artifacts, estimate the age of artifacts, how early human evolution moved, and of course will learn about museum organizations.

Archeology or a scientific field that studies related to ancient history is a science that studies human culture in the past through a systematic study of documentary data. This systematic study includes discovery, documentation, analysis, cultural values, customs, norms, customary laws, as well as interpretation of data in the form of artifacts (material culture, such as axes, stones and temples) and ecofac (environmental objects, such as rocks, earth features, and its kind). Fossils and their characteristics (artifacts cannot be separated from their location (archaeological site).

A special research technique is archaeological digging or excavation, although this investigative technique is still archeological in nature. The aims of archeology are quite varied and are the subject of long debate, including what is called capital archeology, compiling cultural history, understanding changes in the attitudes of living things, and also understanding the process of cultural change. Because it has the aim of understanding the culture of living things, including one of them, namely humans, this archeology is classified as a humanities group.

However, various supporting sciences are used, including history, anthropology, geology (with the knowledge of the layers of the earth’s formation as a reference for the relative age of a discovery), archeology), geography, architecture, paleontology and biological anthropology, physics (including carbon c- 14 for absolute dating), metallurgy (for obtaining the elements of metal objects), and philology (study of ancient manuscripts).

Today, archeology covers a wide variety of related fields. For example, the discovery of a buried corpse will arouse the interest of experts from various fields to study the clothing and the type of material used, the shape of the pottery, as well as how it was used, the pattern of distribution, beliefs related to what was buried with the body. Chemists can determine the age of excavations through methods such as measuring carbon-14. Meanwhile, geneticists who want to understand the movements of the first human migrations, they will research their DNA.

Specifically, this science of archeology studies the past, ancient cultures, both in prehistoric times and in historical times. In its development, archeology can also study contemporary culture, as is usual in the study of modern material culture. Because it is based on objects that existed in the past, archeology really needs to preserve these objects as a source of reference data. From there, another discipline developed, namely archaeological resource management (Archaeological Resources Management), or more broadly, cultural resource management (CRM, Culture Resources Management).

According to the Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI), archeology is the study of ancient life and culture through its remains. Starting from household utensils and also statues. Archeology in English is called archeology. Meanwhile, according to the Encyclopedia Britannica (2015), archeology is the scientific study of the remains of material life and human activities in the past.

According to Paul Bahn, the notion of archeology is a systematic study of the past based on material culture with the aim of uncovering, interpreting, and also classifying cultural heritage, describing the forms and behavior of people in the past and studying human history.

This archeology plays an important role as a major source of knowledge of ancient and possibly extinct cultures. According to A. Nurkidam and Hasmiah Herawaty in their book Archeology as an Introduction (2019), etymologically, the word archeology comes from Greek, namely archeo and logo. Archeo means ancient and logo means knowledge. Meanwhile, from a terminological perspective, archeology can be interpreted as a science that studies socio-cultural aspects of the past through the remains of found materials, with the aim of compiling and describing these events.

Duties of an Archaeologist

Archaeologist himself is someone who is already an expert in the field of archeology. Where these archaeologists are tasked with investigating historical and prehistoric sites and physical remains to understand human relations with the past with the aim of preserving past cultures. The archaeologists will try to find clues about the past. Generally, they use various kinds of extraction or excavation techniques. Tools such as shovels, axes, as well as bulldozers are commonly used to help archaeologists coordinate and participate in field work to try to excavate artifacts, such as ancient tools, pottery, seeds, or animal bones.

In addition, archaeologists are also responsible for the conservation of the artifacts they recover. These activities generally involve bringing the item back to the laboratory where it can be cleaned, recovered, and stabilized. Data collection is the main task of other archaeologists. Before, during, and also after excavations, these archaeologists take notes, drawings, samples, maps, measurements, as well as other information about the archaeological site. Archaeologists are not only tasked with finding information, but also using it to educate. Many archaeologists have professorships and are involved in publishing and teaching.

Requirements to Become an Archaeologist

When you graduate from high school or vocational school, you may have imagined that you plan to continue your studies to college instead of working or being unemployed. This is a good choice, because the higher a person’s education, the easier it will be to improve their standard of living. Job opportunities will also be wider with higher salaries. The courses you take can be adjusted according to your interests and talents. One of the choices of majors that you can choose is the archeology department. This one major is still very rare and only exists in six universities in Indonesia.

However, can this archeology graduate work anywhere? Due to the scarcity of archeology graduates, it makes the job opportunities even more promising. They can work as archaeologists with salaries starting from Rp. 4 million to Rp. 7 million. Meanwhile, for work as an overseas archaeologist, the salary can reach Rp. 800 million. If you are interested in studying archeology, first make sure you have the following characteristics:

1. Have a hobby of traveling. Where those who choose archeology majors will be familiar with traveling to find ancient sites.
2. Curious about life in ancient times or ancient humans. For those of you who want to major in archeology, make sure you have a very high level of curiosity about the life of civilizations that existed in the past. Because, the task of students of this department is to uncover the veil of life in ancient times.

How to Become an Archaeologist

As with most professions in the world, training is key to becoming a good archaeologist. Therefore, it is important to enroll in a university with a major in archeology and take different subjects, be it at the theoretical or practical level. An archaeologist’s job is to study the past by considering the remains found in excavations.

For that, the key is to graduate from the degrees mentioned earlier and take a Master’s degree to specialize in a particular subject in the field of archaeology. A professional in this field must certainly analyze the bones of the teeth or certain tools found in ancient deposits. The goal itself is to develop certain ideas about how civilizations lived in the past.
The following are some of the steps you need to take to become an archaeologist, including:

1. Getting a Bachelor’s Degree

The first step that must be taken by an archaeologist is to complete an undergraduate program in anthropology or a related field such as history or geography. There are many undergraduate archeology programs that provide hands-on experience through laboratory classes and fieldwork programs.

2. Participate in an Internship

Many budding archaeologists prefer to participate in an apprenticeship program, either during or after they have completed their undergraduate program. The internship will provide the fieldwork experience required for many archaeological work. Common places that may offer archeology internships are museums, government agencies, as well as archaeological organizations.

3. Getting a Master’s Degree

While an entry-level archaeologist position may only require a bachelor’s degree, most other archeology jobs will require you to have a master’s degree. A master’s degree here allows students to further develop the technical skills necessary to work as archaeologists and choose which area of ​​archeology they wish to focus on. Common master’s degrees offered for this profession are anthropology and archeology programs.

4. Consider a Doctoral Degree

If you want to work as a college professor of archeology or lead a high-level archaeological project, then you may be asked to have a Ph.D. in archeology or a related field. Doctoral degrees here usually take two to three years to complete in addition to the several months of field research associated with the dissertation.

5. Looking for a Job

Depends on what kind of archaeologist you want and where you want to work. You can start work after you receive a bachelor’s or master’s degree. Finding archeology work as soon as you are qualified is an important thing to do in order to gain experience that will allow you to advance in your career. Entry-level jobs for archaeologists include site excavation technician, research assistant, and also archaeological laboratory technician.

Types of Archaeologist Profession

There are several different areas of archeology that you can specialize in. The field you choose will determine the type of archaeologist you will be. The following are some of the most common types of archaeologists practiced today, including:

1. Underwater Archaeologist

This type of archeology studies underwater remains as well as evidence of shipwrecks, cities buried under water as well as other underwater sites. In addition to the more general archaeological basis, an underwater archaeologist must also have knowledge of the specific techniques needed to carry out underwater exploration. This one field can also be referred to as marine or maritime archeology.

2. Ethnoarchaeologist

Ethnoarchaeologists are very concerned with uncovering clues and insights that explore ethnography or the customs and traditions of people and their culture. An ethnoarchaeologist can study the ancient culture that existed in a certain area by comparing it to the way of life of modern humans in that area. This type of archeology often involves examining groups of modern-day individuals and using the findings to infer how ancient people’s cultures lived.

3. Environmental Archaeologist

Archaeologists in this field focus on studying the relationship between the natural environment and ancient human groups. For example, an environmental archaeologist might try to determine which animals and plants existed during a certain period of time and how people at that time incorporated them into their lives. There are three sub-sections in the type of environmental archeology, namely geoarchaeology, zooarchaeology and archaeobotany.

Archaeological Science Objectives

In the journal Center for Research and Research on Archeology of West Kalimantan (2013) written by Benson Manalu, archeology generally aims to collect accurate data about life in the past. When described, this archeology has three main objectives, including:

– To present the cultural history of society in the past.
– Show how people lived in the past.
– Symbolizes the process of cultural change in the past.

Thus the discussion about what is archeology and how to become an archaeologist. The discussion this time does not only discuss about that, but also some goals and also the types of archeology that you can learn. Understanding the notion of archeology makes us rich in new insights regarding the world’s historical setting and also its developments which are rarely understood by ordinary people.

It also makes us contribute because we are also part of ongoing history. For Sinaumed’s who want to learn all about the notion of archeology and other history-related science, you can visit sinaumedia.com to get related books. As #FriendsWithoutLimits, sinaumedia always provides the best products, so you have the best and latest information for you. To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information.

The profession of a pilot is the dream of many people, although it is not easy to achieve because flying and driving an airplane requires a certification or license through an official exam. To become a pilot you have to go to flight school and have high discipline.

But you know, Job opportunities as pilots will always be open, because more than 620,000 new pilots are needed who can fly commercial aircraft in the next 15-20 years.

This is due to the growth of the national and international aviation industry which causes the need for pilots for domestic and international airlines to continue to increase in line with route expansion and an increase in the number of aircraft. So, Realize your goals immediately, but first know about the following ins and outs of the profession. Check these out!

Pilot as a term for a person who drives an airplane. A pilot is responsible for flight security and safety, he has the authority to take various actions to prevent flight security and safety disturbances.

On a flight the pilot will drive the plane according to his flight plan . In his duties in the cockpit of the aircraft, the pilot will be assisted by a co-pilot, and during the flight from the time the door is closed for take off until the first door is opened after landing , the pilot and co-pilot will follow the flight paths that have been registered and programmed through aircraft navigation system assistance as well as information provided by traffic control towers at airports and air traffic service officers along the way.

In a double-manned aircraft, a clear division of tasks must be determined regarding who is the pilot flying  and who is the pilot monitoring . The synergy of task division and work coordination between the two will then result in better, safer and more efficient flights.

On a commercial flight, the pilot and co-pilot are in charge of driving the plane while flight attendants and stewardess are in charge of ensuring the safety, security and comfort of passengers on the flight. Pilots, co-pilots, and flight attendants or stewards (flight attendants) are referred to as flight crew (aircrew) . Conversations conducted by the pilot, co-pilot with traffic service officers and almost all parameters of the existing system are recorded by the black box (flight data recorder).

This book with the title  Civil Aviation Traffic Management contains management and regulation in controlling air traffic and air space dynamically and integrated through the provision of seamless facilities and services. This book will be very important and useful for flight personnel related to aircraft operational activities, especially ATC personnel (ATCO) and pilots as ATCO partners.

How to Become a Pilot

The main requirement to become a pilot is to take pilot education first. Anyone can take this education as long as they meet the requirements and have passed the selection. In order to get into a pilot school, there are high requirements, including:

• Minimum body 160 cm
• Have a healthy physical condition
• Not color blind, and various other requirements.
• Have good English skills.

Majors that can be taken to pursue this profession include Aviation Engineering , Aviation Safety, and Aviation Management . Complete information about the Aviation department can be seen in the Aviation Department.

As a profession that demands expertise or skills in piloting an airplane, a pilot must first take an official written exam and a flight test held by an aviation school and aviation authority.

If passed the test, a pilot will receive a flying certificate or pilot license , which is a letter acknowledging the pilot’s ability (competency to fly an aircraft of a certain type or size. The license itself consists of various types and has different levels. The flight licenses consist of PPL, CPL, ATPL, and ME, Sinaumed’s.

Pilots Duties

The pilot’s duties include:

• Flying an
  
  Airplane Aircraft safety is the responsibility of a pilot because it is his duty to be able to fly an airplane professionally by paying attention to the weather and flight techniques.
• Keeping Passengers Safe
  
  Not only proficient in flying planes, but a pilot is also required to be responsible and guarantee that all passengers boarding the plane will arrive at their destination safely. This task is actually devoted to commercial pilots – pilots who work for airlines and fly planes for pay. Not only that, the pilot must also ensure that the passengers are also very comfortable on the way.
• Maintaining Good Personal Health
  
  Almost all professions engaged in the service sector have the greatest responsibility for consumers. However, even so a pilot also must not forget about his own health. It is everyone’s responsibility, including pilots, to take care of their own health. This is because when on duty the pilot’s body condition must be in a fit condition, because if he is not in a healthy condition it can affect the flight and also the safety of passengers.
• Fully understands his abilities and the limits of his own expertise and also understands the limits of the capabilities of the aircraft he flies

Pilot Profession Provisions

Indonesia has implemented flight hours limits for pilots, which are contained in the Minister of Transportation Regulation No. 28 of 2013. In the appendix to this regulation, it is stated that a pilot and co-pilot are prohibited from flying more than 9 hours in one day consecutively. Not only that, the limit of overtime protection for a pilot. Airlines must also pay attention to the variable duration of pilot work in other periods of time. The variable is not more than 1,050 hours in a calendar year, more than 110 hours in a calendar month and more than 30 hours in 7 consecutive days.

Pilots can work for airlines or commercial aircraft, helicopters for the distribution of goods and information, or small aircraft. Unlike the drivers of other modes of transportation, pilots are bound by more specific rules. Pilot fitness conditions are even regulated in the International Civil Aviation Organization (ICAO) Council and implemented in International Standards and Recommended Practices or what are commonly referred to as SARPs. ICAO emphasizes the importance of the condition of the pilot or pilot who is free from fatigue.

Pilot Career Path

Aircraft pilot is one of the most coveted job processes in society. A Pilot’s Career Path starts from:

• Second Officer – For novice pilots who have just graduated from pilot school, the experience they have is of course still very minimal. Airlines will not immediately give excessive flight hours to new graduates because they do not want to take risks that might occur. Usually, second officers are only allowed to carry small planes which will be accompanied by a captain.
• First Officer – A first officer is allowed to pilot the aircraft accompanied by a captain. Typically, they assist the captain in controlling the aircraft’s flight in terms of navigation. Sometimes, he also replaces the captain’s position when the captain is absent. The requirements that a first officer must have include having an ATPL and ME license first
• Captain – Captain is the highest career level for a pilot. The pilot captain is in charge of supervising the FO when flying the plane. The captain is also responsible for everything that happens during the flight

Pilot Passcode

After knowing the duties of a pilot, as a pilot candidate you must also know the passwords or codes that pilots often use in their work. What do you think? Here are some of them:

• Doors To Arrival : This first code code is a critical or emergency instruction addressed to stewards or flight attendants to get ready because the plane will be landing soon. The purpose of this password is for cabin crew to immediately deactivate the emergency slide system attached to the door. To prevent it from expanding at the gate. This is because if the emergency slide system is not deactivated, it will automatically inflate when the door is opened.
• Crosscheck : A term used by pilots and cabin crew to mean that they must check the duties of other colleagues. Inside the cabin, stewards or flight attendants check with each other whether tasks have been carried out. For example, to ensure the emergency exit is activated or deactivated as needed.
• All-Call : A direct request to each cabin crew to report via intercom from their respective posts.
• Flight Deck: Synonym of the cockpit or cabin where the pilot and copilot are located.
• Final Approach: Final approach while approaching the runway for landing, when reaching a straight section of the landing strip, or parallel to the runway centerline which does not require additional maneuvering.
• Direct Flight : Airline pilot’s job function. The meaning of direct flight or direct flight is not the same as a non-stop flight which does not stop at all, from takeoff to the final destination. A direct flight means a flight with a route that doesn’t change, but there is a possibility that the plane will stop to transit passengers.

This is information about the duties assigned to a pilot and the codes normally used in the world of aviation. So, if you want to become a pilot, make sure you are mentally prepared, Sinaumed’s.

This book will be very much needed and useful for aviation personnel who are related to the regulation, guidance and control of air space, both civil and military circles, especially for the aviation community, namely pilots, technicians and flight operations officers.

Source: from various sources

How to Become a DPR – In the current era, becoming a member of the DPR is the dream of some people. There are many things that make them want to be part of the DPR, one of which is the salary and benefits they receive.

There were even conversations among the teenagers that their goal was not to become a doctor or engineer like most, but to become a member of the DPR.

However, not everyone can become the DPR. Intense competition and a lot of capital are also required to become a member of the People’s Legislative Assembly. In addition, the way of thinking of a DPR must really have a concept for the people, not only for oneself, the group and their class.

So, how do you go about becoming a House of Representatives? What must be required to become part of the House of Representatives? Then, what are the tasks that must be carried out by a DPR?

So that Sinaumed’s won’t be curious about this for too long, let’s look at the following review!

Main Requirements to Become a Member of the DPR

To become a member of the People’s Legislative Assembly has been regulated in Law Number 7 of 2017 concerning Elections. What are these conditions?

1. Indonesian citizens who are 21 years of age or older as of the date of the establishment of the DCT
2. Have faith in God Almighty
3. Residing in the territory of the Unitary State of the Republic of Indonesia
4. Able to speak, read, and/or write in Indonesian
5. Education at least graduated from high school, Madrasah Aliyah, SMK, Vocational Madrasah Aliyah, or other schools of the same level
6. Physically and mentally healthy, and free from drug abuse
7. Must come from a political party (no independent candidate)
8. Loyal to Pancasila as the basis of the state, the 1945 Constitution, the Unitary State of the Republic of Indonesia, and Bhinneka Tunggal Ika
9. Never been sentenced to imprisonment based on a court decision with imprisonment of 5 (five) years or more, unless willing to openly and honestly state to the public that he (the person concerned) is a former convict
10. Registered as a voter
11. Willing to work full time
12. Must resign as regional head, deputy regional head, state civil apparatus, member of the Indonesian National Armed Forces, member of the Indonesian National Police, directors, commissioners, supervisory boards and employees of BUMN and/or BUMD, or other bodies whose budgets come from state finances , which is stated by a letter of resignation and can not be withdrawn
13. Willing to practice as a public accountant, advocate, notary, land deed official, or not to do work as a provider of goods and services related to state finances and other work that may cause a conflict of interest with the duties, powers and rights as a member of the DPR, Provincial DPRD , and Regency/Municipal DPRD in accordance with the provisions of laws and regulations
14. Willing not to hold concurrent positions as other state officials, directors, commissioners, supervisory boards and employees in BUMN and/or BUMD and other bodies whose budgets come from state finances
15. Nominated only in 1 (one) representative institution
16. Nominated only in 1 (one) constituency.

Special Requirements to Become an Expert Member of the DPR

DPR members of course have many tasks and are always preoccupied with this. In the office of DPR members, there will usually be 5 Experts (TA) and 2 administrative staff.

It’s not easy to become an expert (TA) member of the DPR, you know … The minimum requirement to become a TA is that you have a master’s degree.

The provisions regarding Expert Staff (TA) for Members of the DPR have been regulated in DPR Regulation Number 1 of 2019 concerning Management of Experts and Administrative Staff for Members of the DPR RI. What are these provisions? Let’s look at the following description!

1. Have an undergraduate educational background (S-2) with a minimum GPA of 3.00 from a public/private or foreign university that has been accredited by an official body; or at least Bachelor Degree (S-1) with at least 5 years work experience
2. Maximum age of 60 years
3. Can operate computer
4. Healthy physically and spiritually, and free from the use of narcotics
5. Never been sentenced to imprisonment based on a court decision with imprisonment of 5 (five) years or more

The salary earned by an expert (TA) and administrative staff for the DPR has been determined and distributed by the Secretariat General of the DPR. Each party has its own mechanism for recruiting these Experts (TA) and administrative staff, and some even provide special training after the recruitment process.

Duties and Authorities of the DPR

With regard to the legislative function, the DPR has the following duties and authorities:

• Preparing the National Legislation Program (Prolegnas)
• Compile and discuss the Draft Law (RUU)
• Accept the bill that has been submitted by the DPD (Regional Representative Council), relating to regional autonomy; central and regional relations; formation, expansion, and merging of regions; management of SDA (Natural Resources) and SDE (Economic Resources); as well as central and regional financial balances
• Discuss bills proposed by the President or DPD
• Establish laws together with the President
• Approving and disapproving government regulations in lieu of laws (those proposed by the President) to be enacted into laws

With regard to the budget function, the duties and powers of the DPR are as follows:

• Approval of the Bill on the State Budget (submitted by the President)
• Paying attention to the DPD’s consideration of the Bill on the State Budget and the Bill on taxes, education and religion
• Follow up on the results of audits on the management and accountability of state finances submitted by the BPK (Financial Supervisory Agency)
• Give approval to the transfer of state assets and to agreements that have a broad impact on people’s lives regarding the burden on state finances

With regard to the oversight function, the DPR has the following duties and authorities:

• Supervise the implementation of laws, state budget, and government policies
• Discuss and follow up on the results of supervision submitted by the DPD regarding the implementation of the regional autonomy law; formation, expansion, and merging of regions; management of natural resources and natural resources, implementation of the state budget, taxes, education, and religion

The other duties and powers of the DPR include:

• Absorb, collect, accommodate, and follow up on people’s aspirations
• Give approval to the President to

a) declare war or make peace with another country

b) appoint and dismiss members of the Judicial Commission (KY)

• Give consideration to the President on the following matters:

a) Granting amnesty and abolition

b) Appoint ambassadors and accept placement of other ambassadors

• Select members of the BPK by taking into account the considerations of the DPD
• Give approval to the Judicial Commission (KY) regarding the candidates for Supreme Court judges to be determined by the President
• Choose 3 (three) constitutional judges to be submitted to the President

The Rights and Obligations of the DPR

In addition to their obligations in carrying out their duties and functions, each member of the DPR also has rights and obligations attached to himself for the benefit of the people. These rights and obligations are as follows:

The rights of members of the DPR

1. The right to submit proposals related to the Bill
2. The right to submit an opinion
3. The right to convey suggestions and opinions
4. The right to vote and be elected
5. Right of self-defense
6. The right of immunity (the right to freely speak and express one’s opinion without fear of retaliation or certain political motives)
7. Protocol rights (Right to obtain respect in relation to his position)
8. Financial and administrative rights
9. Supervision rights
10. The right to propose and fight for electoral development programs
11. The right to socialize the Act

Parliament’s obligations

The obligations of DPR members are as follows:

1. Hold fast and practice Pancasila
2. Implement the 1945 Constitution and comply with statutory provisions
3. Maintain and maintain national harmony and integrity of the Unitary State of the Republic of Indonesia
4. Prioritizing the interests of the state above personal, group and group interests
5. Fighting for the improvement of people’s welfare
6. Adhering to the principles of democracy in administering the state government
7. Adhere to the rules and code of ethics
8. Maintain ethics and norms in working relations with other institutions
9. Absorb and collect constituent aspirations through regular working visits
10. Accommodate and follow up the aspirations and complaints of the community
11. Provide moral and political accountability to constituents in their constituencies

What special rights do DPR members have?

1. Right of Interpellation

Namely the DPR’s right to ask the Government for information regarding government policies that are important and strategic and have a broad impact on the life of society, nation and state.

2. Right of Inquiry

Namely the right of the DPR to conduct an investigation into the implementation of a law or government policy relating to important, strategic matters, and which have a broad impact on the life of society, nation and state which are suspected of contravening statutory regulations.

3. Right to Express Opinion

In this special right, DPR members can express their opinions on the following matters:

• Government policies or extraordinary events that occur in the country or in the international world
• Follow up on the exercise of the right of interpellation and the right of inquiry
• Allegations that the President and/or Vice President have violated the law, whether in the form of betrayal of the state, corruption, bribery, other serious crimes, or disgraceful acts; and/or the President and/or Vice President no longer fulfill the requirements as President and/or Vice President

How is the Decision Making System in the DPR?

The decision-making system is carried out in DPR meetings which are carried out by way of deliberation to reach consensus, but if the results are not met, then it is carried out in a second way, namely based on the majority vote.

In making decisions by consensus, it can be done after the meeting members are present and they will be given the opportunity to express opinions and suggestions regarding the issues discussed.

Decisions based on consensus will be considered valid if the members present at the meeting reach a quorum (minimum number of members present at the meeting) and are approved by all present.

Meanwhile, decision-making based on majority vote will be carried out if decision-making by consensus does not bring maximum results.

In this case, the voting will be done behind closed doors in writing, without including the name and signature of the voter, in order to guarantee its confidentiality.

So, that’s how to become a member of the DPR and its duties and responsibilities. Is Sinaumed’s interested in becoming a member of the DPR and ready to serve for a better life for the Indonesian people?

Book Recommendations & Related Articles

Source:

https://www.dpr.go.id/

Excel Ranking Formula – Microsoft Excel is a type of Microsoft that is widely used by people in this world. Apart from Microsoft Word and Microsoft Power Point, Microsoft Excel is also very helpful for someone in completing their work.

There are many formulas that can help you in Microsoft Excel, one of which is the IF formula. Maybe ordinary people will be confused with this term. However, for people who have been in Microsoft Excel for a long time, they must be familiar with the formulas in it. There are still many people who don’t know about the use and types of this one formula.

See the following explanation about the type and use of this formula.

Definition of Microsoft Excel

Microsoft Excel or Microsoft Office Excel is a worksheet application program created and distributed by Microsoft Corporation that can run on Microsoft Windows and Mac OS. This application is part of Microsoft Office.

This application features calculations and graphing using Microsoft’s aggressive marketing strategy, making Microsoft Excel one of the most popular computer programs used on microcomputers to date. This program is the most widely used spreadsheet program by many parties, both on Windows-based PC platforms and Macintosh-based Mac OS platforms, since version 5.0 was published in 1993.

Excel offers many interface advantages compared to the spreadsheet programs that preceded it, but its essence is still the same as VisiCalc ( the first popular spreadsheet software ): Cells are arranged in rows and columns, and contain data or formulas with absolute or relative references. other cells.

Excel was the first spreadsheet program that allowed users to define how the spreadsheet they edited would look like: font, character attributes, and the appearance of each cell. Excel also offers intelligent cell recalculation, where only cells related to the cell will be updated (where other spreadsheet programs will recalculate the entire data or wait for a special command from the user). In addition, Excel also offers excellent graph processing features.

When it was first bundled into Microsoft Office in 1993, Microsoft also redesigned the interface used by Microsoft Word and Microsoft PowerPoint to match the appearance of Microsoft Excel, which at that time was the most popular spreadsheet application .

Following are some of the Microsoft Excel extensions:

• *.xls, is the default Microsoft Excel format prior to Excel 12. It is still based on the BIFF format and can store VBA macros .
• *.xlt, is a format for Microsoft Excel worksheet templates prior to Excel 12. Still based on the BIFF format and can store VBA macros .
• *.XML, or what is known as an XML Spreadsheet . Not capable of hosting VBA macros .
• *.xla, is the format for Excel Add-in prior to Excel 12. It is still based on the BIFF format and can store VBA macros, given that the goal is to add Microsoft Excel capabilities.
• *.xlsx, is the default worksheet format for Microsoft Excel 12, which is based on XML. Unable to save VBA macros , due to security reasons. It is actually a compressed archive in ZIP format with a document structure consisting of XML text documents. Is a replacement for the .xlsold format.
• *.xlsm, is a Microsoft Excel 12 worksheet format , which is based on XML, but can store VBA macros .
• *.xlsb, is a Microsoft Excel 12 worksheet format , which is based on XML, but is encoded in binary form. This format has the advantage of being faster to open and more efficient, considering that the purpose of this format is to handle very large worksheets consisting of tens of thousands of rows or hundreds of columns.
• *.xltm, is a format for Microsoft Excel 12 worksheet templates , which are based on XML but are capable of storing VBA macros . It is a replacement for the format .*.xlt
• *.xlam, is a format for Excel Add-in to increase the capabilities of Excel 12. By default it is able to handle VBA macros , considering the goal is to add Excel capabilities.

Benefits of Excel Formulas in the World of Work

Excel formulas in the world of work basically often use these two formulas. For simple data using formulas, while the function formula for large-scale data.

The benefits of function formulas make it easier for users in terms of:

• Gets accurate calculation results from lots of data.
• Help presentation needs on data visualization.
• Tidying up large amounts of data so that it is neatly arranged.
• Save time when processing data.
• Processing big data becomes easier and more practical.

Description of the Ranking Formula in Excel

According to the explanation on Microsoft’s page , this formula returns the rank of a number in a list of numbers. The rank of a number is the number’s magnitude relative to other values ​​in the list (if you are sorting the list, the rank of a number is its position).

For more information about this new function, see RANK.AVG function and RANK.EQ function .

—

Syntax

Writing the RANK formula follows the following rules.

RANK(number,ref,[order])

The RANK function syntax has the following arguments.

• Number (required), which is the number whose rank you want to find.
• Ref (required), which is an array of, or a reference to, a list of numbers. Nonnumeric values ​​in refs are ignored.
• Order (optional), which is a number that determines how ranks are assigned.
  • If the sort is 0 (zero) or omitted, Microsoft Excel ranks the numbers as if the ref were a list sorted in descending order .
  • If the order is a nonzero value, Microsoft Excel assigns the rank as if the ref were a list sorted in ascending order .

Information

• RANK ranks the same for duplicate numbers. However, the presence of duplicate numbers affects the ranking of subsequent numbers. For example, in an ascending list of integers, if the number 10 occurs twice and has a rank of 5, the number 11 will have a rank of 7 (no number has a rank of 6).
• For some purposes, you may wish to use a ranking definition that takes similarity into account. In the previous example, you wanted a revised 5.5 rating for the number 10. This can be done by adding the following correction factor to the value returned by the RANK function. This correction factor is appropriate for both cases where ratings are computed in descending order (order = 0 or omitted) or ascending order (order = non-zero value).
  • Correction factor for the same rank=[COUNT(ref) + 1 – RANK(number, ref, 0) – RANK(number, ref, 1)]/2.
  • In the following example, RANK(A2,A1:A5,1) equals 3. The correction factor is (5 + 1 – 2 – 3)/2 = 0.5 and the revised rank that takes equality into account is 3 + 0.5 = 3.5. If a number appears only once in the ref, the correction factor is 0, because the RANK function does not need to be adjusted for the same rating.

Example of Rank Function in Microsoft Excel

First Example

Using the table example above, try writing the following Excel formula in cell D2:

=RANK(C2;$C$2:$C$11,0)

In the Excel formula, the value that we will look for is cell C2 (90) with the value list reference $C$2:$C$11. Why is there a $ sign in Excel formulas? This is so that when we copy the formula down, the data range or list of values ​​does not change.

After writing the Excel formula, copy or use auto fill for the cells below it (D3 to D11).

The result will be like the image below:

Second Example

Copy the sample data in the following table and paste it into cell A of a new Excel worksheet. To make the formula show the result, select the data, press F2, and then press Enter. If necessary, you can adjust the column width to see all the data.

Data
7
3,5
3,5
1
2
Formula	Description (Result)	Results
=RANK(A3,A2:A6,1)	Rating 3.5 in the list above (3)	3
=RANK(A2,A2:A6,1)	Ranked 7th in the list above (5)	5

You can always ask experts in the Excel Tech Community or get support in the Answers Community .

Source

• “ Rank (Rank Function) ”. Microsoft . Retrieved December 2, 2022.
• ” Excel Rank Formula, Searching for and Determining Rank Rating Values ​​in Excel “. Excel class . Retrieved December 2, 2022.

—

Those are the descriptions, functions, and how to use the ranking formula in Microsoft Excel that you can use to complete various jobs. If you have questions, suggestions or criticism, please write in the comment box below. Also share this article on social media accounts so that your friends can also get the same benefit.

To get more information regarding the Excel Ranking Formula, Sinaumed’s can also read books available at sinaumedia.com . As #FriendsWithoutLimits we always try to give the best. To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight and knowledge, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithMemreading information . Hope it is useful! Regards!

Also read regarding the Excel Ranking Formula:

How Do Rainbows Appear? – Pelangi is very famous for its beauty that can make us continue to see it. Even hope that the rainbow does not disappear soon. The beauty of the rainbow comes from its distinctive colors which are known as “mejikuhibiniu”.

Usually, a rainbow will appear when it rains or after the rain is over. The appearance of the rainbow is generally in the form of a semicircle. Rainbows do not just appear there is a process of occurrence and the factors that cause rainbows to appear.

It will be lacking if we only enjoy the beauty of the rainbow, but don’t know the process of its occurrence and the factors that cause it. To find out about these two things, let’s look at the reviews as follows.

Before discussing how the process of rainbows occurs, we should first identify what a rainbow is.

Meaning of Rainbow

The definition according to some experts is similar but not the same. The following is the meaning of the rainbow, which is expressed by several experts.

1. Nancy Thompson

Isaac Newton said that a rainbow is a spectrum resulting from bending or deflection of light entering a prism.

2. Donald Ahrens

An explanation of the rainbow was written by Donald Ahrens in his book Meteorology Today . In his book, Donald Ahrens says that the rainbow is never parallel to the location of the sun. Based on this opinion, it can be said that the location of the rainbow will always be opposite the sun.

3.Lord Rayleigh

According to Lord Rayleigh, the rainbow is a process of refraction of light that gives rise to a light effect with various colors. In this process, water vapor particles surrounding the light distort the light itself to create a beautiful blend of colors to behold.

Whereas in the Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI) a rainbow is a curved spectrum in the sky, visible due to the refraction of sunlight by raindrops or dew.

Inventor of the Theory of the Rainbow Appearance

Al-Qarafi is a scientist who was born in 1228 AD and was born in Bahnasa, Egypt. He is also known as someone who is an expert on kalam as well as one of the Islamic jurists who belongs to the Maliki school of law.

The process of the occurrence of a rainbow is written in Al-Qarafi’s scientific work. This scientific work is in the form of a book with the name Al-istibar fi ma Tudrikuhul Al-Abshar. The meaning of the name of the book is “About What the Eyes Catch”.

In his scientific work, Al-Qarafi explains that the appearance of a rainbow in the sky is caused by the reflection of sunlight on the smoke or vapor in the sky. The explanation explained by Al-Qarafi can be said to be the same as that of a philosopher, namely Ibn Sina.

According to Al-Qarafi, the rainbow has two colors, namely the color of smoke and the sun and the colors that are composed of these two elements. Not only about the colors of the rainbow, he also explained that the color of an object will not be the same when it is reflected in the mirror. The color of the object and the mirror will bring out the color that comes from the reflection of the mirror.

Many scientists make Al-Qarafi’s theory a basis or guideline for discussing rainbows.

Factors Causing Rainbows

1. Light

Light has various properties that can help the rainbow process. Because of this, light is a factor that causes rainbows.

a. The properties of light

1)  Straight vines

The first characteristic of light is that it propagates straight. Light that propagates straight can be seen when the light passes through an intermediate medium.

One example is when the flashlight is turned on and pointed forward, the flashlight will point straight in the desired direction.

2)  Can be bounced

The next property of light is that light can be reflected. Reflected light can be said to be the process of returning light from objects or objects that are exposed to light. Reflected light has two properties, namely regular reflection and diffuse reflection.

One example of the nature of this light is a mirror that is directed at the sun will cause the reflection of light coming from the sun’s rays.

3) Can be deflected / refracted

The next property of light is that light can be bent or refracted. Light refraction (refraction) is the deflection of the direction of propagation of light when it enters another medium with a different optical density.

One example of light can be bent or refracted, namely when we dip a pencil in water in a glass, the pencil will look like it is broken or bent.

A pencil that looks broken when placed in water is caused by the refraction of light from air as a tenuous medium to water, which is a denser medium.

4)  Light can be deciphered

The next property of light is light can be described. Basically, the decomposition of light has occurred naturally. We can see the decomposition of light in the appearance of a rainbow.

When a rainbow appears, you will see various colors even though the basic color of the rainbow is white. This white color is obtained from sunlight. This white light will decompose after it is refracted by rainwater, giving rise to various colors.

5)  Light can experience diffraction

The next property of light is that light can experience diffraction or bending. Bending in light occurs when light has to pass through a narrow area. After the light has experienced bending, the light will be fragmented so that it can bring out new light properties.

Diffraction itself is divided into two, namely single slit diffraction and lattice diffraction. The parable of light diffraction can be done by placing a ball or other object on the surface of the water. Then the surface of the water will produce vibrations (split light). Meanwhile, the ball can be said to be a new source of light

6) Light can penetrate transparent objects

The last characteristic of light is that light can penetrate clear. On clear objects the light will be translucent and able to transmit light. However, on dark objects, light can only form a shadow because it cannot penetrate dark objects.

Light can penetrate clear objects by burning wood, paper, leaves, etc. only with a magnifying glass. The fire to burn the goods comes from the sun’s rays which are directed with glass (clear).

Those are the properties of light. All of these properties have their respective functions. Therefore, the use of light will be maximized if it uses light according to its function.

Light itself is an energy in the form of waves that can be seen by our eyes and has a wavelength of about 380-750 nm.

Meanwhile, in the Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI) light means light or light (from something that shines such as the sun, moon, lamp) that allows the eye to catch the shadows of objects around it.

In some studies, light has a speed of about 186,282 miles per second in a vacuum. In fact, no one has yet been able to exceed the speed of light. If you could travel at the speed of light, it would be like 7.5 times around the earth.

Light for everyone is a necessary component, just like the lamp and the sun. When the lights go out, we usually complain because we can’t get any light. Meanwhile, if there is no sun during the day we will be confused about how to dry clothes.

The Nature of Light That Causes Rainbows

After knowing the properties of light, it can be said that almost all the properties of light can cause a rainbow to occur, such as the nature of light can be described, with the nature of this light, the colors in a rainbow can appear.

White sunlight actually consists of several colors. The ability of light to separate its colors is what causes the rainbow process to occur. White is a collection of various colors. So also white light, white light is polychromatic alias can be separated into other colors

The decomposition of white into several other colors is called dispersion. Dispersion arises because there is a difference in the index of refraction between each light so that when it passes through a light medium, several colors similar to a rainbow come out.

In addition, the nature of light can be deflected can be regarded as a factor in the appearance of a rainbow. In the process of the occurrence of a rainbow, the nature of this light appears when light (sunlight) passes through water droplets originating from the earth’s atmosphere.

2. Water

Another component that causes a rainbow is water. The water in question is not just rainwater, but water that can come from anywhere. In other words, as long as there is water and light, rainbows can form.

The size of the raindrops that light passes through affects the complete color of the sun. The size of small raindrops is only about 0.01 millimeters while for large ones it is 2 millimeters. The larger the size of the water droplets that are passed, the more complete the rainbow colors that appear. Meanwhile, if the grain is small, the colors that appear will overlap and even fade. So, if we see a beautiful rainbow, it means that the water droplets passing through are large.

The rainbow process

1. Refraction of sunlight

The formation of a rainbow is caused by the process of refraction of light (sunlight) which is deflected so that it moves from one medium to another with the help of water droplets originating from the earth’s atmosphere.

2. Sunlight passes through water droplets

After sunlight passes through the water droplets, what will happen is that the light (sunlight) will be bent or bent so that the colors of the light will separate from each other and give rise to new colors.

3. Light deflection

Every color that comes out of the deflection of light usually has a variety of colors. These colors are what we know today as the rainbow.

4. The appearance of rainbow colors

If we have ever heard the term “mejikuhibiniu” it means that indirectly we have the order of the colors of the rainbow from end to end. In other words, red is the last color to be deflected, while purple is the first color to be deflected.

The rainbow is known to be very beautiful with its distinctive colors because these colors can make our eyes want to keep seeing it.

Behind the beautiful colors of the rainbow there is a very complicated process. This complicated process causes rainbows to be rarely seen by us. That’s why when a rainbow appears before us, we will feel very happy because we rarely see a rainbow appear.

There is a fact that says that the appearance of a rainbow at or shortly after it falls is more likely to occur. Therefore, when we were children, we would always wait for a rainbow to appear when it started to rain.

Rainbow Types 

1. Primary Rainbow

The rainbow that we often see is the primary rainbow. The formation of the primary rainbow is due to the process of refraction and reflection of light that enters the raindrops.

The colors that will appear after the refraction process are purple, blue, green, yellow, orange, and red. The red color of the rainbow forms an angle with sunlight, that angle is approximately 42 degrees.

2.Secondary Bow 

A secondary bow type rainbow is a rainbow in the form of a secondary arc. This type of rainbow is included in a rare type of rainbow. Why can it be said to be a rare type of rainbow? This is because the appearance of the secondary bow rainbow can only be seen after the primary rainbow appears

Thus, this secondary bow rainbow is included in the secondary rainbow. The colors in the secondary rainbow appear dimmer compared to the primary rainbow.

3. Waterfall Rainbows

Waterfall rainbows or what we usually know as rainbow waterfalls. Waterfall rainbows are rainbows that only appear or can be seen above a waterfall. In general, the appearance of waterfall rainbows occurs because of the fog on the waterfall that enters or mixes with the airflow around it. Continuously.

4. Lunar Rainbows

Did you know that there is a type of rainbow that is caused by the light coming from the moon? Rainbows caused by light from the moon are known as lunar rainbows .

Basically, the process of appearing lunar rainbows is almost the same as that of primary rainbows. The thing that distinguishes the lunar rainbow is the light source.

Rainbow types of lunar rainbow will look brighter when the full moon appears. Why is it only during a full moon that the lunar rainbow appears brighter? Because the light on the full moon is brighter than other months.

5. Sundogs

A rainbow of sundogs can be said to be a rainbow that only appears in winter and when the weather is sunny. The appearance of rainbow sundogs generally occurs when sunlight shines through ice crystals that are very high in the atmosphere.

Conclusion 

All the beautiful colors in the rainbow are very beautiful. All that beauty cannot be separated from the factors that cause rainbows to appear. Water and light are the two main factors that cause a rainbow.

Author: Irma Tri Handayani & Restu Nasik Kamaluddin

sinaumedia.com

Book Title: Rainbow and Rain: Between Memories and Wishes

ebooks.sinaumedia.com

Book Title: Rain and Rainbow

Book Title: A Million Rainbow Colors

• What is Flora and Fauna? This is the full explanation
• Understanding Coal and Its Importance for Life
• Negative Impacts of Air Pollution & Solutions
• Soil Pollution: Causes, Impact, Examples and Solutions
• Distribution of Flora and Fauna in Indonesia and in the World

How Fish Sleep – Has Sinaumed’s ever observed fish movements, either in an aquarium or in a pond? When observing these movements, has it ever occurred to Sinaumed’s whether fish are sleeping or not?

The answer is of course yes! Fish, like other living things, also sleep. Fish both need rest, but the way they sleep is certainly different from other living things. How does it feel to sleep underwater…

Then, how about sleeping from a fish because its eyes never blink and close. Is it true that the fish sleeps deliberately widening its eyes, aka literate?

So, so that Sinaumed’s isn’t curious, let’s look at the following review!

The Process of Sleeping Fish

Please note that most fish do not have eyelids, except for sharks. Therefore, if you pay close attention, the fish will always open their eyes so it will be difficult to tell which fish are asleep or not.

Most of these fish lack a neocortex (a set of cortical layers of the cerebrum, usually in mammals, that is used in higher-order brain functions) and an eyelid. By not having these two parts of the organ, it causes the side of the fish’s brain to close and their eyes cannot close.

In fact, when a fish is asleep it is not really asleep, but only half awake. In fact, the fish’s tail can still be moved to ensure that the flow of water is maintained towards the gills. This is done so that the fish do not lack oxygen and keep breathing.

Not sleeping the fish is also to avoid himself from all threats of danger or attacks from other fish which can later cause him to be injured to death. So, it can also be said that fish sleep in a state of alert.

When in an aquarium or pond, the fish will fall asleep by floating their bodies in the water. However, when in the ocean, fish will fall asleep in their hiding places, namely behind coral reefs so that they are not caught by bigger fish.

Even unique, some types of fish will sleep by pretending to be dead fish by laying their bodies on the bottom of the water.

Different types of fish, different ways of sleeping. Sharks that have eyelids even sleep without closing their eyes, accompanied by slow swimming movements. If a comparison is made, then the sleep of the fish is almost the same when humans are daydreaming.

Then there is also a type of parrot fish or parrot fish that has a “sleeping bag” in the form of a slimy jelly. The “sleeping bag” seems to wrap around his body and become his bedroom when he sleeps so that he can be free from predators.

When Do Fish Sleep?

In general, most of the fish are diurnal. Contrary to nocturnal, diurnal is a term for animals that carry out activities during the day and sleep when night falls. Almost the same as humans huh…

This is because during the day the habitat will definitely get a supply of sunlight as lighting, making it easy to find food.

However, the exact time the fish sleeps depends on the fish species. Some sleep during the day, but some sleep at night. There are also some fish that can only sleep for a certain time, for example during migration.

Then, there are also those who don’t even sleep at all until they are adults, for example tilapia fish. Tilapia fish will usually sleep when they are more than 22 weeks old. If the ornamental fish are usually placed in the aquarium, then they tend to sleep when the aquarium lights are turned off.

Characteristics of a Sleeping Fish

If Gramed is still curious about the characteristics of a sleeping fish, let’s look at its special features:

• Pause the movement of fish when swimming more regularly, especially at certain times.
• Fish become “inactive” for quite a long time.
• Fish in a calm posture, as if resting.
• His sensitivity to external stimulants decreased.

Fish Bed

If placed in an aquarium and there are rocks as decorations, the fish will usually hide behind the rocks. However, it is possible that fish can also sleep like swimming as usual. When in an aquarium, fish tend to be “relaxed” in sleeping behavior because there are not so many disturbances or threats from predators.

Meanwhile, when fish are in the ocean, they will behave especially at night by choosing nests with a distinctive shape, such as holes or crevices in caves, under ledges, in sponges, and some even bury themselves in the sand.

Unique Ways of Fish When Sleeping

There are many species of fish, so that between species, one with another, of course, has a unique way of behaving in sleep. What are the fish that have a unique way of behaving in their sleep? Come on, see the following reviews!

1. Loach fish

The loach fish, which belongs to the order Cobitidae , turns out to have a unique way of behaving when it sleeps, namely by turning or stretching its body, as if it were dead.

If you keep this type of fish, then suddenly its body flips over, don’t panic. He could just be sleeping to rest his body.

2. Coral Fish

There are many types of reef fish that can be consumed, ranging from Serranidae (grouper), Caesionidae , (Yellow Tail/Banana-Banana), Scaridae (Cockatooo/Mogong), Balistidae (Poge/Trigger), Pomacanthidae (Enjel/Goat), and Siganidae (Baronang/ Keakea/ Lingkis).

Well, this time we will discuss one of these types of reef fish, namely the Damselfish. The distinctive feature of this fish is its bright color, so many people are interested in keeping it.

When sleeping, Damselfish tend to hide between coral branches. This is also a way to avoid predators that will prey on it.

3. Cockatoo Fish

The Cockatoo Fish or often referred to as the Parrot Fish also has a unique way of behaving when sleeping, namely by wrapping its body using a kind of slimy jelly-shaped bag.

The slimy sac is produced by the Cockatoo Fish through its mouth. Not only used as a “sleeping bag”, it turns out that the slimy bag can also protect it from Gnothi Isopods attacks .

Gnothi Isopods are a type of sea-sucking shrimp. If in the sea, these shrimp can be referred to as “sea mosquitoes”, and it turns out they are a type of fish parasite.

4. Sharks

Surely Sinaumed’s is no stranger to this big fish, right? Yep, this fish is feared by many other fish because of its sharp teeth and is the most ferocious predator in all of the oceans. Not only prey on fellow fish, but also humans.

The unique way sharks behave when they sleep is to sleep for a while, even just blinking their eyes a few times. Remember, that some fish don’t have eyelids, except for sharks.

There is even research on sleep behavior patterns in these sharks. When sleeping, sharks tend to stay still, with their eyes continuously open and their pupils still monitoring the movements around them.

There are even several species of sharks that can sleep and not move at all, for example the Lemon Shark, Caribbean Reef Shark, Wobbegong Shark, and others.

5. Dolphins

It should be understood that dolphins are not actually fish, because they do not have gills as breathing apparatus and the breeding process is not by laying eggs. Instead of using gills, dolphins have lungs that can be used as a breathing device and when the process of reproduction is by giving birth. Therefore, dolphins are included in the type of mammal.

Many people misunderstand that dolphins are a type of fish because of their habitat in water, when in fact dolphins are aquatic mammals.

By making the lungs a breathing apparatus, of course the dolphins have to hold their breath for 15 minutes and then “jump” to the surface to take a breath. Then dive back into the ocean.

Even when sleeping, dolphins “unknowingly” will also push their bodies to the surface to take a breath. If not done, the dolphins will run out of breath and may die.

Fish Unique Facts

This type of animal that relies on gills as a breathing device and lives in water is very familiar with everyday human life. Not only useful as pets, but also can be consumed as side dishes that have high nutrition.

Then, what are the unique facts about fish that not everyone knows? Come on, see the following reviews!

• Through evidence in the form of fossils, states that fish have lived on this planet Earth for approximately 530 million years ago.
• There are more than 32,000 species of fish spread all over the world. This number is even more than the number of all types of vertebrate animals.
• Many types of marine animals are often mistaken for fish when they are not, such as octopuses, starfish, jellyfish and crayfish.
• Orca whales are the most ferocious type of fish in the ocean and can live for 80 years.
• The brain of a dolphin is about the size of a human brain. Therefore this fish is a smart animal.
• Dolphins can dive more than 500 meters even though they rely on their lungs as a means of breathing.

• Fish don’t have eyelids, except for sharks. Therefore, when sleeping, they tend not to close their eyes.
• This type of herring fish can communicate with other fish using its farts.
• Even though they live in water, it turns out that fish can see 70 times farther in the air than in water.
• This type of Goldfish fish if placed in a dark place, the color will disappear. In addition, these fish can also see the presence of infrared radiation that humans cannot even see.
• There is a type of Climbing Gourami (Climbing Gourami) which is able to jump out of the water and then breathe oxygen. Even this fish can also walk using its fins, at close range.
• The blobfish actually has a shape like a normal fish, but its shape will change if it is lifted from a very deep sea. This is because his body loses air pressure when lifted.
• Fish can cough.
• The stingray’s eyes are on top of the body making it difficult to find prey swimming under its body.
• Fish that live in polluted places will lose their sense of smell.
• The Frilled Shark is a relic fish from the Cretaceous period and is one of the most primitive shark species still alive today.
• The most primitive types of fish that are still alive today are the Lamprey Eels and Hagfish.
• In the Greenland region, there are sharks that can even eat polar bears and live up to 200 years.
• Most of the stingray’s body is made of cartilage, which makes it more flexible when moving in water.

• The smallest fish in the world is Paedocypris Progenetica which lives in the forest swamps of Sumatra Island. When mature, this fish only has a size of 7.9 millimeters.
• The technique of salting fish to become salted fish was first carried out in Northern Europe which then spread to other regions.
• All Clownfish are born male. However, it can also change its sex to female when “needed” for reproduction.
• One of the shortest fish in the world is the Pygmy Fish from the Philippines which has the size of rice.
• The Mola Mola (Sunfish) does not have a tail.
• Catfish have more than 27,000 taste buds. While humans only have 7000 spots.
• This type of Mudskipper fish is able to spend time outside the water and can even walk using its fins. When on land, this fish will breathe through the pores of its skin.
• The electricity generated by the Electric Catfish is around 350 volts and can cause numbness for a few moments when it is stung.
• Mustache or antennae on catfish serve to determine the condition of the place and look for prey at night. It should be noted that catfish are nocturnal animals.
• Betta fish are able to heal damaged fins on their own, especially after fighting with their opponents.
• This type of fish, Tigerfish Goliath, is capable of eating small crocodiles or juvenile crocodiles.
• Sardine is not a fish species name, but a trademark name for canned fish. While the types of fish used are Herring and Pilchard fish.

• The phenomenon of raining fish is when a tornado lifts fish from the ocean towards the land, so it looks like it’s raining fish.
• This type of fish, Salema Porgy, can cause hallucinations when consumed.
• Puffer Fish (Puffer Fish) will inflate its body when it feels threatened. Even so, this fish also contains a deadly poison, namely tetrodotoxin. If you want to consume it, must be prepared by someone who is reliable.
• The Tetrodotoxin poison in the Pufferfish’s body is considered 1,200 times more deadly than cyanide and is capable of killing around 30 people.
• Seahorses are a type of fish and are the slowest fish, even barely moving at all.
• The heaviest fish is the Blue Whale. They can weigh up to 200 tons, which is equivalent to 23 elephants, 230 cows, or 1800 people.
• Piranha fish have sharp teeth and the notion that they prey on humans alive is wrong. However, they can prey on human carcasses.
• Fish can also drown. If the body does not have enough oxygen, it can cause the fish to suffocate.

Well, that’s an explanation of how fish can fall asleep. It’s the same as humans when they fall asleep, try not to disturb their resting process . If the fish in your aquarium show signs of sleeping fish, it’s better to let them be. Fish is also one of the choices for side dishes recommended by health experts because it has high nutrition.

Also Read!

1. Classification and Examples of Insects
2. Types of Natural Resources and How to Preserve Them
3. Definition of Animal Food Ingredients
4. Prayer for Slaughtering Animals
5. Definition and Classification of Vertebrate Animals
6. Definition of Hibernation and Examples of Animals That Do It
7. What are Mammals?
8. Animal Names in English
9. Examples of Minimalist Fish Pond Designs
10. Differences between Animal Cells and Plant Cells

The process of the rainbow – A natural phenomenon that usually occurs when after the rain has stopped, the rainbow can be categorized as one of the most beautiful natural wonders. The beauty lies in the colors that are displayed in bright and varied colors. The rainbow is one of the moments that is quite iconic when we see it directly with the naked eye because this natural phenomenon cannot take place every day and doesn’t even always appear after the rain stops.

Rainbows are usually present when there is refraction of light emitted through sunlight in direct contact with gas, water, and light molecules at the same time. Therefore, not every day we can see the rainbow phenomenon in our daily lives because it turns out that there are several other natural factors that participate in the process of rainbow occurrence.

For some people, they may just enjoy the rainbow when they see it, but rarely know the triggering factors and the process of rainbow occurrence. Then, what are the trigger factors for the rainbow? How does the rainbow process occur? You can find the answer below. However, it’s good for us to learn together about the meaning of the rainbow first.

Meaning of Rainbow

A rainbow is a rare weather event caused by the reflection, refraction and bending of light in water droplets that create a spectrum of light in the sky. Rainbows often form an arc of colored circles. Rainbows caused by sunlight are always present in the gaps in the sky that meet directly with the sun.

A rainbow can be a perfect circle. But unfortunately, people who saw would generally only see the arc created by the grains of light on the ground, and focus on the straight line from the sun to the eyes of the people who were looking.

In the main rainbow, the bows are red on the outside and purple on the inside. This rainbow is caused by light that is refracted when it enters the drop, then is reflected to the back of the drop and is refracted when it exits.

In a twin rainbow, the second ray is visible outside the primary ray, and the order of the colors is reversed, with red on the inside. This is because light is reflected twice inside the drop before leaving it.

Rainbow Form

Rainbows are not necessarily at a certain distance from the viewing public, but are caused by an optical illusion effected by water droplets looking at a certain angle to a light source. So, the rainbow is not an object and is inaccessible in its gross form.

This is because one cannot see a rainbow at any angle other than 2 degrees away from the light source.

Furthermore, if one observer looks at another observer who appears “below” or “at the corner” of the rainbow, the other observer will only see a different, farther rainbow from the same angle as the first observer.

A rainbow has a continuous range of colors. However, all the bands are not always the same as they appear in the human color vision illusion, and no bands of any kind are visible in a black and white image of a rainbow. In other words, just subtle gradations with intense degrees to optimal, then thinning to other angles.

As for the color combinations seen by the human eye, the most frequently cited and remembered sequences are the seven mentioned by Isaac Newton: red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo and purple, when repeated with an acronym, it becomes mejikuhibiniu.

Rainbows can be created due to the various forms of water molecules in the air. This situation includes not only rain, but also fog, condensation processes, and air evaporation.

Rainbow Time

The time a rainbow occurs is usually when there are water droplets in the air and the sunlight is behind the observer at high and low angles. For this reason, a rainbow is often seen in the western sky at dawn and in the eastern sky at dusk.

The most extraordinary rainbows occur when part of the sky is still dark with clouds during rain and the observer is in a position with the sky brightly lit towards the sun. The result is a bright rainbow that stands out against a dark background.

Under conditions of good visibility, a spare rainbow that is more gigantic in size but weaker when observed. Backup rainbows occur about 10 degrees from the boundary of the main rainbow and are in reverse color order.

The effects of rainbows are also often seen near waterfalls or fountains or the effect, can be created artificially by dispersing water droplets in the air on a sunny day. Although rare, rainbows, or moonlight rainbows at night, can be seen on moonlit nights. Due to human’s poorer color perception in low light, moon signs are usually white.

Main Trigger Factors for the Appearance of Rainbows

The main trigger factor for the occurrence of a rainbow is the position of the sun must be right on the horizon. Sunlight should not be blocked by clouds, mountains or anything else. Then, the position of the sun must also be slightly lower. If we are in the same position as the horizon, then the sun must be at an angle of 2 degrees to be able to see the rainbow from where we are.

In addition, you must remember that a rainbow always appears in the part of the sky that faces the sun. So when you see a rainbow, the sun will be behind you. Then, the air on the other side of the sky from you must contain lots of water droplets, for example after rain.

Rainbows don’t just appear after rain, but can form as long as they meet the requirements. For example, throwing water into the air at a waterfall or on a beach near a cliff and at this location you can see a rainbow.

Another trigger factor is refraction. Rainbows that occur due to refraction are caused by the sun refracting its light on water droplets, thus creating a very amazing color combination. When refraction occurs, light will travel from air to water.

In each combination the rainbow colors will be bent in different parts, finally reflecting the amazing rainbow colors. The first color to appear to fold is purple, while the last color to fold is red.

Therefore, the rainbow will show beautiful colors, namely red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple. As many people know that rainbows are most often seen when sunlight falls on raindrops.

In general, this rare phenomenon occurs in the morning or evening. When the sun is too far from the horizon, the rainbow is not visible. However, when the sun is lower in the sky, part of its arc will be visible. When the sun is low enough and at a high enough position, such as on a mountain or hill, a rainbow will appear circular

The Rainbow Process

Rainbow is a rare natural event and is an optical process. The process of forming the sun has 3 stages, namely reflection or reflection, scattering or dispersion, and refraction.

Reflection or Reflection

The first process is reflection. Water droplets in the air can act as tiny mirrors. When sunlight hits water droplets, most of the light is reflected back. When it rains, the air contains many water droplets that form curtains, and each of these tiny water droplets will reflect the shining sunlight. However, you must be wondering. Sunlight is white, why is the rainbow colored? The answer to this question concerns the second process, namely dispersion.

Scattering or Dispersion

Light scattering is the phenomenon of light dissolving. Sunlight looks white, but when sunlight hits and is reflected by water droplets, the light will be scattered and expanded to produce rainbow colors.

Refraction of light

The third process is light refraction. When sunlight enters water droplets and reflects in a slightly different direction, it is called light refraction. Each color will be refracted in a different direction. The difference in the direction of this light is affected by each wavelength of each light.

Because that’s what causes the rainbow light to spread and widen like a fan. Red light has the longest wavelength, which is 650 nanometers. Red will appear as the outermost color of the rainbow arc. Meanwhile, purple has the shortest wavelength, which is 00 nanometers.

Why is a rainbow synonymous with beautiful color combinations?
“If the sunlight is clear, why is the rainbow colored?” Such a question may be in the minds of some people.

The occurrence of beautiful color combinations in a rainbow is because this is related to the dispersion process, especially the phenomenon of light dissolution. Sunlight looks white, but when sunlight hits or is reflected by water droplets, the light will be scattered and expanded, resulting in beautiful colors or better known to us as a rainbow.

During refraction, sunlight passes through water droplets and is reflected in a slightly different direction. This is called light refraction. Each color will generally experience refraction in a different direction. The difference in the direction of light is affected by the wavelength of each light.

This rainbow light wave will usually expand to form a fan. The red color in the rainbow is estimated to have a wavelength of light of 650 nanometers. While the purple color is estimated to have a wavelength of about 00 nanometers.

Why Do Color Combinations Occur in a Rainbow?

Why do rainbow colors look so good? The colors of the rainbow are beautiful due to the mixing of light refraction. In addition, there is reflection of sunlight from water droplets in the atmosphere. The angle of the light rays that reach the eye from the point of contact with the fall must be within a certain distance and the correct distance, so that the rainbow can have various color combinations.

The variations in rainbow colors are caused by the refraction of “white light” from the sun as it enters the droplets. Then, sunlight has a pool of all the colors that blend out of the visible spectrum, which are actually white in their natural form.

The best time to find a rainbow is right after the storm has passed. Indeed, during thunderstorms, clouds tend to block sunlight. However, when the storm ends, the water droplets that have not fallen to the earth when it rains will quickly evaporate. Of course, you also need the reflected light of the sun to see a rainbow. The sun should be behind you. If you can see your own shadow, a rainbow will appear towards that shadow.

Why is the shape of a rainbow like a half circle?

A rainbow is shaped like a semi-circle because we only see the curved light reflected from the water droplets. The center of the rainbow circle is called the antipolar point which is directly opposite the sun. The rainbow only looks like a half circle because the other half of the light hits the ground, so it looks like there’s no rainbow.

However, if you are on the top of a very high mountain or hill, you can see the sun in a perfect circle. For example while on a plane, or on the edge of a very high cliff.

Rainbow Types

Classic Rainbow

The classic rainbow is the rainbow we see most often. Rainbows are formed from internal refraction and reflection of light rays that enter the raindrops. The primary rainbow colors from the inside out include purple, blue, green, yellow, orange and red. The red band makes a 2 degree angle to the sun, while the other color bands make a smaller angle.

Rainbow Reserve

Meanwhile, another rainbow that looks less intense is the secondary rainbow or reserve rainbow. This type of rainbow is one of the few because it will only appear when the primary rainbow appears first.

The secondary rainbow will display colors that are dimmer than the primary rainbow and will display colors that are reversed from the primary rainbow. If you’ve ever seen two rainbows with different color intensities, it could be a type of secondary rainbow.

Moon Bow Rainbow

As the name implies, a moon arc rainbow will look like an arc that usually appears at night. The rainbow, also known as the lunar rainbow, is a rainbow that is much more difficult to find.

In order to appear, rainstorms usually have to occur during a full moon. When the storm has passed, Moonbows will be visible if the full moon’s brightness is not obscured by clouds.

Moon Rainbow

Rainbows are not only created by the sun but also by the moon. This type of rainbow is called a lunar rainbow. A rainbow only needs water droplets and a light source, such as a bright full moon. Light can be refracted by raindrops when they occur in sunlight.

Red Rainbow

Unlike other types of rainbow which have many colors, this type of red rainbow is mostly red. A red rainbow usually appears in the morning and at dusk in the evening. The thickness of Earth’s atmosphere filters out the blue, which then appears redder as the orange light droplets reflect and refract the water. The end result is a rainbow with a red end of the spectrum.

Sun Rainbow

This type of rainbow usually appears in winter and sunny weather. Solar rainbows are common when the sun shines through ice crystals high in the atmosphere. Solar rainbows often show reflections of light red on the inside and purple on the outside, followed by the other colors of the rainbow. If the concentration of ice crystals in the air thickens, then the rainbow-colored structures that appear also thicken.

Mist Bow Rainbow

The appearance of a foggy rainbow or fogbow is difficult to see when compared to other types of rainbows. Because, this kind of rainbow will only occur if some parameters are adjusted to create a fog arc rainbow. For example, the light source should be behind the viewer and grounded. In addition, the layer of fog behind the observer must also be very thin for sunlight to shine through the thick fog ahead.

Rainbow Waterfall

Waterfall rainbow or can be called cascading rainbow is a type of rainbow that we rarely see because it can only be seen above the waterfall. Waterfall rainbows are usually found when the mist from a waterfall mixes with air currents that have a constant atmospheric constant.

Conclusion

Seeing a rainbow is really fun especially when you see it in an unusual place. So, when was the last time you saw a rainbow? So a brief discussion of the phenomenon of how the rainbow process occurs. Hopefully all of this discussion can be useful for Sinaumed’s.

For Sinaumed’s who want to learn all about the process of rainbow formation , the various types, characteristics, and other natural sciences, you can visit sinaumedia.com to get related books.

As #FriendsWithoutLimits, sinaumedia always provides the best products, so you have the best and latest information for you. Reading lots of books and articles will never hurt you, because Sinaumed’s will get #MoreWithReading information and knowledge.

Author: Pandu Akram

Also read:

Hours in English with Examples and How to Read It – Reading hours is one of the basic vocabulary that is often used in conversation, both in Indonesian and English.

Therefore, if You wants to master English, especially proficient in conversation in English, he needs to master the vocabulary of hours and how to read them in English.

Before knowing the clock in English, You also needs to know that in English, there are various ways to read the clock.

In accordance with the function and conditions required. In order for You to be proficient in reading hours in English, watch this article until the end!

Hours in English, Examples and How to Read It

AM is short for “ante meridiem” which is used to show or mention the time or hour between 00.00 and 12.00 midnight. Meanwhile, PM is an abbreviation of “post meridiem” which is used to show or mention the time or hour between 12.00 noon to 00.00 at night.

How to read the clock using AM and PM is the easiest way and is widely used by many people. However, as previously explained, there are several ways to read hours in English. Here’s a further explanation.

The Formal Way to Read the Hours in English

There are four ways that can be applied to read hours formally in English. Here’s an explanation.

a. Using o’clock

The first formal expression of hours in English is to use o’clock. The use of o’clock is used when the long hour hand points at 12.

In Indonesian, o’clock can also be interpreted as ‘accurate’, namely showing the exact time at a certain time. The way to read formal hours using the o’clock is to follow the clock in front of it, followed by the o’clock.

Example: At 08.00 then read eight o’clock. 09.00 is read nine o’clock. At 10.00 is read as ten o’clock and so on.

b. Using quarter past

The second formal way of expressing time is by using the quarter past which can be used to show the hour when the long hand is at 3.

The way to read it is slightly different from how to read it when the long hour hand points exactly at number 12. Namely the quarter past first, then the hour number in question.

Example: 4.15 then read quarter past four. 5.15 read quarter past five. 6.15 read quarter past six and so on.

c. Using quarter tos

As with using the quarter past, the use of quarter to is used when the long hand of the clock shows the number 9 and how to read it is not much different from reading the quarter past.

For example, at 10.45 in English it is read as quarter to eleven or a quarter to eleven. This means that the hour hand at that time showed 11 to 15 minutes or 10:45.

d. Using half past

The last way to express hours or time in a formal way is to use the half past. The use of this half past can be used if the long hour hand shows the number 6. Here’s an example.

Example: 7.30 then in English it is read as half past seven which means seven over 30 minutes. Another example, when the clock shows the number 12.30 then in English it is read half past twelve which means 12 o’clock 30 minutes past.

How to Express Hours by Using Past, To, After and Before

It should be noted, to express the hour by using past, to, after, and before is a non-formal way of expressing the hour in conversation. So, if you want to use this method, it is better to look at the context of the conversation or the other person first.

Past, to, after and before mean more and less in Indonesian. This way of expressing hours is fairly new and you can see the difference by adding the word minutes, except to show hours which are multiples of the number 5. How? Does You understand? If not, consider the example below.

a. Examples of using past in hours

• 10.20 read twenty past ten.
• 9.15 is read as fifteen past nine.
• 10.05 read five past ten.
• 15.15 is read as fifteen past fifteen.

It should be noted, when using past to indicate hours, the word minutes that passed is mentioned first, followed by the word past, then the hour is mentioned.

So that the use of the word past to indicate the hour information can be formulated as follows. Minute + past + hour or minutes + past + hour.

b. Examples of using to in hours

Just like using the past, when mentioning hours using to, the minute of the hour is mentioned first, then to, then the hour. To in Indonesian means less, and is commonly used to refer to hours whose minutes are less than the 31st minute to the 59th minute. The formula that can be used is minute + to + hour or minute + to + hour. Here’s an example.

• 12.35 is read twenty five to one, meaning 1 hour minus 25 minutes.
• 03.40 is read twenty to four, meaning 4 hours to 20 minutes.
• 02.45 is read as fifteen to three, meaning 3 hours to 15 minutes.
• 03.50 is read as ten to four, meaning 10 minutes to four.
• 06.55 is read seven to five, meaning 5 minutes to seven.

c. Examples of using half past in hours

To use half past, note that this usage can only be used to express hours past 30 minutes. Here’s an example of its use.

• 11.30 read half past eleven (11 o’clock 30 minutes)
• 12.30 read half past twelve (12 hours and 30 minutes)
• 08.30 read half past eight (8 hours and 30 minutes)
• 05.30 read half past five (5 hours and 30 minutes)
• 03.30 read half past three (3 hours and 30 minutes)
• 04.30 read half past four (4 hours and 30 minutes)

If you look at the example above, the use of half past to express hours is like using after and to. The difference is, You doesn’t need to mention the minutes. So, the following formula can be used half past + hour.

Note that using before is the same as using to. As for the half past, it’s the same as using after.

In conclusion, the use of past, after or half past can be used to indicate hours showing 1 to 30 minutes. As for before, and to indicate hours showing 31 to 59 minutes.

Easy Ways to Say Hours in English

Apart from the two ways above, there is also an easy way to express hours in English. It should be noted, that an easy way to express this hour is a non-formal way. To use the easy way of expressing hours, numbers or hours need to be expressed sequentially.

Here’s an example of its use.

• 02.49 read two forty nine.
• 09.17 read nine seventeen.
• 05.55 read five fifty five.
• 06.23 read six twenty three.
• 07.59 read seven fifty nine.
• 05.05 read five oh five.

From the example above, it can be seen that the number 0 when denoting the hour is also read. But the zero when mentioning the minutes in the hour is read with oh and not zero.

How to Express the Time Using AM and PM

As previously explained above, am stands for Ante Meridiem while pm stands for Post Meridiem. The use of am and pm is very commonly used in everyday conversations to indicate hours.

Different from Indonesian, expressing hours in English only uses the 12 hour format. AM can be used to show hours starting in the early hours of the morning, ie from 00.00 to one minute before the clock hands show 12 noon or 11.59.

Meanwhile, PM can be used to express the hour starting at 12 noon until one minute before the clock shows midnight or 11.59.

How to reveal hours using AM and PM is quite easy. So that You can understand and apply how to read AM and PM hours more easily. The following is an example of how to express hours with AM and PM

• 08.30 AM is read in English eight thirty AM or half past eight AM
• 10.15 AM is read as ten fifteen AM or fifteen past three AM or quarter past three Am
• 11.15 PM read eleven fifteen PM

To say the hour in English, You can choose the previous non-formal way then add PM or AM You are also allowed to use the easy way, which is simply to mention the hours and minutes and add AM and PM information

Now. Those are four ways to express adverbs of time in English. To make it even clearer, here’s how to express hours in English when applied in a conversation. Pay attention to the placement of each use, You!

Examples of Conversation by Expressing Hours in English

1. A : What time is it? We are going to be late! (what time is it? We’re going to be late!)

B : It’s still nine o’clock, don’t panic, we are on time. (It’s still nine, don’t panic, we’re on time.)

A : I thought we should be there by nine thirty because of the meeting. (I guess we should get there by 9:30 because there is a meeting.)

B : That’s true, but we will be there soon, see we are close to our office now. (That’s right, but we’ll be there soon, look we’re close to our office now.)

2. A : What time does your plan take off? (When will our plane leave?)

B : I’m not sure, but I think it’s at twenty five to one. I will call the airline to confirm my flight schedule. (I’m not sure, but I think it’s 12:35. I’ll call the airline to confirm the flight schedule.)

A : Why didn’t you do that earlier? (Why not do that earlier?)

B : I do not know, you are just asking it now. (I don’t know, you’re just asking that now.)

A : Okay call the airline now while I am getting ready. (Okay call the airline now while I’ll get ready.)

3. A : What time does the bus leave to the airport? (what time does the bus leave for the airport?)

B : I don’t really know, it used to leave for every half an hour, but I think they reschedule it. (I don’t really know, but the bus used to leave every half hour, but maybe they changed the schedule.)

A : So, do you know the telephone number? I want to make sure. (So ​​do you know a phone number to call? I want to be sure.)

B : OK the number is 7- 4700. (OK the number is 7- 4700.)

A : Yeah I’m gonna call them. (pause) They don’t seem to answer my call. (Yeah I’ll call them. (pause) They don’t seem to be picking up my calls.)

B : Maybe because it’s too early. It’s still seven to five AM, try it later. (Probably because it’s still too early. It’s still 6:55AM, try again later.)

4. A : When shall we meet tomorrow? (When will we meet tomorrow?)

B : You mean about the party tomorrow? (You mean about tomorrow’s party?)

A : Yeah, We really need to plan better this time about the party. You remember what a mess it was at the last party? (Yeah, we really should plan the party better now. You remember how messed up the last party was?)

B : Yeah I sure do, I hope we will do much better this time. (Yeah of course I remember, I hope we’ll do better now.)

A : That’s why, we are going to meet tomorrow at your house. How to say seventy PM to you? (Because of that, we will meet at your house. How about 07.30 PM?)

B : Yeah it’s fine, see you tomorrow. (yeah that’s fine, see you tomorrow.)

Those are some examples of hour disclosures when applied in a conversation.

So, until the end of this article, did You understand how to express hours in English? Starting from the formal, non-formal, easy way to the common way?

Hooke’s Law – If we learn about physics, of course we will find various kinds of laws that apply. Just as when we are studying the elasticity of an object, of course we will find about Hooke’s law. This is one of the laws in physics that often appears in daily questions, tests or national exams.

Therefore, it is important for you, especially those who are still in high school, to learn about hooke’s law in depth. So, in this article, we will discuss Hooke’s law more fully and with a simple discussion that is easy to understand.

What is Hooke’s Law?

Hooke’s law is a law or provision regarding forces in the field of physics that occur due to the elastic properties of a pear or spring. According to Robert Hooke, a scientist who discovered Hooke’s Law, objects are divided into two types, namely plastic objects and elastic objects. Where a plastic object is an object that changes when subjected to a force and the object cannot return to its original shape after the applied force is gone. Meanwhile, elastic objects are objects that change when subjected to a force and the object can return to its original shape when the force is removed. For example, bows, peers, rubber bands, and catapults.

Robert Hooke conducted an experiment to observe the relationship between the changes that occur between elastic objects and the force exerted on them. From these experiments, Hooke found a law about the relationship between force and changes in spring force which is now known as Hooke’s law. The magnitude of the hook force will be proportionally proportional to the distance the spring travels in its initial position. If explained through a mathematical formula, it can be described as follows:

F = -kx

Information:

F is the force or units of newtons
k is the spring constant or newtons per meter
x is the distance the spring travels from its normal position or units of meters

The ability of an object to return to its original shape when an external force is removed. If a force is applied to an elastic object, the shape of the object will change. For rubber and springs, what is meant by a change in shape is the increase in length of the two objects. Objects that are elastic also have a limit of elasticity. There are two kinds of objects, namely elastic objects and inelastic objects or often called plastic.

History of Hooke’s Law

Robert Hooke is a scientist who was born in Freshwater, Isle of Wight, England on July 18, 1635. He was an inventor, mathematician and chemist, philosopher, and architect. Hooke was a pastor’s son. Where his father named John Hooke who works as a curator at the All Saints Church museum. When he was small, Hooke often studied with his father, because his parents were poor, so Hooke was not free to choose where he studied. Finally, Hooke became interested in art and then he was sent to London to begin studying with a painter named Peter Lely.

Hooke then changed his interest and decided to enroll at Westminster school to study classics as well as mathematics. Then, he studied at Robert Boyle University because of a recommendation from a Chemistry Professor named Thomas Willis who tutored Hooke. At that time, Thomas Willis had just come from Oxford and was looking for an assistant who he wanted to make as a partner to help in making air pumps. At the time, it had taken Robert Hooke at Boyle two decades to make any quite remarkable advances in mechanics.

Then in 1662, Hooke was accepted as a member of the Curator of the Royal Society whose main task was to propose and also make various kinds of experiments to be submitted at the group’s weekly meeting. Two years later, Hooke won a position as professor of geometry at Gresham College. He replaced the position of Isaac Borrow who had previously appeared in that position. In the midst of his busy life as Curator of the Royal Society in 1665, Hooke managed to publish a book entitled Micrographia. The book is a book in biology which is the only book made by him. But it also contains a number of beautiful and unusual things from someone who has drawing skills.

Hooke’s expertise as a versatile scientist was displayed in 1666, during the great fire in the City of London. Hooke, who has the ability to draw like an architect, makes master plans and plans for rebuilding buildings that have been damaged by fire. After that, the City Council finally chose Hooke to become the city’s development planner under the auspices of Sir Christopher Wren. It was he who became a close friend of Hooke and discovered the important role of oxygen in the respiratory system.

Hooke’s law that was found has a formula with a sign (-) reveals that the direction of F is opposite to the direction of change in the length of x. According to Hooke, in the presence of x which is measured using the balance position of the spring, the sign (-) will indicate that the spring is stretched (L> 0). Vice versa, when pressing the spring (L<0), the spring force is in the positive L direction while k is referred to as the spring constant having a dimension of length or force.

Robert Hooke himself has considerable attention in scientific fields, ranging from astronomy to geology, the law of conservation or elasticity which still bears his name. Hooke made several significant contributions toward explaining the motion of the planets by suggesting that the orbits of the planets were caused by a combination of inertia descending in a straight line and the gravitational pull of the sun. Robert Hooke can also be said to have an unhappy life. Where he is easily offended, especially when he is suspicious of someone who is thought to be stealing his idea. He was also often sick and unable to sleep, in fact he only slept for three to four hours. Hooke also suffered from chronic illnesses, namely his feet were inflamed and he became blind in 1702 and exactly one year later, Robert Hooke died.

 

Hooke’s Law formula

The increase in length that appears will be directly proportional to the applied tensile force. This was first investigated in the 17th century by an architect from England named Robert Hooke. At that time, Hooke observed the relationship between the tensile force exerted on a spring and the increase in length of the spring. Hooke found that the increase in length of a spring occurs in direct proportion to the applied force. In addition, Hooke also found that the increase in length of the spring is very dependent on the characteristics of the spring itself.

A spring that stretches more easily, such as a rubber band, will experience a greater increase in length even though the force exerted is relatively small. Vice versa, a spring that is difficult to stretch, like a steel spring, will experience a relatively small increase in length, even though it is given a large enough force. The characteristics that exist in each of these springs are expressed by the force constant of the spring itself. Springs that stretch easily, such as rubber bands, have a smaller force constant. Vice versa, a spring that is difficult to stretch will have a greater power constant.

In general, what Hooke discovered can be stated as follows:

F = k. x

Information:

F is the force applied to the spring (N)
k is the setting of the spring force (N/m)
x is the increase in the length of the spring (m)

Spring Potential Energy

The amount of potential energy that is in a spring can be calculated from the graph of the relationship that works on the spring with the increase in the length of the spring itself: Here is the formula:

Ep = ½ F . x
= ½ (k . x) . x
Description:
Ep = spring potential energy (joules)
k = spring force constant (N/m)
x = spring extension (m)

Elasticity Modulus

Modulus of Elasticity is a comparison between strain and stress. This modulus is known as Young’s modulus.

a. Voltage or Stress

Stress is the force per unit cross-sectional area. Where the unit of stress is N/m2.

b. Strain or Strain

Stretch is the comparison between the increase in length in a rod compared to the beginning if the rod is subjected to force.

Hooke’s Law sounds

After discussing a little description of Hooke’s law and also various things related to elasticity in an object. Now, we will discuss about the sound of Hooke’s law. So, according to Hooke’s law, the greater the force exerted on an object, the longer the spring will be.

The following is Hooke’s law:

“If the tensile force exerted on a spring does not exceed the elastic limit of the material, the increase in spring length is directly proportional or proportional to the tensile force.”

After reading Hooke’s law above, do you understand more? So, we can conclude that the purpose of Hooke’s law is that when the force we apply exceeds the elastic limit, the object cannot return to its original shape.

 

Hooke’s Law Application

In everyday life, we will often encounter objects related to Hooke’s law. The application of Hooke’s law will be closely related to objects that have a working principle by using an elastic spring.

There are various examples of applications related to Hooke’s law, including:

1. A microscope that has the function of seeing various kinds of objects that have small properties or micro-organisms that are very small and cannot be seen using only the naked eye.
2. A clock that uses a peer to set the time.
3. Swings that have spring properties.
4. A gauze clock or chronometer used to determine the direction or position line of a ship in the middle of the sea.
5. An instrument for measuring the acceleration of gravity of the earth.
6. Connection of a gear stick to a vehicle such as a car or motorcycle.
7. Tools such as telescopes are useful for being able to see objects that are far away so that they look closer.

So, basically the idea of ​​Hooke’s law will have a positive impact on ourselves.

Hooke’s Law Magnitude

Hooke’s law also has a quantity that you can learn, including:

1. Voltage

Tension is a condition of an object that experiences an increase in length when an object is given a force at one end, while the other end is held. The following is the voltage formula:

σ = F/A

F is the force (N)
A is the cross-sectional area (m2)
σ is the stress (N/m2 or pa)

2. Stretching

Stretch is a comparison between the increase in the length of the wire in x meters and the normal length of the wire in x meters. The appearance of a stretch because there is a force given to the object or wire that is removed. So that the wire will return to its original shape.

The following is the strain formula:

e = ΔL/ Lo

e is the stretch
AL is the increase in length (m)
Lo is the initial length (m)

3. Modulus of Elasticity

The modulus of elasticity is the ratio between the stress and strain experienced by a material. It is formulated by:

E = p/e

E is the elastic modulus (N/m)
σ is the stress (N/m2 or Pa)
e is the strain

4. Compression

Compression is a condition that is almost the same as strain. The difference is only in the direction of movement of the object’s molecules after being given a certain force. When compressed, the object’s molecules will be pushed inwards.

5. Relationship Between Tensile Force and Modulus of Elasticity

If written mathematically, the relationship between tensile force and elastic modulus is as follows:

Information:
F = Force (N)
E = Modulus of elasticity (N/m)
e = Strain
σ = Stress (N/ m2 or Pa)
A = Cross-sectional area (m2)
E = Modulus of elasticity (N/m)
ΔL = Length gain (m)
Lo = initial length (m)

6. Exemption Law

Hooke’s law states that if the tensile force does not exceed the elastic limit of the spring, then the length of the spring will be proportional to the tensile force. If written mathematically, it would be like this:

Information:
F = external force exerted (N)
k = spring constant (N/m)
Δx = addition of spring length from its normal position (m)

Hooke’s Law for Spring Arrays

a. Series order

If two springs that have the same spring constant are in series, then the length of the spring is 2 times. Therefore, the spring equation is as follows:

Note:
Ks = spring equation
k = spring constant (N/m)

While the equation for n springs whose settings are also arranged in series, will be written like this:

Description:
n = Number of springs

b. Parallel Arrangement

If the springs are arranged in parallel, the length of the spring remains as it was at the beginning, while the cross-sectional area is doubled from the beginning if the spring is composed of two pieces. For spring equations arranged in parallel are:

Note:
Kp = Equation of a parallel arrangement of springs
k = Spring constant (N/m)

While the equation of n springs with the same settings and arranged in a parallel system, it will produce a stronger spring. Because the settings become larger. The spring equation can be written as follows:

Description:
n = Number of springs

Example of Hooke’s Law Problem

A spring has an increase in length of 0.25 m after a force is applied. If the spring reads 400 N/m. How much force is exerted on the spring?

known :
x = 0,25 m
k = 400 N/m
asked F….?

Answer

F = k . x
F = 400 N/m x 0,25 m
F = 100 N

So the force exerted on the spring is 100 Newton.

 

History and Types of Betawi Traditional Houses – Betawi is one of the most diverse tribes in Jakarta. This is because the community is made up of various ethnic groups in Indonesia. So it is not surprising that the people there have a very high tolerance for other people.

This is realized or characterized through the building of traditional houses which are rich in meaning. There are many interesting things about the Betawi traditional house, starting from its history, building philosophy, and the various types of buildings. To find out more, see the following review of the Betawi traditional house.

History of the Betawi Traditional House

History is an important thing that should be studied. Especially for the history of the Betawi traditional house. This Betawi traditional house is also closely related to the existence of the Betawi people themselves. Betawi itself comes from the word Batavia, which became the nickname of the city of Jakarta in the past.

When the Dutch colonial government conducted a population census in 1930, it was only recently that Betawi was known to exist. Betawi became a separate ethnic group in Indonesia at that time. They are referred to as the ethnic group that inhabited Batavia at that time.
Actually, the Betawi ethnicity is a combination of residents from various regions. Among them are Java, Bali, Makassar, Sunda and Sunda which were previously imported by the Dutch government. In the end, the inter-ethnic marriages that inhabited Batavia became ethnic Betawi residents.

If you look again, this Betawi traditional house is influenced by cultural acculturation. Where there were several tribes in the Batavia area, they merged with each other. As a result, you can see the architecture of the Betawi traditional house.

There are two cultures that merge in the traditional house, including international and local culture. From its appearance, you can see the shape of the Betawi house is almost similar to the typical Joglo house in Central Java.
Then you will also see some of the characteristics of the Sundanese stage houses there. Then, international culture is also involved in the Betawi traditional house. Ornaments and ornaments used by the Betawi people, such as in the manufacture of doors and windows, are adopted from foreign cultures, such as Arabic, European and Chinese.

Types of Betawi Traditional Houses

Each region certainly has more than one traditional house. In addition to being the result of the culture of a region, these kinds of traditional houses are also characteristics of people’s lives. In Betawi itself, only the Kebaya house is officially registered as a traditional house. However, besides that there are still several types that are also there. Among them are Stage houses, Joglo houses, and Warehouse houses.

Although not officially recorded, these houses still exist in Betawi and have been preserved by residents until now. So that its existence is also quite influential on the culture of the local community. For more details, see the following reviews of the four Betawi traditional houses:

1. Kebaya House

Kebaya may be better known as traditional custom clothing. Yes, perhaps the name of the Kebaya house is not well known to the wider community. In fact, this type of house has been officially recognized as a Betawi traditional house.

Why is it called Kebaya? Because the shape of the roof of this house is similar to a folded saddle. Then if you look at it from the side, the folds will look like the folds on a kebaya cloth.

In this Kebaya house there are also certain rules in the division of space. Usually, homeowners divide space into 2 areas, one for semi-public (receiving guests, etc.) and the other for private space. Public areas are generally placed at the front, namely as a terrace and living room. If you visit the Kebaya house, you can come and sit freely in that area.

Meanwhile, there are various private areas of the Kebaya house, such as the bathroom, bedroom, dining room, kitchen and yard. This area is usually only allowed to be seen by certain people, can be relatives or close relatives.

There is also a special room for guests in this house, named paseban. As a tribute to guests who stay, this room will be decorated and made as good as possible. The doors are carved, or the roof is laced like a kebaya. But this paseban can also be used as a place of worship if there are no guests staying overnight.

2. Warehouse

The second Betawi traditional house is the Gudang house. Usually this type of house will be found in the interior. As already explained, several types of houses are formed based on the location and culture around it. So, there are rules that only allow people in remote areas to build these Warehouse houses.

The shape of the Warehouse house is elongated like a rectangle. The roof has a gable structure on top of which is equipped with jurai and shield ornaments. Then the horse structure is used for the roof structure of the barn house.

In the warehouse house there are two divisions of space with different functions. The front room is used to receive guests, then the middle for the kitchen and bedroom. Warehouse houses generally don’t have a back, because the back room will be combined with the living room.

3. Stage House

The next traditional house is the stage house. This house is similar to Si Pitung’s house. These buildings are usually located in coastal areas. This high stilt house has been adapted to the coastal area, so if there is a high tide the house is still safe and not submerged in water.

Most of the materials used in the construction of stilt houses are wood. Apart from being easy to shape, in the past wood materials were much easier to find.

If you visit a stilt house, you will find simple and unique Betawi ornaments. Usually the ornaments used are geometric carvings, such as squares, diamonds, or circles. The installation also varies, there are doors, windows, and other parts.

4. Joglo House

Apart from being known as a Javanese traditional house, the joglo house is also known as a Betawi traditional house. Even so, the two certainly still have differences. If the Central Javanese Joglo house has a roof like a trapezoid, the Betawi joglo house has a roof like an overturned boat. Then if the Javanese Joglo is known for its buffer or pillar, then that is not the case with the Betawi joglo.

The Betawi Joglo traditional house has a square shape and the building is made elongated. Then, the house is divided into three rooms. First the front room, then the middle room, and the back room. As usual, the vestibule is used to receive and entertain guests.

Then the living room is filled with living room and bedroom, the place is more private than the front room. Then the back room is used for the bathroom and kitchen. This joglo house has a wider architecture than other houses.

So that those who have Joglo Betawi houses are usually people with high social status. Apart from its architecture, the wood material is also quite expensive, and these houses are usually located on the outskirts of the city.

The Philosophical Meaning of the Betawi Traditional House

Betawi traditional house consists of several types. One of the characteristics attached to Betawi houses is the wide terrace. This terrace is intentionally made wide, its philosophical meaning is as a place to receive guests and to gather and relax with family members.

This is quite different from modern homes where the family room is usually on the inside. However, this traditional house is different, even with a wide terrace it can make them more comfortable to have fun together.

On the terrace, you will usually place a bale-bale chair made of rattan, bamboo or teak wood, which is called an amben. The terrace floor uses gejogan, which shows respect for guests who come to the house. For the Betawi people, it turns out that this gejogan is quite sacred. The reason is because it is directly related to the entrance to the house which is named balaksuji.

Apart from that, the wide terrace of the house also means that the people of the house or Betawi people are very open to the arrival of guests. Moreover, the Betawi people are also known to highly value pluralism or differences between ethnic groups and religions. This is very reasonable, considering the history of the Betawi people who came from the association of several tribes in Indonesia.

There is also another meaning for the fence built on the front of the Betawi house. It turns out that there is a certain philosophical meaning from the existence of a fence that surrounds the house on the front. This fence for the community is interpreted as a barrier to negative things from the outside that can enter the house. So hopefully, with a fence, the atmosphere in the house always has a positive aura. Because negative things have been blocked by the existence of a fence.

Then some Betawi people also made a well in front of the house and made a grave next to the house. The tradition of making graves beside the house is an old tradition for the Betawi people. Therefore, from the past, the Betawi people were known to own large tracts of land and land.

Each division of space in the Betawi traditional house also has its own philosophical meaning. Here are the characteristics of the space:

• The front porch of the house, as a place to receive guests. It will always be cleaned every day as a tribute if guests come at any time.
• Paseban or rooms that are specifically for guests who will spend the night. In addition to guests, paseban is also often used as a place of worship.
• Pangkeng or a place to gather with family. Usually there is also in the middle, which serves to gather with family.
• There are usually quite a lot of bedrooms in Betawi houses. The most extensive main section will be devoted to homeowners
• Srondoyan or kitchen, which is a large place at the back. This place is used as a cooking room, as well as a place to eat.

Unique Characteristics or Uniqueness of Betawi Houses

Like other traditional houses, the Betawi traditional house also has characteristics that distinguish it from other traditional houses in other regions. Here are some of its characteristics:

1. Does not have a bathroom attached to the main building

The first uniqueness is the absence of a bathroom in a traditional house. The Betawi people have certain principles that are trusted and upheld by the people. One of them is to say, all dirt must be removed from the main building or buildings where they live.

This is intended so that the occupants of the house or anyone who lives in the house remain clean both physically and mentally. Therefore, not every Betawi traditional house has a bathroom attached to the main building. Generally they put the bathroom behind the house, separate from the main building.

2. Using carvings and ornaments that have meaning

Then the second is the number of carvings or ornaments inside and outside the house that contain meaning. Each display in the Betawi traditional house has its own meaning. Apart from being a decoration to beautify the room, there is also a meaning that is expected. Here are the meanings of some of the carvings and ornaments commonly found there:

• The carving of jasmine flowers, which means that the owner of the house must have feelings and a fragrant heart like when jasmine flowers bloom. This is symbolized through carvings of jasmine flowers, which have a fragrant smell. Usually this carving is displayed on a pole.
• Sunflower carving, which means every home owner’s life must be an inspiration for local residents. Its meaning is as a light, which can illuminate the hearts and minds of family members in the house. Usually this sunflower carving is installed on the living room door.
• The carvings of gunungan or tumpal, which symbolize the forces of nature, namely the universe or macrocosm, human or microcosm, and the unseen world or metacosm.
• Other carvings have the meaning of elegance, such as the Kim Hong flower which means tenacity, then the deer means agile and responsive, and there is a peacock which means splendor.
• Gigi balang ornament, which is an ornament of wooden planks in the form of inverted triangles lined up. Usually this ornament is installed under the roof of the house or on the skirting board. The meaning of this display is that the Betawi people must live in honesty, must be diligent, tenacious, and patient. This is likened to a locust, which can only break plants if it is tenacious, continues to work even though it takes quite a long time.

3. Has a low fence with a wide terrace

As previously explained above, the traditional house there has a wide terrace. The pavilion or terrace is usually equipped with seats as well as benches or places to lie down. All of that is prepared to entertain guests who come. This means that the Betawi people are indeed very open to various new people, and do not look at ethnicity, religion, or race.

In addition, the fence that is made around the front of the house is generally not too high. The fence is made low about 80 cm with a thickness of about 3 to 5 cm. The material is made of wood. The meaning of this low fence is that there is a boundary between the outside world and the house.

The hope is that the house can be protected from negative things outside the fence. Then the entrance to the house also has a meaning, namely for guests who come should have good manners. When entering the house must go through the front, not the back.

The Influence of Hinduism and Buddhism in Indonesia – It is no stranger to Hindu and Buddhist culture and religion having existed in Indonesia for a long time. In fact, it has been around since the 5th century to the 15th century. The arrival of Hindu and Buddhist culture and religion resulted in an acculturation of culture with Indonesian culture. Therefore, there are many historical buildings in Indonesia that are Hindu and Buddhist.

Acculturation of Hindu and Buddhist culture with Indonesian culture can occur because the mixing of cultures does not eliminate the original Indonesian culture. In fact, until now there are many Indonesian scientists and people who really want to know more about this cultural acculturation.

The acculturation of Hindu and Buddhist culture with Indonesian culture has had an influence on the lives of Indonesian people. In the following, we will explain more about the influence of Hinduism and Buddhism in the life of Indonesian society.

 

Hindu-Buddhist Influence on Indonesian Society

We can see Hindu-Buddhist influence from various kinds of buildings, works, or even activities that can be applied in everyday life.

 

1. Building Arts (Architecture)

Historical records say that in Indonesia there were many ancient kingdoms with Hindu and Buddhist backgrounds. Therefore, there were many buildings built at that time with Hindu and Buddhist styles. Until now, we can still see some of the buildings built during the Hindu-Buddhist kingdom.

The buildings built in the Hindu-Buddhist kingdoms were usually in the form of a temple. Each temple building that has a Hindu-Buddhist style has a different function. There are temple buildings that function as places of worship, burials, and some as holy baths.

The temple that functions as a tomb is a Hindu temple. While the temple that serves as a place of worship is a temple with a Buddhist style. If you look at the building with Hindu-Buddhist style, it can be said that the Hindu and Buddhist kingdoms were very victorious in their time.

Basically the temple is divided into several parts, namely the foot of the temple, the body of the temple and the top of the temple. The foot of the temple is called bhurloka which means the realm of the mortal world. The body of the temple is called bhurwaloka which means the realm of cleansing the soul, and the top of the temple is called swarloka which means the realm of the holy soul. However, the existence of cultural acculturation makes the temple buildings adapted to the uniqueness of Indonesian culture.

Sinaumed’s, have you ever compared the temples in Central Java with the temples in East Java? The temples in the two regions have several differences, namely:

a. Temple in Central Java

In general, temples in Central Java have a chubby shape decorated with kalamakara or giant faces. Kalamakara decorations are generally located at the entrance to the temple.

The top of the temple in Central Java has a characteristic with the shape of the stupa and the main material is andesite stone. The direction of this temple is facing east.

b. Temple in East Java

Temples located in Central Java usually have a slimmer shape and have simpler decorations compared to the kalamakara at the entrance. If the temples in Central Java are in the shape of a stupa, then the temples in East Java are in the shape of a cube.

The main material for making temples in East Java is brick. Meanwhile, the direction of this temple is more towards the west.

 

2. Fine Arts and Carving

Based on historical records, Indonesian people have been able to make paintings or drawings. This ability appeared before the influence of Hindu-Buddhist culture. In addition, the oldest painting in Indonesia is located on a cave wall in Maros Regency, South Sulawesi. In fact, dr. Maxime Aubert from Griffiths University of Australia said that the paintings in Maros Regency are more than 38-40 thousand years old.

Before the entry of Hindu-Buddhist influence, Indonesian people already had a habit of painting or drawing with very simple patterns. After the entry of Hindu-Buddhist influence into fine art, then the Indonesian people developed pictures or paintings with more difficult motifs and were influenced by Indian culture.

In addition to having an influence on the fine arts, Hindu-Buddhist also had an influence on carving, sculpture, relief and makara. The form of Hindu-Buddhist art has always developed in its time, so there are lots of motifs.

a. Statue

Basically the people of Indonesia have known the art of very large stone carvings, such as menhirs and sarcophagi. From the carvings of menhirs and sarcophagi, it can be said that Indonesian people already have a habit of making statues with human-like shapes. Usually the statues made by ancient Indonesian people functioned as stones of worship.

The art of making these statues is growing, especially when Hindu-Buddhist entered Indonesia. In the Hindu period, every statue made was placed in the temples. Usually the statues at this time were divided into two forms, namely three-dimensional and half- tridimensional .

Sculptures with tridimensional shapes give the meaning of gods, humans, and animals. Therefore, the form of a three-dimensional statue is inside the temple. The creation of three-dimensional statues serves to pay homage to the kings who have died. Meanwhile, statues with half- tridimensional shapes are generally found in the temple reliefs.

While the statues at the time of the Buddha were generally in the form of the Buddha. Statues of the Buddha are usually made with the position of the hand that is pointing in a certain direction of the compass.

 

b. reliefs

Relief can be said as one of the elements in the temples in Indonesia. The reliefs that we usually see are pictures that appear on the walls of the temple. However, the reliefs in Indonesian temples always have meanings in the form of religious teachings, daily life, and stories of the gods.

The reliefs in Hindu-style temples generally explain stories originating from holy books or literary works. The literary works used, such as Mahabharata , Ramayana, Sudamala, Kresnayana , and Arjunawiwaha . You can see examples of reliefs with Hindu motifs that tell the story of Ramayana in the Prambanan temple.

While the reliefs of Buddha, usually tell about the story and life journey of the Buddha, Sidharta Gautama.

c. Makara

In Hindu-Buddhist mythology there is a living creature named Makara. Makara is the embodiment of a large sea animal and is always identified with sharks, crocodiles and dolphins, so it is often used as temple motifs.

With this makara motif, it can be seen that there is a mixture of Indian carving and Javanese carving. The purpose of making makara is to prevent bad traits from entering the temple and to give a sign that this temple is a sacred place.

 

3. Performing Arts

The influx of Hindu-Buddhist influence can not only be seen from the style of the building, but we can see it through several performing arts. Performing arts that experienced development during the Hindu-Buddhist era, such as wayang, dance, and music.

a. Puppet Art

Before the Hindu-Buddhist era, the performance of wayang art functioned as a form of worship ceremony for ancestral spirits known as Hyang and the arrival of wayang was a form of ancestral spirits.

In the Hindu-Buddhist era, wayang performances were developed according to the times by bringing stories from India, such as the Ramayana and Mahabharata. Even though they come from India, there are several figures from Indonesia who appear in wayang performances.

 

b. Dance Arts

As with wayang performing arts, dance also existed before the Hindu-Buddhist era entered. The art of performing dance is usually used to express gratitude to the Creator for having been given enough crops. In addition, the process of appointing tribal chiefs usually uses dance performances as well.

Performing arts caused by the influence of Hindu-Buddhist, until now its preservation but well maintained. By preserving the art of dance, it indicates that Indonesia’s cultural heritage will not be easily lost. Dance performances with Hindu-Buddhist influences can be seen in the Ramayana ballet which is held at the Prambanan temple during the full moon.

c. Music Art

JLA Brandes said that gamelan is one of the original performing arts owned by the Indonesian nation. This could be because the Indonesian people already think that gamelan music is the oldest musical art in Indonesia.

The development of gamelan music is growing rapidly, especially when Hindu-Buddhist entered Indonesia. Information about the art of gamelan music can be found in temple reliefs, books, and literary works.

4. Literary Arts and Script

The Hindu-Buddhist era is often known as the beginning of the emergence of script in Indonesia. The oldest script in Indonesia was found in Kutai, East Kalimantan and is located on the Yupa stone inscription. The Yupa inscription is written in Pallawa letters and Sanskrit.

At the beginning of its emergence, the Pallawa script was used to write things on stone inscriptions and in literary works. After experiencing various developments, the Pallawa script developed into the Hacaraka script. The Hanacaraka script is used to write Javanese and Balinese scripts.

With the Pallawa script and Sanskrit language that is often used, it makes people move to develop local literature. Broadly speaking, every literary work in the Hindu-Buddhist era was heavily influenced by the Ramayana and Mahabharata literature from India.

Stories originating from India are combined with Indonesian culture, resulting in stories that are meaningful and of course interesting to read. Literary works in the Hindu-Buddhist era were usually in the form of books compiled by Mpu Panuluh and Mpu Sedah with the title Bharatayudha

 

5. Belief System

The belief system that existed during the Hindu-Buddhist era had three very important elements. First , in the pre-literate period, a belief system originated from community groups or tribal chiefs which was marked by the existence of a ritual. These rituals are believed to be a form of respect to the gods.

Second, there is a belief in heirlooms which are considered to have magical powers in them. In the Hindu-Buddhist era, belief in heirlooms was very strong, so many people believed in the power that existed in these heirlooms.

Third , in the Hindu-Buddhist era, religious leaders always had a respected place in society. In addition, religious leaders are highly respected by the community.

From these three historical facts, it can be said that the Hindu-Buddhist influence did not eliminate the original beliefs of the Indonesian people. In fact, the development of Hindu-Buddhist religions can be said to have combined original beliefs or local beliefs that had existed before.

 

 

6. Social System

In the Hindu-Buddhist social system, the social roles and functions of community members are grouped based on their degree level.

a. Brahmin

At this level, someone will have the role of being an adviser to the king and religious educator.

b. Knight

At this level, someone will become the administrator and administrator of the government system which aims to maintain royal power. Knights also play a role as defenders of the kingdom, such as the king’s assistants and soldiers.

c. Vaishya

At this level, a person is categorized as an ordinary person who has a profession, such as a trader, farmer, fisherman and artist.

d. Sudras

At this level, a person is categorized as a society that has the lowest degree. Usually someone who gets the rank of Shudra, such as lowly workers, laborers, slaves, and servants.

 

7. Government System

Before the entry of Hindu-Buddhist, Indonesian society adhered to a system of government in the form of a group leader or tribal chief. In the tribal chief government system, each leader is elected based on who has the most influence on the group.

However, after the entry of Hindu-Buddhist, the tribal government system changed to a royal system. The leader of a community group is in the hands of a king. A king has the right to inherit his throne from generation to generation.

In this royal system, shamans are appointed as advisers and have the title of Brahmin and their position is under the king. Meanwhile, the position of the people remained as waisya and the slaves remained in their position, namely as sudras.

 

8. Calendar System

In prehistoric times, people always counted days using astronomy. Astronomy is believed to be able to determine the direction of the wind, especially when sailing. In fact, in determining the time of harvest also uses astronomy.

However, the entry of Hindu-Buddhism into Indonesia has had an impact on Indonesian society in the form of time calculations based on the Saka calendar. The Saka year calendar has a total of 365 days. While the Saka year with the Christian year has a year difference, which is 78 years.

 

Hindu-Buddhist Entrance Path

Hindu-Buddhist influence entered Indonesia through trade routes and was brought by traders and priests from India and China. The entry of Hindu-Buddhist influence through two types of trade routes, namely land routes and sea routes.

1. Land Line

The land route became the route for Hindu-Buddhism to be brought to Indonesia, so that when in Indonesia there was cultural acculturation. This overland route was made by traders via the silk route. The route of this route is divided into two parts, namely the northern silk route route and the southern silk route route.

The northern silk route route started from India to Tibet, then headed north until it reached China, Korea, and Japan.

Meanwhile, the Silk Road route started from North India to Bangladesh, then headed to Myanmar, Thailand, the Malay Peninsula, and headed to Indonesia.

2. Sea Route

In addition to land routes, the spread of Hindu-Buddhist through the sea. This sea route is very synonymous with merchant ship groups and usually sea route travel routes starting from India, then to Myanmar, Thailand, the Malay Peninsula, and the last stop in Indonesian territory.

 

Conclusion

The entry of Hindu-Buddhist influences the lives of Indonesian people and mixes Hindu-Buddhist culture with Indonesian culture. Even though it has an influence on the life of Indonesian society and culture, it still does not reduce the authenticity or values ​​of Indonesian society and Indonesian culture. The acculturation of this culture shows that Indonesian society is open to new cultures.